Kubota WSM B1220 B1620 B1820

WORKSHOP MANUAL
TRACTOR
B1220,B1620,B1820
KiSC issued 07, 2011 A

TO THE READER
This Workshop Manual tells the servicing personnel about the mechanism, servicing and
maintenance of the B1220, B1620 and B1820. It contains 4 parts: "Information", "General",
"Mechanism" and "Servicing".
Q Information
This section contains information below.
• Safety First
• Safety Label
• Specification
• Dimension
Q General
• Engine Identification
• Model Identification
• General Precautions
• Maintenance Check List
• Check and Maintenance
• Special Tools
Q Mechanism
This section contains information on the structure and the function of the unit. Before you continue
with the subsequent sections, make sure that you read this section.
Refer to the latest version of Workshop Manual (Code No. 9Y021-01870 / 9Y021-18200) for the
diesel engine / tractor mechanism that this workshop manual does not include.
Q Servicing
• Troubleshooting
• Servicing Specifications
• Tightening Torques
• Checking, Disassembling and Servicing
All illustrations, photographs and specifications contained in this manual are of the newest
information available at the time of publication.
KUBOTA reserves the right to change all information at any time without notice.
Since this manual includes many models, information or illustrations and photographs can show
more than one model.
February, 2009
© KUBOTA Corporation 2009

I INFORMATION

INFORMATION
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY FIRST .............................................................................................................................. I-1

2. SAFETY DECALS .......................................................................................................................... I-4
3. SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................................................................................... I-6
4. TRAVELING SPEEDS.................................................................................................................... I-7
5. DIMENSIONS ................................................................................................................................. I-8

B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM INFORMATION
1. SAFETY FIRST
SAFETY FIRST
• This symbol, the industry's "Safety Alert Symbol", is used throughout this manual and on labels on the
machine itself to warn of the possibility of personal injury. Read these instructions carefully.
• It is essential that you read the instructions and safety regulations before you attempt to repair or use
this unit.
DANGER
• Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
• Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
• Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury.
IMPORTANT
• Indicates that equipment or property damage could result if instructions are not followed.
NOTE
• Gives helpful information.
WSM000001INI0001US1
BEFORE YOU START SERVICE
• Read all instructions and safety instructions in this
manual and on your machine safety decals.
• Clean the work area and machine.
• Park the machine on a stable and level ground, and
set the parking brake.
• Lower the implement to the ground.
• Stop the engine, then remove the key.
• Disconnect the battery negative cable.
• Hang a "DO NOT OPERATE" tag in the operator
station.
WSM000001INI0010US1
START SAFELY
• Do not do the procedures below when you start the
engine.
– short across starter terminals
– bypass the safety start switch
• Do not alter or remove any part of machine safety
system.
• Before you start the engine, make sure that all shift
levers are in neutral positions or in disengaged
positions.
• Do not start the engine when you stay on the ground.
Start the engine only from operator's seat.
WSM000001INI0015US0
I-1 (EU)
OPERATE SAFELY
• Do not use the machine after you consume alcohol
or medication or when you are tired.
• Put on applicable clothing and safety equipment.
• Use applicable tools only. Do not use alternative
tools or parts.
• When 2 or more persons do servicing, make sure
that you do it safely.
• Do not operate below the machine that only a jack
holds. Always use a safety stand to hold the
machine.
• Do not touch the hot parts or parts that turn when the
engine operates.
• Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine
operates, or immediately after it stops. If not, hot
water can spout out from the radiator. Only remove
the radiator cap when it is at a sufficiently low
temperature to touch with bare hands. Slowly loosen
the cap to release the pressure before you remove it
fully.
• Released fluid (fuel or hydraulic oil) under pressure
can cause damage to the skin and cause serious
injury. Release the pressure before you disconnect
hydraulic or fuel lines. Tighten all connections before
you apply the pressure.
• Do not open a fuel system under high pressure.
The fluid under high pressure that stays in fuel lines
can cause serious injury. Do not disconnect or repair
the fuel lines, sensors, or any other components
between the fuel pump and injectors on engines with
a common rail fuel system under high pressure.
• Put on an applicable ear protective device (earmuffs
or earplugs) to prevent injury against loud noises.
• Be careful about electric shock. The engine
generates a high voltage of more than DC100 V in
the ECU and is applied to the injector.
WSM000001INI0012US1
PREVENT A FIRE
• Fuel is very flammable and explosive under some
conditions. Do not smoke or let flames or sparks in
your work area.
• To prevent sparks from an accidental short circuit,
always disconnect the battery negative cable first
and connect it last.
• The battery gas can cause an explosion. Keep the
sparks and open flame away from the top of battery,
especially when you charge the battery.
• Make sure that you do not spill fuel on the engine.
WSM000001INI0005US1
I-2 (EU)
KEEP A GOOD AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA
• If the engine is in operation, make sure that the area
has good airflow. Do not operate the engine in a
closed area. The exhaust gas contains poisonous
carbon monoxide.
WSM000001INI0006US1
DISCARD FLUIDS CORRECTLY

• Do not discard fluids on the ground, down the drain,
into a stream, pond, or lake. Obey related
environmental protection regulations when you
discard oil, fuel, coolant, electrolyte and other
dangerous waste.
WSM000001INI0007US1
PREVENT ACID BURNS

• Keep electrolyte away from your eyes, hands and
clothing. Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is
poisonous and it can burn your skin and clothing and
cause blindness. If you spill electrolyte on yourself,
clean yourself with water, and get medical aid
immediately.
WSM000001INI0008US1
PREPARE FOR EMERGENCIES

• Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher ready at all
times.
• Keep the emergency contact telephone numbers
near your telephone at all times.
WSM000001INI0009US1
I-3 (EU)
2. SAFETY DECALS
The following safety decals (pictorial safety labels) are installed on the machine. If a decal becomes
damaged, illegible or is not on the machine, replace it. The decal part number is listed in the parts list.
WSM000001INI0014US0
9Y1210272INI0001US0
I-4 (EU)
9Y1210272INI0002US0
I-5 (EU)
3. SPECIFICATIONS
Model B1220D B1620D B1820D B1820DS
PTO power* 7.0 kW (9.5 HP) 9.2 kW (12.5 HP) 10.7 kW (14.5 HP)
Maker KUBOTA
Model Z482-D25 D722-D25 D782-D25 D782-D25P
Type Indirect injection. Vertical, water-cooled, 4cycle diesel
Number of cylinder 2 3
Bore and stroke 67.0 × 68.0 mm (2.60 × 2.70 in.) 67.0 × 73.6 mm (2.60 × 2.90 in.)
Total displacement 479 cm (189 in.) 719 cm (283 in.) 778 cm (306 in.)
Engine
Engine gross power* 8.8 kW (12.0 HP) 11.8 kW (16.0 HP) 13.2 kW (18.0 HP)
Rated revolution 3100 min-1 (rpm) 2800 min-1 (rpm)
27.7 N·m
40.5 N·m 45.0 N·m
Maximum torque (2.82 kgf·m,
(4.1 kgf·m, 29.9 lbf·ft) (4.6 kgf·m, 33.2 lbf·ft)
20.4 lbf·ft)
Battery 12 V, RC : 70 min, CCA : 400 A
Fuel tank 14 L (3.7 U.S.gals, 3.1 Imp.gals)
Engine crankcase 1.6 L (1.7 U.S.qts,
2.4 L (2.5 U.S.qts, 2.1 Imp.qts)
Capacities (with filter) 1.4 Imp.qts)
Engine coolant 3.4 L (3.6 U.S.qts, 3.0 Imp.qts)
Transmission case 10.5 L (11.1 U.S.qts, 9.24 Imp.qts)
Overall length (with 3P) 2360 mm (92.91 in.)
Overall width 932 mm (36.7 in.) 927 mm (36.5 in.)
Overall height
1235 mm (48.62 in.) 1255 mm (49.41 in.)
(top of steering wheel)
Dimensions
Wheel base 1270 mm (50.00 in.)
Minimum ground clearance 250 mm (9.84 in.) 270 mm (10.6 in.)
Front 778 mm (30.6 in.) 767 mm (30.2 in.)
Tread
Rear 707 to 1035 mm (27.84 to 40.74 in.) 743 to 1035 mm (29.26 to 40.74 in.)
Weight 460 kg (1010 lbs) 510 kg (1120 lbs) 520 kg (1150 lbs)
Clutch Dry single plate
Front 4.5 - 10 5 - 12
Tires
Rear 7 - 16 8 - 16
Steering Manual Power steering
Travelling
Transmission Gear-shift, 6 forward and 2 reverse
system
Brake Wet disk type
Min. turning radius
1.8 m (5.9 feet)
(with brake)
Hydraulic control system Up and down type control valve
3P :
14.1 L (3.72 U.S.gals,
3.10 Imp.gals) / min.
Pump capacity 3P : 14.1 L (3.72 U.S.gals, 3.10 Imp.gals) / min.
Power steering :
8.6 L (2.3 U.S.gals,
Hydraulic unit 1.9 Imp.gals) / min.
3 point hitch SAE Category 1
At lift points 430 kg (948 lbs) 540 kg (1190 lbs)
600 mm
Max. lift force
behind lift 330 kg (728 lbs) 410 kg (904 lbs)
point
Shaft SAE 1-3/8, 6 splines
540 min-1 (rpm) /
Rear PTO PTO / Engine 3082 min-1 (rpm), 540 min-1 (rpm) / 2773 min-1 (rpm),
speed rpm 1000 min-1 (rpm) / 1000 min-1 (rpm) / 2722 min-1 (rpm)
PTO system 3150 min-1 (rpm)
Shaft USA No. 5 (KUBOTA 10-tooth) involute spline
Mid PTO
(If equipped) PTO / Engine
– 2500 min-1 (rpm) / 2750 min-1 (rpm)
speed rpm
NOTE
• *Manufacture's estimate
The company reserves the right to change the specifications without notice.
9Y1210272INI0003US0
I-6 (EU)
4. TRAVELING SPEEDS
B1220
Model B1220
Tire size (Rear) 7 - 16 Farm
Range gear Main gear
km/h mph
shift lever shift lever
1 1 0.79 0.49
2 Low 2 1.43 0.889
3 3 2.59 1.61
4 1 4.41 2.74
Forward
5 High 2 7.79 4.84
3 14.44 8.973
6 Max. speed
15.14 9.408
(at 3250 engine rpm)
1 Low R/AR 1.06 0.659
High R/AR 5.91 3.67
Reverse
2 Max. speed
6.19 3.85
B1620 and B1820

Model B1620 B1820
Tire size (Rear) 7 - 16 Farm 8 - 16 Farm
Range gear Main gear
km/h mph km/h mph
shift lever shift lever
1 1 0.88 0.55 0.94 0.58
2 Low 2 1.59 0.988 1.7 1.1
3 3 2.88 1.79 3.07 1.91
4 1 4.9 3 5.24 3.26
Forward
5 High 2 8.86 5.51 9.46 5.88
3 16.05 9.973 17.13 10.64
6 Max. speed
16.91 10.51 18.05 11.22
1 Low R/AR 1.18 0.733 1.26 0.783
High R/AR 6.57 4.08 7.01 4.36
Reverse
2 Max. speed
6.92 4.3 7.39 4.59
9Y1210272INI0004US0
I-7 (EU)
5. DIMENSIONS
9Y1210272INI0005US0
I-8 (EU)
G GENERAL

GENERAL
CONTENTS
1. TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION....................................................................................................... G-1

[1] MODEL NAME AND SERIAL NUMBER ................................................................................ G-1
[2] CYLINDER NUMBER ............................................................................................................. G-2
2. GENERAL PRECAUTIONS.......................................................................................................... G-3
3. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS AND WIRING .................................... G-4
[1] WIRING .................................................................................................................................. G-4
[2] BATTERY ............................................................................................................................... G-6
[3] FUSE ...................................................................................................................................... G-6
[4] CONNECTOR ........................................................................................................................ G-6
[5] HANDLING OF CIRCUIT TESTER ........................................................................................ G-7
[6] COLOR OF WIRING .............................................................................................................. G-8
4. LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT......................................................................................... G-9
5. TIGHTENING TORQUES........................................................................................................... G-11
[1] GENERAL USE SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS .................................................................. G-11
[2] STUD BOLTS ....................................................................................................................... G-11
[3] METRIC SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS .............................................................................. G-12
[4] AMERICAN STANDARD SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS WITH UNC OR UNF
THREADS ............................................................................................................................ G-12
[5] PLUGS ................................................................................................................................. G-12
6. MAINTENANCE CHECK LIST ................................................................................................... G-13
7. CHECK AND MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................... G-17
[1] DAILY CHECK...................................................................................................................... G-17
[2] CHECK POINTS OF INITIAL 50 HOURS ............................................................................ G-18
[3] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 50 HOURS ............................................................................ G-20
[4] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 100 HOURS .......................................................................... G-23
[7] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 800 HOURS ............................................................................. G-32
[8] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 1500 HOURS ........................................................................... G-32
[9] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 3000 HOURS ........................................................................... G-32
[10]CHECK POINT OF 1 YEAR ................................................................................................. G-32
[11]CHECK POINTS OF 2 YEARS ............................................................................................ G-33
[12]OTHERS............................................................................................................................... G-36
8. SPECIAL TOOLS ....................................................................................................................... G-39
[1] SPECIAL TOOLS FOR ENGINE .......................................................................................... G-39
[2] SPECIAL TOOLS FOR TRACTOR ...................................................................................... G-44
9. TIRES ......................................................................................................................................... G-49
[1] TIRE PRESSURE................................................................................................................. G-49
[2] TREAD ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................................................ G-50
(1) Front Wheels .................................................................................................................. G-50
(2) Rear Wheels................................................................................................................... G-51
[3] TIRE LIQUID INJECTION .................................................................................................... G-52

B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM GENERAL
1. TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION
[1] MODEL NAME AND SERIAL NUMBER
When contacting your local KUBOTA distributor, always specify
engine serial number, tractor serial number, ROPS serial number
and hour meter reading.
(1) Tractor Identification Plate [A] B1220
(2) Tractor Serial Number [B] B1620 and B1820
(3) Engine Serial Number
(4) Hour Meter
9Y1210272GEG0001US0
G-1 (EU)
[2] CYLINDER NUMBER

You can see the cylinder numbers of KUBOTA diesel engine in
the figure. The sequence of cylinder numbers is No. 1, No. 2 and
No. 3 and it starts from the gear case side.
WSM000001GEG0056US0
G-2 (EU)
2. GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
• When you disassemble, carefully put the parts in a clean area
to make it easy to find the parts. You must install the screws,
bolts and nuts in their initial position to prevent the reassembly
errors.
• When it is necessary to use special tools, use KUBOTA special
tools. Refer to the drawings when you make special tools that
you do not use frequently.
• Before you disassemble or repair machine, make sure that you
always disconnect the ground cable from the battery first.
• Remove oil and dirt from parts before you measure.
• Use only KUBOTA genuine parts for replacement to keep the
machine performance and to make sure of safety.
• You must replace the gaskets and O-rings when you assemble
again. Apply grease (1) to new O-rings or oil seals before you
assemble.
• When you assemble the external or internal snap rings, make
sure that the sharp edge (3) faces against the direction from
which force (2) is applied.
• When inserting spring pins, their splits must face the direction
from which a force is applied. See the figure left side.
• To prevent damage to the hydraulic system, use only specified
fluid or equivalent.
(1) Grease (A) External Snap Ring
(2) Force (B) Internal Snap Ring
(3) Sharp Edge
(4) Axial Force
(5) Rotating Movement
WSM000001GEG0092US0
G-3 (EU)
3. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRICAL

PARTS AND WIRING
To ensure safety and prevent damage to the machine and
surrounding equipment, heed the following precautions in handling
electrical parts and wiring.
IMPORTANT
• Check electrical wiring for damage and loosened
connection every year. To this end, educate the customer
to do his or her own check and at the same time
recommend the dealer to perform periodic check for a fee.
• Do not attempt to modify or remodel any electrical parts
and wiring.
• When removing the battery cables, disconnect the negative
cable first. When installing the battery cables, connect the
positive cable first.
(1) Negative Terminal (2) Positive Terminal
WSM000001GEG0062US1
[1] WIRING
• Securely tighten wiring terminals.
(1) Correct (2) Incorrect
(Securely Tighten) (Loosening Leads to Faulty Contact)
WSM000001GEG0063US1
• Do not let wiring contact dangerous part.

(1) Dangerous Part (Sharp Edge) (3) Wiring (Correct)
(2) Wiring (Incorrect) (4) Dangerous Part
WSM000001GEG0064US1
• Repair or change torn or aged wiring immediately.

(1) Aged (3) Insulating Vinyl Tape
(2) Torn
WSM000001GEG0065US1
G-4 (EU)
• Securely insert grommet.
(1) Grommet (A) Correct
(B) Incorrect
WSM000001GEG0066US1
• Securely clamp, being careful not to damage wiring.

(1) Clamp (3) Clamp
(Wind Clamp Spirally) (4) Welding Dent
(2) Wire Harness
WSM000001GEG0067US1
• Clamp wiring so that there is no twist, unnecessary sag, or

excessive tension, except for movable part, where sag be
required.
(1) Wiring (A) Correct
(2) Clamp (B) Incorrect
WSM000001GEG0068US1
• In installing a part, take care not to get wiring caught by it.

(1) Wiring (A) Incorrect
WSM000001GEG0069US1
• After installing wiring, check protection of terminals and

clamped condition of wiring, only connect battery.
(1) Cover
(Securely Install Cover)
WSM000001GEG0070US1
G-5 (EU)
[2] BATTERY
• Take care not to confuse positive and negative terminal posts.
• When removing battery cables, disconnect negative cable first.
When installing battery cables, check for polarity and connect
positive cable first.
• Do not install any battery with capacity other than is specified
(Ah).
• After connecting cables to battery terminal posts, apply high
temperature grease to them and securely install terminal covers
on them.
• Do not allow dirt and dust to collect on battery.
CAUTION
• Take care not to let battery liquid spill on your skin and
clothes. If contaminated, wash it off with water
immediately.
• Before recharging the battery, remove it from the machine.
• Before recharging, remove cell caps.
• Do recharging in a well-ventilated place where there is no
open flame nearby, as hydrogen gas and oxygen are
formed.
WSM000001GEG0071US1
[3] FUSE
• Use fuses with specified capacity.
Neither too large or small capacity fuse is acceptable.
• Never use steel or copper wire in place of fuse.
• Do not install working light, radio set, etc. on machine which is
not provided with reserve power supply.
• Do not install accessories if fuse capacity of reserve power
supply is exceeded.
(1) Fuse (3) Slow Blow Fuse
(2) Fusible Link
WSM000001GEG0072US1
[4] CONNECTOR
• For connector with lock, push lock to separate.
(A) Push
WSM000001GEG0073US1
• In separating connectors, do not pull wire harnesses.

• Hold connector bodies to separate.
(A) Correct (B) Incorrect
WSM000001GEG0074US1
G-6 (EU)
• Use sandpaper to remove rust from terminals.
• Repair deformed terminal. Make certain there is no terminal
being exposed or displaced.
(1) Exposed Terminal (3) Sandpaper
(2) Deformed Terminal (4) Rust
WSM000001GEG0075US1
• Make certain that there is no female connector being too open.

(A) Correct (B) Incorrect
WSM000001GEG0076US1
• Make certain plastic cover is large enough to cover whole

connector.
(1) Cover (A) Correct
(B) Incorrect
WSM000001GEG0077US1
[5] HANDLING OF CIRCUIT TESTER

• Use tester correctly following manual provided with tester.
• Check for polarity and range.
WSM000001GEG0078US1
G-7 (EU)
[6] COLOR OF WIRING

• Colors of wire are specified to the color codes.
• This symbol of "/" shows color with stripe(s).
(An example)
Red stripe on white color: W/R
Color of wiring Color code
Black B
Brown Br
Green G
Gray Gy or Gr
Blue L
Light Green Lg
Orange Or
Pink P
Purple Pu or V
Red R
Sky Blue Sb
White W
Yellow Y
(1) Wire Color (2) Stripe

WSM000001GEG0079US0
G-8 (EU)
4. LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT

Capacity
No. Place Lubricants, fuel and coolant
B1220 B1620 B1820
• No. 2-D diesel fuel
14 L
• No. 1-D diesel fuel
1 Fuel tank 3.7 U.S.gals
if temperature is below −10 °C
3.1 Imp.gals
(14 °F)
3.4 L
Coolant
2 3.6 U.S.qts Fresh clean water with anti-freeze
(with recovery tank)
3.0 Imp.qts
• Engine oil : CF or better
(Refer to next page)
• Above 25 °C (77 °F)
1.6 L 2.4 L
Engine crankcase SAE30, 10W-30 or 15W-40
3 1.7 U.S.qts 2.5 U.S.qts
(with filter) • 0 to 25 °C (32 to 77 °F)
1.4 Imp.qts 2.1 Imp.qts
SAE20, 10W-30 or 15W-40
• Below 0 °C (32 °F)
SAE10W, 10W-30 or 15W-40
10.5 L
4 Transmission case 2.77 U.S.gals KUBOTA UDT or SUPER UDT fluid*
2.31 Imp.gals
3.4 L
KUBOTA UDT or SUPER UDT fluid,
5 Front axle case 3.6 U.S.qts
SAE80 or SAE90 gear oil
3.0 Imp.qts
Greasing No. of greasing points Capacity Type of grease
Clutch pedal 1
Brake pedal 1
Until grease
Top link 1 Multipurpose
6 overflows.
Lifting rod (RH) 1 Grease NLGI-2
Parking brake shaft – 1 NLGI-1 (CG-LB)
Parking brake lever – 1 Moderate

Battery terminal 2 amount
*KUBOTA original transmission hydraulic fluid
9Y1210272GEG0003US0
G-9 (EU)
NOTE
Engine Oil
• Oil used in the engine should have an American Petroleum Institute (API) service classification and
Proper SAE Engine Oil according to the ambient temperatures as shown above:
• With the emission control now in effect, the CF-4 and CG-4 lubricating oils have been developed for use
of a low-sulfur fuel on on-road vehicle engines. When an off-road vehicle engine runs on a high-dulfur
fuel, it is advisable to employ the "CF or better" lubricating oil with a high Total Base Number (TBN of
10 minimum).
• Refer to the following table for the suitable API classification of engine oil according to the Fuel : (Low
Sulfur or High Sulfur Fuels).
Fuel used Engine oil classification (API classification)
CF
High Sulfur Fuel
(If the "CF-4, CG-4, CH-4, or CI-4" lubricating oil is used with a high-sulfur fuel, change
(≥ 500 ppm)
the lubricating oil at shorter intervals. (approximately half))
Low Sulfur Fuel
(< 500 ppm) or
CF, CF-4, CG-4, CH-4 or CI-4
Ultra Low Sulfur Fuel
(< 15 ppm)
• The CJ-4 engine oil is intended for DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter) type engines, and cannot be used on
this tractor.
Fuel
• Cetane number of 45 minimum. Cetane number greater than 50 is preferred, especially for temperatures
below −20 °C (−4 °F) or elevations above 1500 m (5000 ft).
• If diesel sulfur content greater than 0.5 % sulfur content is used, reduce the service interval for engine oil
and filter by 50 %.
• DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than 1.0 %.
• Diesel fuels specified to EN 590 or ASTM D975 are recommended.
• No.2-D is a distillate fuel of lower volatility for engines in industrial and heavy mobile service. (SAE J313
JUN87).
• Since this engine adopts EPA Tier 4 and Interim Tier 4 standards, the use of low sulfur fuel or ultra low
sulfur fuel is mandatory in EPA regulated area (North America). Therefore, please use No.2-D S500 or S15
diesel fuel as an alternative to No.2-D, or use No.1-D S500 or S15 diesel fuel as an alternative to No.1-D if
outside air temperature is below −10 °C (14 °F).
Transmission oil
• The oil used to lubricate the transmission is also used as hydraulic fluid. To insure proper operation of
the hydraulic system and to complete lubrication of the transmission, it is important that a multi-grade
transmission fluid is used in this system. We recommend the use of KUBOTA UDT or SUPER UDT fluid
for optimum protection and performance.
Do not mix different brands together.
Q Indicated capacities of water and oil are manufacturer's estimate.
9Y1210272GEG0004US0
G-10 (EU)
5. TIGHTENING TORQUES
[1] GENERAL USE SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS
Screws, bolts and nuts whose tightening torques are not specified in this Workshop Manual should be
tightened according to the table below.
Indication on top of bolt No-grade or 4T 7T 9T
Indication on top of nut No-grade or 4T

6T
Material of opponent part Ordinariness Aluminum Ordinariness Aluminum Ordinariness
Unit N·m kgf·m lbf·ft N·m kgf·m lbf·ft N·m kgf·m lbf·ft N·m kgf·m lbf·ft N·m kgf·m lbf·ft
7.9 0.80 5.8 7.9 0.80 5.8 9.81 1.00 7.24 7.9 0.80 5.8 12.3 1.25 9.05
M6 to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to
9.3 0.95 6.8 8.8 0.90 6.5 11.2 1.15 8.31 8.8 0.90 6.5 14.2 1.45 10.4
18 1.8 13 17 1.7 13 24 2.4 18 18 1.8 13 30 3.0 22
20 2.1 15 19 2.0 14 27 2.8 20 20 2.1 15 34 3.5 25
40 4.0 29 32 3.2 24 48 4.9 36 40 4.0 29 61 6.2 45
45 4.6 33 34 3.5 25 55 5.7 41 44 4.5 32 70 7.2 52
63 6.4 47 78 7.9 58 63 6.4 47 103 10.5 76.0
M12 to to to – – – to to to to to to to to to
72 7.4 53 90 9.2 66 72 7.4 53 117 12.0 86.7
108 11.0 79.6 124 12.6 91.2 167 17.0 123
M14 to to to – – – to to to – – – to to to
125 12.8 92.5 147 15.0 108 196 20.0 144
167 17.0 123 197 20.0 145 260 26.5 192
191 19.5 141 225 23.0 166 304 31.0 224
246 25.0 181 275 28.0 203 344 35.0 254
284 29.0 209 318 32.5 235 402 41.0 296
334 34.0 246 368 37.5 272 491 50.0 362
392 40.0 289 431 44.0 318 568 58.0 419
WSM000001GEG0001US1
[2] STUD BOLTS

Material of opponent part Ordinariness Aluminum
Unit N·m kgf·m lbf·ft N·m kgf·m lbf·ft
12 1.2 8.7 8.9 0.90 6.5
M8 to to to to to to
15 1.6 11 11 1.2 8.6
25 2.5 18 20 2.0 15
M10 to to to to to to
31 3.2 23 25 2.6 18
30 3.0 22
M12 to to to 31 3.2 23
49 5.0 36
62 6.3 46
M14 to to to – – –
73 7.5 54
98.1 10.0 72.4
M16 to to to – – –
112 11.5 83.1
172 17.5 127
M18 to to to – – –
201 20.5 148
WSM000001GEG0002US1
G-11 (EU)
[3] METRIC SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS

Grade Property class 8.8 Property class 10.9
M8 24 to 27 2.4 to 2.8 18 to 20 30 to 34 3.0 to 3.5 22 to 25
M10 48 to 55 4.9 to 5.7 36 to 41 61 to 70 6.2 to 7.2 45 to 52
M12 78 to 90 7.9 to 9.2 58 to 66 103 to 117 10.5 to 12.0 76.0 to 86.7
M14 124 to 147 12.6 to 15.0 91.2 to 108 167 to 196 17.0 to 20.0 123 to 144
M16 197 to 225 20.0 to 23.0 145 to 166 260 to 304 26.5 to 31.0 192 to 224
WSM000001GEG0003US1
[4] AMERICAN STANDARD SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS WITH

UNC OR UNF THREADS
Grade SAE GR.5 SAE GR.8
1/4 11.7 to 15.7 1.20 to 1.60 8.63 to 11.5 16.3 to 19.7 1.67 to 2.00 12.0 to 14.6
5/16 23.1 to 27.7 2.36 to 2.82 17.0 to 20.5 33 to 39 3.4 to 3.9 25 to 28
3/8 48 to 56 4.9 to 5.7 36 to 41 61 to 73 6.3 to 7.4 45 to 53
1/2 110 to 130 11.3 to 13.2 81.2 to 95.8 150 to 178 15.3 to 18.1 111 to 131
9/16 150 to 178 15.3 to 18.1 111 to 131 217 to 260 22.2 to 26.5 160 to 191
5/8 204 to 244 20.8 to 24.8 151 to 179 299 to 357 30.5 to 36.4 221 to 263
WSM000001GEG0008US1
[5] PLUGS
Material of opponent part
Shape Size Ordinariness Aluminum
N·m kgf·m lbf·ft N·m kgf·m lbf·ft
R1/8 13 to 21 1.3 to 2.2 9.4 to 15 13 to 19 1.3 to 2.0 9.4 to 14
Tapered screw
R1/4 25 to 44 2.5 to 4.5 18 to 32 25 to 34 2.5 to 3.5 18 to 25
R3/8 49 to 88 5.0 to 9.0 37 to 65 49 to 58 5.0 to 6.0 37 to 43
R1/2 58.9 to 107 6.00 to 11.0 43.4 to 79.5 59 to 78 6.0 to 8.0 44 to 57
Straight screw G1/4 25 to 34 2.5 to 3.5 18 to 25 – – –
G3/8 62 to 82 6.3 to 8.4 46 to 60 – – –
G1/2 49 to 88 5.0 to 9.0 37 to 65 – – –
WSM000001GEG0005US1
G-12 (EU)
6. MAINTENANCE CHECK LIST

Indication on hour meter Refer-
Impor-
No. Item Interval ence
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 tant
page
every
1 Engine oil Change + , , G-18
200 Hr
every
2 Engine oil filter Replace + , , G-18
200 Hr
every
3 Hydraulic oil filter Replace + , G-19
400 Hr
every
4 Transmission fluid Change , G-30
400 Hr
every
5 Front axle case oil Change , G-31
400 Hr
every
6 Engine start system Check , , , , , , , , , , G-20
50 Hr
every
7 Wheel nut torque Check , , , , , , , , , , G-20
50 Hr
every
8 Greasing – , , , , , , , , , , G-21
50 Hr
every
9 Battery condition Check , , , , , G-23 *4
100 Hr
every
Clean , , , , , G-25 *1
Air cleaner element 100 Hr
10
[Single type] every
Replace G-25 *2
1 year
every
Clean , , , , , G-26 *1
100 Hr
Primary element
Air cleaner element every
11 Replace G-26 *2
[Double] 1 year
every
Secondary element Replace G-26
1 year
every
Check , , , , , G-26
100 Hr
12 Fuel filter element
every
Replace , G-31
400 Hr
every
13 Fan belt Adjust , , , , , G-27
100 Hr
every
14 Clutch Adjust + , , , , , G-19
100 Hr
every
15 Brake Adjust , , , , , G-27
100 Hr
every
16 Parking brake [except B1220] Adjust , , , , , G-28
100 Hr
every
Check , , G-29
200 Hr
17 Radiator hose and clamp
every
Replace G-29
2 years
every
Check , , , , , G-28
100 Hr
18 Fuel line
every
Replace G-28
2 years
every
Check , , G-29
200 Hr
19 Intake air line
every
Replace G-29
2 years
every
20 Engine valve clearance Adjust 1-S11
800 Hr
every
21 Fuel injection nozzle Check 1-S17
1500 Hr
every
22 Injection pump Check 1-S16
3000 Hr
every
23 Cooling system Flush 1-S14
2 years
G-13 (EU)

Impor-
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 tant
page
every
24 Coolant Change G-33
2 years
25 Fuel system Bleed G-36
26 Clutch housing Drain G-36
Service
G-36,
27 Fuse Replace as
required G-37
G-37,
28 Light bulb Replace
G-38
G-14 (EU)
After
purchase Impor-
2 tant
550 600 650 700 750 800 1500 3000 1 year page
years
every
1 Engine oil Change , , G-18
200 Hr
every
2 Engine oil filter Replace , , G-18
200 Hr
every
3 Hydraulic oil filter Replace , G-19
400 Hr
every
4 Transmission fluid Change , G-30
400 Hr
every
5 Front axle case oil Change , G-31
400 Hr
every
6 Engine start system Check , , , , , , , , G-20
50 Hr
every
7 Wheel nut torque Check , , , , , , , , G-20
50 Hr
every
8 Greasing – , , , , , , , , G-21
50 Hr
every
9 Battery condition Check , , , G-23 *4
100 Hr
every
Clean , , , G-25 *1
Air cleaner element 100 Hr
10
[Single type] every
Replace , G-25 *2
1 year
every
Clean , , , G-26 *1
100 Hr
Air cleaner Primary element
every
11 element Replace , G-26 *2
1 year
[Double]
Secondary every
Replace G-26
element 1 year
every
Check , , , , G-26
100 Hr
12 Fuel filter element
every
Replace , G-31
400 Hr
every
13 Fan belt Adjust , , , G-27
100 Hr
every
14 Clutch Adjust , , , G-19
100 Hr
every
15 Brake Adjust , , , G-27
100 Hr
every
16 Parking brake [except B1220] Adjust , , , G-28
100 Hr
every
Check , , G-29
200 Hr
17 Radiator hose and clamp
every
Replace , G-29
2 years
every
Check , , , , G-28
100 Hr
18 Fuel line
every
Replace , G-28
2 years
every
Check , , G-29
200 Hr
19 Intake air line
every
Replace , G-29
2 years
every
20 Engine valve clearance Adjust , 1-S11
800 Hr
every
21 Fuel injection nozzle Check , 1-S17
1500 Hr
every
22 Injection pump Check , 1-S16
3000 Hr
every
23 Cooling system Flush , 1-S14
2 years
G-15 (EU)
After
purchase Impor-
2 tant
550 600 650 700 750 800 1500 3000 1 year page
years
every
24 Coolant Change , G-33
2 years
25 Fuel system Bleed G-36
26 Clutch housing Drain G-36
Service
G-36,
27 Fuse Replace as
required G-37
G-37,
28 Light bulb Replace
G-38
IMPORTANT
• The jobs indicated by "+" must be done after the first 50 hours of operation.
*1 : Air cleaner should be cleaned more often in server dusty conditions.
*2 : Every year or after 6 cleanings.
*3 : Replace only if necessary.
*4 : When the battery is used for less than 100 hours per year, check the fluid level annually.
9Y1210272GEG0062US0
G-16 (EU)
7. CHECK AND MAINTENANCE

CAUTION
• Be sure to check and service the tractor on a flat place with engine shut off, the parking brake on and
chock the wheels.
9Y1210272GEG0063US0
[1] DAILY CHECK

To prevent trouble from occurring, it is important to know the condition of the tractor. Check the following items
before starting.
Checking
• Check areas where previous trouble was experienced.
• Walk around the tractor.
1. Check the tire pressure, and check for wear and damage.
2. Check for oil and water leaks.
3. Check the engine oil level.
4. Check the transmission fluid level.
5. Check the coolant level.
6. Check the condition of seat belt and ROPS attaching hardware.
7. Check and clean the radiator screen and grille.
8. Check the bolts and nuts of the tires are tight.
9. Check the number plate or SMV emblem for damage and cleaner replace as necessary if equipped.
10. Care of danger, warning and caution labels.
11. Clean around the exhaust manifold and the muffler of the engine
• While sitting in the operator's seat

1. Check the brake pedals and clutch pedal.
2. Check the parking brake.
3. Check the steering wheel
• Turning the key switch.

1. Check the performance of the Easy Checker™ lights.
2. Check the head lights, tail lights and hazard lights. Clean if necessary.
3. Check the performance of the meters and gauges.
• Starting the engine.

1. Check to see that the lights on the Easy Checker™ go off.
2. Check the color of the exhaust gas.
3. Check the brakes for proper operation.
9Y1210272GEG0007US0
G-17 (EU)
[2] CHECK POINTS OF INITIAL 50 HOURS

Changing Engine Oil
CAUTION
• Be sure to stop the engine and remove the key before
changing the oil.
• Allow engine to cool down sufficiently, oil can be hot and
can burn.
1. Place an oil pan underneath the engine.
2. To drain the used oil, remove the drain plug (1) at the bottom of
the engine and drain the oil completely.
3. Screw in the drain plug (1).
4. Fill with the new oil up to the upper notch on the dipstick.
IMPORTANT
• Never mix two different types of oil.
• Use the proper SAE Engine Oil according to ambient
temperatures.
• Refer to "LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT". (See page
G-9).
1.6 L
B1220 1.7 U.S.qts
1.4 Imp.qts
Engine oil capacity
2.4 L
B1620
2.5 U.S.qts
B1820
2.1 Imp.qts
(1) Drain Plug (A) Proper Oil Level

(2) Oil Inlet
(3) Dipstick
9Y1210272GEG0005US0
Replacing Engine Oil Filter Cartridge
CAUTION
• Be sure to stop the engine before changing oil filter
cartridge.
can burn.
1. Remove the oil filter cartridge with the filter wrench.
2. Apply a slight coat of oil onto the cartridge gasket.
3. To install the new cartridge, screw it in by hand. Over tightening
may cause deformation of rubber gasket.
4. After the new cartridge has been replaced, the engine oil
normally decrease a little. Thus see that the engine oil does not
leak through the seal and be sure to read the oil level on the
dipstick. Then, replenish the engine oil up to the specified level.
IMPORTANT
• To prevent serious damage to the engine, replacement
element must be highly efficient. Use only a KUBOTA
genuine filter or its equivalent.
(1) Engine Oil Filter Cartridge
9Y1210272GEG0006US0
G-18 (EU)
Replacing Hydraulic Oil Filter Cartridge
CAUTION
• Be sure to stop the engine before changing the oil filters.
1. Drain the transmission fluid.
2. Remove the hydraulic oil filter cartridge (1) by using a filter
wrench.
3. Apply a slight coat of oil onto the cartridge gasket.
4. To install the new cartridge, screw it in by hand. Over tightening
may cause deformation of rubber gasket.
5. After the new cartridge has been replaced, the transmission
fluid level will normally decrease slightly. Make sure that the
transmission fluid does not leak through the seal. Check the
fluid level.
IMPORTANT
• To prevent serious damage to the hydraulic system. Use
only a KUBOTA genuine filter or its equivalents.
(1) Hydraulic Oil Filter
9Y1210272GEG0008US0
Checking Clutch Pedal Free Travel
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Slightly depress the clutch pedal and measure free travel at top
of pedal stroke.
3. If adjustment is needed, loosen the lock nut and turn the
turnbuckle to adjust the rod length within in acceptable limits.
4. Retighten the lock nut.
Clutch pedal free travel "L" on top of 15 to 25 mm
clutch pedal 0.59 to 0.98 in.
(1) Clutch Pedal (3) Turnbuckle

(2) Lock Nut
9Y1210272GEG0009US0
G-19 (EU)
[3] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 50 HOURS

Checking Engine Start System
CAUTION
• Do not allow anyone near the tractor while testing.
• If the tractor does not pass the test do not operate the
tractor.
Q Preparation before testing
1. Sit on operator's seat.
2. Set the parking brake and stop the engine.
3. Shift the main gear shift lever (2) in "NEUTRAL" position.
4. Shift the PTO gear shift lever (3) to "NEUTRAL" position.
5. Fully depress the clutch pedal (1).
Q Test : Switch for the main gear shift lever (2).
2. Shift the main gearshift lever (2) to "Desired" position.
3. Turn the key to "START" position.
4. The engine must not crank.
Q Test : Switch for the PTO gear shift lever (3).
2. Shift the main gearshift lever (2) to "NEUTRAL" position.
3. Shift the PTO gear shift lever (3) to desired position.
4. Turn the key to "START" position.
5. The engine must not crank.
NOTE
• If the engine cranks during any of these tests, adjust or
replace the required safety switch.
(1) Clutch Pedal (3) PTO Gear Shift Lever
(2) Main Gear Shift Lever
9Y1210272GEG0010US0
Checking Wheel Mounting Bolts and Nuts Tightening Torque
CAUTION
• Never operate tractor with a loose rim, wheel, or axle.
• Any time bolts and nuts are loosened, retighten to
specified torque.
• Check all bolts and nuts frequently and keep them tight.
1. Check wheel bolts and nuts regularly especially when new. If
there are loosened, tighten as follows.
77 to 90 N·m
Front wheel mounting nut 7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m
57 to 66 lbf·ft
123 to 147 N·m
Tightening torque Cotter setting bolt and nut 12.6 to 15.0 kgf·m
90.8 to 108 lbf·ft
108 to 125 N·m
Rear wheel mounting nut 11.0 to 12.8 kgf·m
79.7 to 92.1 lbf·ft
(1) Front Wheel Mounting Nut A : Front

(2) Cotter Setting Bolt and Nut B : Rear
(3) Rear Wheel Hub Mounting Nut
9Y1210272GEG0011US0
G-20 (EU)
Greasing
• Apply a grease to the following position as figures.
(1) Battery Terminals (4) Grease Fitting (Clutch Pedal)
(2) Grease Fitting (Brake Pedal) (5) Grease Fitting (Lift Rod, R.H.)
(3) Grease Fitting (Pedal Shaft) (6) Grease Fitting (Parking Brake
Shaft) [Except B1220]
(To be continued)
G-21 (EU)
(Continued)
(7) Parking Brake Lever
[Except B1220]
9Y1210272GEG0012US0
G-22 (EU)

Adjusting Clutch Pedal Free Travel
• See page G-19.
9Y1210272GEG0013US0
Checking Battery Condition
DANGER
• Do not use or charge the refillable type battery if the fluid
level is below the LOWER (lower limit level) mark.
Otherwise, the battery component parts may prematurely
deteriorate, which may shorten the battery's service life or
cause an explosion. Check the fluid level regularly and add
distilled water as required so that the fluid level is between
the UPPER and LOWER levels.
CAUTION
• Never remove the vent plugs while the engine is running.
• Keep electrolyte away from eyes, hands and clothes. If you
are spattered with it, wash it away completely with water
immediately and get medical attention.
• Wear eye protection and rubber gloves when working
around battery.
1. Mishandling the battery shortens the service life and adds to
maintenance costs.
2. The original battery is maintenance free type battery, but need
some servicing.
3. If the battery is weak, the engine is difficult to start and the lights
be dim. It is important check the battery periodically.
(1) Battery (2) Vent Cap
(To be continued)
G-23 (EU)
(Continued)
CAUTION
• When the battery is being activated, hydrogen and oxygen
gases in the battery are extremely explosive. Keep open
sparks and flames away from the battery at all times,
especially when charging the battery.
• When charging battery, ensure the vent caps are securely
in place. (if equipped)
• When disconnecting the cable from the battery, start with
the negative terminal first.
When connecting the cable to the battery, start with the
positive terminal first.
• Never check battery charge by placing a metal object
across the posts.
Use a voltmeter or hydrometer.
1. Make sure each electrolyte level is to the bottom of vent wells,
if necessary add distilled water in a well-ventilated area.
2. The water in the electrolyte evaporates during recharging.
Liquid shortage damages the battery.
Excessive liquid spills over and damages the tractor body.
3. To slow charge the battery, connect the battery positive terminal
to the charger positive terminal and the negative to the negative,
then recharge in the normal manner.
4. A boost charge is only for emergencies. It will partially charge
the battery at a high rate and in a short time.
When using a boost-charged battery, it is necessary to recharge
the battery as early as possible.
Failure to do this will shorten the battery's service life.
5. When the specific gravity of electrolyte is between 1.27 and
1.29, the charging is completed.
6. When exchanging an old battery for a new one, use battery of
equal specification shown in table 1.
Table 1
Reserve Cold Normal
Battery Capacity
Volt (V) Capacity Cranking Charging
Type at 5 H.R.
(min.) Amps Rate (A)
55B24L
12 32 70 400 4.5
(S)-MF
Q Battery Storage
1. When storing the tractor for long periods of time, remove the
battery from tractor, adjust the electrolyte to the proper level and
store in a dry place out of direct sunlight.
2. The battery self-discharges while it is stored.
Recharge it once every three months in hot seasons and once
every 6 months in cold seasons.
(A) Highest Level (B) Lowest Level
9Y1210272GEG0014US0
G-24 (EU)
Cleaning Air Cleaner Element [Single Type Element]
1. Remove the cover (3) and then remove the element (1).
2. Clean element :
– When dry dust adheres to the element, blow compressed air
from the inside, turning the element. Pressure of
compressed air must be under 205 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2,
30 psi).
– When carbon or oil adheres to the element, soak the
element in detergent for 15 minutes then wash it several
times in water, rinse with clean water and dry it naturally.
After element is fully dried, inspect inside of the element
with a light and check if it is damaged or not. (referring to the
instructions on the label attached to the case.)
3. Replace air cleaner element :
Once yearly or after every sixth cleaning, whichever comes first.
NOTE
• Check to see if the evacuator valve is blocking with dust.
IMPORTANT
• The air cleaner uses a dry element, never apply oil.
• Do not run the engine with filter element removed.
• Be sure to refit the dust cup with the arrow ↑ (on the rear of
cup) upright. If the dust cup is improperly fitted, evacuator
valve will not function and dust will adhere to the element.
• Do not touch the secondary element except in cases where
replacing is required.
Q Evacuator Valve
Open the evacuator valve once a week under ordinary
conditions or daily when used in a dusty place to get rid of large
particles of dust and dirt.
(1) Element (3) Evacuator Valve
(2) Cover
9Y1210272GEG0015US0
G-25 (EU)
Cleaning Air Cleaner Element [Double Type Element] (If
Equipped)
1. Remove the air cleaner cover (2) and primary element (4).
2. Clean the primary element if :
– When dry dust adheres to the element, blow compressed air
from the inside turning the element. Pressure of
compressed air must be under 205 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2,
30 psi).
– When carbon or oil adheres to the element, soak the
element in detergent for 15 minutes then wash it several
times in water, rinse with clean water and dry it naturally.
After element is fully dried, inspect inside of the element
with a light and check if it is damaged or not.
3. When replacing the air cleaner primary element (4), replace the
secondary element (1) as well : Once a year or after every six
times of cleaning, whichever comes first.
NOTE
• Check to see if the evacuator valve is blocking with dust.
IMPORTANT
• The air cleaner uses a dry element, never apply oil.
• Do not run the engine with filter element removed.
• Be sure to refit the dust cup with the arrow ↑ (on the rear of
cup) upright. If the dust cup is improperly fitted, evacuator
valve will not function and dust will adhere to the element.
• Do not touch the secondary element except in cases where
replacing is required.
Q Evacuator Valve
Open the evacuator valve once a week under ordinary
conditions or daily when used in a dusty place to get rid of large
particles of dust and dirt.
(1) Secondary (safety) Element (3) Cover
(2) Primary Element (4) Evacuator Valve
9Y1210272GEG0016US0
Cleaning Fuel Filter
This job should not be done in the field, but in a clean place.
1. Loosen and remove the fuel filter bowl, and rinse the inside with
kerosene.
2. Take out the element and dip it in the kerosene to rinse.
3. After cleaning, reassemble the fuel filter, keeping out dust and
dirt.
4. Bleed the fuel system. (See page G-36.)
IMPORTANT
• When the fuel filter bowl has been removed, fuel stops
flowing from the fuel tank. If the fuel tank is almost full,
however, the fuel will flow back from the fuel return pipe to
the fuel filter. Before checking, mark sure the fuel tank is
less than half-full.
(1) Fuel Filter Bowl A : Loosen
(2) Filter Bracket B : Tighten
(3) O-ring
(4) Filter Element
(5) O-ring
9Y1210272GEG0017US0
G-26 (EU)
Checking Fan Belt Tension
CAUTION
• Be sure to stop engine before checking belt tension.
1. Stop the engine and remove the key.
2. Apply moderate thumb pressure to belt between pulleys.
3. If tension in incorrect, loosen the alternator mounting bolts and,
using a lever placed between the alternator and the engine
block, pull the alternator out until the deflection of the belt falls
within acceptable limits.
4. Replace fan belt if it is damaged.
A deflection of between
7.0 to 9.0 mm
Fan belt tension Factory specification (0.28 to 0.35 in.) when the
belt is pressed in the
middle of the span.
(1) Adjusting Bolt [A] B1220

[B] B1620 and B1820
(A) Check the belt tension
(B) To Tighten
9Y1210272GEG0018US0
Adjusting Brake Pedal
CAUTION
• Stop the engine and chock the wheels before checking
brake pedal.
• The difference between the right and left pedal the travel
must be less than 5.0 mm (0.20 in.).
1. Release the parking brake.
2. Slightly depress the brake pedals and measure free travel at top
of pedal stroke.
3. If adjustment is needed, loosen the lock nut and adjust the rod
length.
4. Retighten the lock nut securely.
5. Keep the free travel in the right and left pedals equal.
Brake pedal free travel 30 to 40 mm
Factory specification
"L" 1.2 to 1.5 in.
NOTE
• After checking brake pedal free travel, be sure to engage
the parking brake lever fully and check to see that the brake
pedals are securely locked.
(1) Brake Pedal [A] B1220
(2) Lock Nut [B] B1620 and B1820
(3) Adjust Nut L : Free Travel
(4) Brake Lever
9Y1210272GEG0019US0
G-27 (EU)
Adjusting Parking Brake [Except B1220]
CAUTION
parking brake pedal.
1. Check free travel of the parking brake pedal.
2. If adjustment is needed, pull the parking release lever to release
the parking brake, and then loosen the lock nut and the adjust
nut.
3. Adjust the adjust nut to leave no space between the collar and
the brake lever.
4. Retighten the lock nut.
2 notch
Parking brake free travel Factory specification
(Ratchet sound 2)
(1) Parking Brake Pedal A : PULL

(2) Parking Release Lever
(3) Brake Lever
(4) Adjust Nut
(5) Lock Nut
9Y1210272GEG0020US0
Checking Fuel Line
CAUTION
• Stop the engine when attempting the check and change
prescribed below.
• Remember to check the fuel line periodically. The fuel line
is subject to wear and aging, fuel may leak out onto the
running engine, causing a fire.
1. Check to see that all line and hose clamps are tight and not
damage.
2. If hoses and clamps are found worn or damaged, replace or
repair them at once.
3. The fuel line is made of rubber and ages regardless of period of
service. Replace the fuel pipe together with the clamp every two
years and securely tighten.
4. However, if the fuel pipe and clamp are found damaged or
deteriorated earlier than two years, then change or remedy.
5. After the fuel line and clamp have been changed, bleed the fuel
system.
IMPORTANT
• When the fuel line is disconnected for change, close both
ends of the fuel line with a piece of clean cloth or paper to
prevent dust and dirt from entering. Entrance of dust and
dirt causes malfunction of the fuel injection pump. In
addition, particular care must be taken not to admit dust
and dirt into the fuel pump.
(1) Fuel Hoses (2) Hose Clamps
9Y1210272GEG0021US0
G-28 (EU)

Changing Engine Oil
• See page G-18.
9Y1210272GEG0023US0
Replacing Engine Oil Filter
• See page G-18.
9Y1210272GEG0024US0
Checking Intake Air Line
1. Check to see that hoses and hose clamps are tight and not
damaged.
2. If hoses and clamps are found worn or damaged, replace or
repair them at once.
(1) Hose (2) Hose Clamp
9Y1210272GEG0025US0
Checking Radiator Hose and Hose Clamp

Check to see if radiator hoses are properly fixed every 200
hours of operation or six months, whichever comes first.
1. If hose clamps are loose or water leaks, tighten bands securely.
2. Replace hoses and tighten hose clamps securely, if radiator
hoses are swollen, hardened or cracked. Replace hoses and
hose clamps every 2 years or earlier if checked and found that
hoses are swollen, hardened or cracked.
Q Precaution at Overheating
Take the following actions in the event the coolant temperature
be nearly or more than the boiling point, what is called
"Overheating".
1. Stop the machine operation in a safe place and keep the engine
unloaded idling.
2. Do not stop the engine suddenly, but stop it after about
5 minutes of unloaded idling.
3. Keep yourself well away from the machine for further
10 minutes or while the steam blown out.
4. Checking that there gets on danger such as burn, get rid of the
causes of overheating according to the manual, see
"Troubleshooting" section, and then, start again the engine.
(1) Clamp (2) Radiator Hose
9Y1210272GEG0022US0
G-29 (EU)

Replacing Hydraulic Oil Filter
• See page G-19.
9Y1210272GEG0026US0
Changing Transmission Fluid
CAUTION
• Be sure to stop the engine before changing the oil filter
cartridge.
can barn.
1. Place an oil pan under the tractor.
2. Remove the drain plugs (1) at the bottom of the rear axle cases,
and front transmission case.
4. After draining, screw in the four drain plugs.
5. Fill new oil from filling port after removing the filling plug (2) up
to the upper notch on the dipstick (3).
6. After running the engine for a few minutes, stop it and check the
oil level again, if low, add oil prescribed level.
IMPORTANT
• Use only multi-grade transmission oil. Use of other oils
may damage the transmission or hydraulic system. Refer
to "LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT" (See page G-9).
• Never work the tractor immediately after changing the
transmission oil. Keep the engine at medium speed for a
few minutes to prevents damage to the transmission.
• Do not mix different brands oil together.
10.5 L
Transmission fluid Capacity 2.77 U.S.gals
2.31 Imp.gals
(1) Drain Plug [A] Without Mid-PTO Model

(2) Filling Plug [B] With Mid-PTO Model
(3) Dipstick (A) Proper Oil Level
9Y1210272GEG0027US0
G-30 (EU)
Changing Front Axle Case Oil
1. Place the oil pans underneath the front axle cases.
2. Remove the right and left side drain plug (2) and filling plug (1)
to drain the oil.
3. After draining, reinstall the drain plugs.
4. Fill with new oil up to the upper notch on the dipstick.
IMPORTANT
• Use KUBOTA UDT, SUPER UDT fluid, SAE 80 or SAE 90
gear oil.
Refer to "LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT" (See page
G-9).
few minutes to prevents damage to the transmission.
3.4 L
Oil Capacity 3.6 U.S.qts
3.0 Imp.qts
(1) Filling Plug with Dipstick (A) Oil level with acceptable within
(2) Drain Plug this range.
9Y1210272GEG0028US0
Replacing Fuel Filter Element
IMPORTANT
• When the fuel filter bowl has been removed, fuel stops
flowing from the fuel tank. If the fuel tank is almost full,
however, the fuel will flow back from the fuel return pipe to
the fuel filter. Before checking, make sure the fuel tank is
less than half-full.
• This job should not be done in the field, but in a clean place.
1. Unscrew the fuel filter bowl, and rinse and inside with kerosene.
2. Take out the element and dip it in the kerosene to rinse.
3. After cleaning, reassemble the water separator, keeping out
dust and dirt.
4. Bleed the fuel system. (See page G-36.)
(1) Filter Bracket (4) O-ring
(2) O-ring (5) Fuel Filter Bowl
(3) Element
9Y1210272GEG0029US0
G-31 (EU)
[7] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 800 HOURS

Adjusting Engine valve Clearance
• See page 1-S11.
9Y1210272GEG0030US0

Checking Fuel Injection Nozzle Injection Pressure
• See page 1-S17.
9Y1210272GEG0031US0

Checking Injection Pump
• See page 1-S16.
9Y1210272GEG0032US0
[10] CHECK POINT OF 1 YEAR

Replacing Air Cleaner Primary Element and Secondary
Element
• See page G-25, G-26.
9Y1210272GEG0033US0
G-32 (EU)
[11] CHECK POINTS OF 2 YEARS

Replacing Radiator Hose (Water Pipes)
• See page G-29.
9Y1210272GEG0034US0
Replacing Fuel Line
• See page G-28.
9Y1210272GEG0035US0
Replacing Intake Air Line
• See page G-29.
9Y1210272GEG0036US0
Flushing Cooling System and Changing Coolant
NOTE
• Do not remove the radiator cap while coolant is hot. When
cool, slowly rotate cap to the first stop and allow sufficient
time for excess pressure to escape before removing the
cap completely.
1. Stop the engine, remove the key and let it cool down.
2. To drain the coolant, open the radiator drain cock and remove
the radiator cap. The radiator cap must be removed to
completely drain the coolant.
3. After all coolant is drained, close the drain cock.
4. Fill with clean water and cooling system cleaner.
5. Follow directions of the cleaner instruction.
6. After flushing, fill with clean water and anti-freeze until the
coolant level is just below the radiator cap. Install the radiator
cap securely.
7. Fill with coolant up to the "FULL" mark on the recovery tank.
8. Start and operate the engine for few minutes.
9. Stop the engine, remove the key and let cool.
10. Check coolant level of recovery tank and add coolant if
necessary.
11. Properly dispose of used coolant.
IMPORTANT
• Do not start engine without coolant.
• Use clean, fresh water and anti-freeze to fill the radiator and
recovery tank.
• When the anti-freeze is mixed with water, the anti-freeze
mixing ratio must be less than 50 %.
• Securely tighten radiator cap. If the cap is loose or
improperly fitted, water may leak out and the engine could
overheat.
3.4 L
Coolant
Capacity 3.6 U.S.qts
(with recover tank)
3.0 Imp.qts
(1) Radiator Cap (A) FULL

(2) Drain Cock (B) LOW
(3) Recovery Tank
(To be continued)
G-33 (EU)
(Continued)
Q Anti-Freeze
CAUTION
• When using antifreeze, put on some protection such as
rubber gloves (Antifreeze contains position).
• If should drink antifreeze, throw up at once and take
medical attention.
• When antifreeze comes in contact with the skin or clothing,
wash it off immediately.
• Do not mix different type of antifreeze.
The mixture can produce chemical reaction causing
harmful substances
• Antifreeze is extremely flammable and explosive under
certain conditions. Keep fire and children away from
antifreeze.
• When draining fluids from the engine, place some
container underneath the engine body.
• Do not pour waste onto the grounds, down a drain, or into
any water source.
• Also, observe the relevant environmental protection
regulations when disposing of antifreeze.
If it freezes, coolant can damage the cylinders and radiator. If
the ambient temperature falls below 0 °C (32 °F) or before a
long-term storage, let out cooling water completely, or mix fresh
water with long-life coolant and fill the radiator and reserve tank with
the mixture.
1. Long-life coolant (hereafter LLC) comes in several types. Use
ethylene glycol (EG) type for this engine.
2. Before employing LLC-mixed cooling water, fill the radiator with
fresh water and empty it again.
Repeat this procedure 2 or 3 times to clean up the inside.
3. Mixing the LLC
Put the LLC in cooling water in the percentage (%) for a target
temperature. When mixing, stir it up well, and then fill into the
radiator.
4. The procedure for the mixing of water and antifreeze differs
according to the make of the antifreeze and the ambient
temperature. Refer to SAE J1034 standard, more specifically
also to SAE J814c.
(To be continued)
G-34 (EU)
(Continued)
IMPORTANT
• When the antifreeze is mixed with water, the antifreeze
mixing ratio must be less than 50 %.
Vol % Freezing Point Boiling Point*
Anti-freeze °C °F °C °F
40 −24 −12 106 222
50 −37 −34 108 226
5
*At 1.013 × 10 Pa (760 mmHg) pressure (atmospheric). A
higher boiling points is obtained by using a radiator pressure cap
which permits the development of pressure within the cooling
system.
5. Adding the LLC
– Add only water if the mixture reduces in amount by
evaporation.
– If there is a mixture leak, add the LLC of the same
manufacture and type in the same mixture percentage.
*Never add any long-life coolant of different manufacture.
(Different brands may have different additive components,
and the engine may fail to perform as specified.
6. When the LLC is mixed, do not employ any radiator cleaning
agent. The LLC contains anticorrosive agent. If mixed with the
cleaning agent, sludge may build up, adversely affecting the
engine parts.
7. KUBOTA's genuine long-life coolant has a service life of
2 years. Be sure to change the coolant every 2 years.
NOTE
• The above data represent industry standards that
necessitate a minimum glycol content in the concentrated
anti-freeze.
• When the coolant level drops due to evaporation, add water
only to keep the antifreeze mixing ratio less than 50 %. In
case of leakage, add antifreeze and water in the specified
mixing ratio before filling in to the radiator.
9Y1210272GEG0037US0
G-35 (EU)
[12] OTHERS
Bleeding Fuel System
Air must be removed:
1. When the fuel filter or lines are removed.
2. When the tank is completely empty.
3. After the tractor has not been used for a long period of time.
Bleeding procedure is as follows:
1. Fill the fuel tank with fuel.
2. Start the engine and run for about 30 seconds, and then stop
the engine.
9Y1210272GEG0038US0
Draining Clutch Housing Water

NOTE
• The tractor is equipped with a water drain plug (1) under the
clutch housing.
• After operating in rain, snow or tractor has been washed,
water may get into the clutch housing.
1. Remove the drain plug and drain the water, then install the plug
again.
(1) Drain Plug
9Y1210272GEG0039US0
Replacing Fuse [B1220]
1. The tractor electrical system is protected from potential damage
by fuses.
A blown fuse indicates that there is an overload or short
somewhere in the electrical system.
2. If any of the fuses should blow, replace with a new one of the
same capacity.
IMPORTANT
• Before replacing a blown fuse, determine why the fuse blew
and make any necessary repairs. Failure to follow this
procedure may result in serious damage to the tractor
electrical system. Refer to the "TROUBLESHOOTING"
section of this manual.
Q Protected Circuit
Fuse No. Capacity (A) Protected Circuit
Check circuit against wrong battery
(1) Slow blow fuse
connection
(2) 15 A Key stop
(3) 10 A Auxiliary (Reserve)
(4) 20 A Head light, Key stop
(6) Reserve
(7) Reserve
9Y1210272GEG0040US0
G-36 (EU)
Replacing Fuse [B1620 and B1820]
1. The tractor electrical system is protected from potential damage
by fuses.
A blown fuse indicates that there is an overload or short
somewhere in the electrical system.
2. If any of the fuses should blow, replace with a new one of the
same capacity.
IMPORTANT
• Before replacing a blown fuse, determine why the fuse blew
and make any necessary repairs. Failure to follow this
procedure may result in serious damage to the tractor
electrical system. Refer to the "TROUBLESHOOTING"
section of this manual.
Q Protected Circuit
Fuse No. Capacity (A) Protected Circuit
Slow blow fuse Check circuit against wrong battery
(1)
50 A connection
(2) 15 A Key stop
(3) 15 A Hazard
(4) 20 A Head light, Horn, Key stop
(5) 10 A Brake
(7) 10 A Instrument cluster
9Y1210272GEG0041US0
Replacing Light Bulb [B1220]
1. Head lights:
Take the bulb out of the light body and replace with a new one.
2. Other lights :
Detach the lens and replace the bulb.
Light Capacity
Head lights H8-23 W
Instrument panel light 1.7 W
Work light –
(1) Head Light (2) Instrument Panel

9Y1210272GEG0042US0
G-37 (EU)
Replacing Light Bulb [B1620 and B1820]
1. Head lights:
Take the bulb out of the light body and replace with a new one.
2. Other lights :
Detach the lens and replace the bulb.
Light Capacity
Head lights H8-35 W
Tail light / Stop light 5 W / 21 W
Turn signal/ Hazard light 21 W
Instrument panel light 1.7 W
Hazard light switch indicator 0.6 W
Work light –
Front position light 5W
Number plate light 5W
(1) Head Light (5) Turn Signal Light / Hazard Light

(2) Front Position Light (6) Brake Stop Light
(3) Number Plate Light (7) Instrument Panel
(4) Tail Light / Stop Light (8) Hazard Light Switch
9Y1210272GEG0043US0
G-38 (EU)
8. SPECIAL TOOLS
[1] SPECIAL TOOLS FOR ENGINE
Special Use Puller Set
Code No.
• 07916-09032
Application
• Use exclusively for pulling out bearing, gears and other parts
with ease.
WSM000001GEG0011US0
Piston Ring Compressor

Code No.
• 07909-32111
Application
• Use exclusively for pushing in the piston with piston rings into
the cylinder.
WSM000001GEG0012US0
Piston Ring Tool

Code No.
• 07909-32121
Application
• Use exclusively for removing or installing the piston ring with
ease.
WSM000001GEG0013US0
Diesel Engine Compression Tester (for Injection Nozzle)

Code No.
• 07909-30208 (Assembly)
• 07909-30934 (A to F)
• 07909-31211 (E and F)
• 07909-31231 (H)
• 07909-31251 (G)
• 07909-31271 (I)
• 07909-31281 (J)
Application
• Use to measure diesel engine compression and diagnostics of
need for major overhaul.
(1) Gauge (7) Adaptor F
(2) L Joint (8) Adaptor G
(3) Adaptor A (9) Adaptor H
(4) Adaptor B (10) Adaptor I
(5) Adaptor C (11) Adaptor J
(6) Adaptor E
WSM000001GEG0014US0
G-39 (EU)
Oil Pressure Tester
Code No.
• 07916-32032
Application
• Use to measure lubricating oil pressure.
(1) Gauge (5) Adaptor 2
(2) Cable (6) Adaptor 3
(3) Threaded Joint (7) Adaptor 4
(4) Adaptor 1 (8) Adaptor 5
WSM000001GEG0015US0
Valve Seat Cutter

Code No.
• 07909-33102
Application
• Use to reseat valves.
Angle
• 0.79 rad (45 °)
• 0.26 rad (15 °)
Diameter
• 28.6 mm (1.13 in.)
• 31.6 mm (1.24 in.)
• 35.0 mm (1.38 in.)
• 38.0 mm (1.50 in.)
• 41.3 mm (1.63 in.)
• 50.8 mm (2.00 in.)
WSM000001GEG0016US0
Radiator Tester
Code No.
• 07909-31551
Application
• Use to check of radiator cap pressure, and leaks from cooling
system.
Remarks
• Adaptor (1) BANZAI Code No. RCT-2A-30S.
(1) Adaptor
WSM000001GEG0017US0
Connecting Rod Alignment Tool
Code No.
• 07909-31661
Application
• Use to check the connecting rod alignment.
Applicable range
• Connecting rod big end I.D.
30 to 75 mm dia. (1.2 to 2.9 in. dia.)
• Connecting rod length
65.0 to 300 mm (2.56 to 11.8 in.)
WSM000001GEG0020US0
Nozzle Tester
Code No.
• 07909-31361
Application
• Use to check the fuel injection pressure and spray pattern of
nozzle.
Measuring range
• 0 to 50 MPa (0 to 500 kgf/cm2, 0 to 7200 psi)
WSM000001GEG0021US0
G-40 (EU)
Plastigauge
Code No.
• 07909-30241
Application
• Use to check the oil clearance between crankshaft and bearing,
etc..
Measuring range
• Green: 0.03 to 0.07 mm (0.001 to 0.003 in.)
• Red: 0.05 to 0.1 mm (0.002 to 0.006 in.)
• Blue: 0.1 to 0.2 mm (0.004 to 0.009 in.)
WSM000001GEG0022US0
Red Check
Code No.
• 07909-31371
Application
• Use to check cracks on cylinder head, cylinder block, etc..
WSM000001GEG0023US0
Flywheel Puller
Code No.
• 07916-32011
Application
• Use exclusively for removing the flywheel with ease.
WSM000001GEG0018US0
G-41 (EU)
NOTE
• The following special tools are not provided, so make them referring to the figure.
WSM000001GEG0026US0
Injection Pump Pressure Tester
Application
• Use to check fuel tightness of injection pumps.
Pressure gauge full scale :
A
More than 29.4 MPa (300 kgf/cm2, 4267 psi)
B PF 1/2
C Copper gasket
D Flange (Material : Steel)
E Hex. nut 27 mm (1.1 in.) across the plat
F Adhesive application
G Fillet welding on the enter circumference
H Retaining nut
I 17 mm dia. (0.67 in. dia.)
J 8.0 mm dia. (0.31 in. dia.)
K 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
L 17 mm dia. (0.67 in. dia.)
M 6.10 to 6.20 mm dia. (0.241 to 0.244 in. dia.)
N 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
O 4.0 mm (0.16 in.)
P 11.97 to 11.99 mm dia. (0.4713 to 0.4720 in. dia.)
Q PF 1/2
R 23 mm (0.91 in.)
S 17 mm (0.67 in.)
T 4.0 mm (0.16 in.)
U 12.00 to 12.02 mm dia. (0.4725 to 0.4732 in. dia.)
V 100 mm (3.94 in.)
W M12 × P1.5
X 5.0 mm (0.20 in.)
9Y1210272GEG0056US0
G-42 (EU)
Valve Guide Replacing Tool
Application
• Use to press out and press in the valve guide.
A 225 mm (8.86 in.)
B 70 mm (2.8 in.)
C 45 mm (1.8 in.)
D 20 mm dia. (0.79 in. dia.)
E 11.7 to 11.9 mm dia. (0.461 to 0.468 in. dia.)
F 6.50 to 6.60 mm dia. (0.256 to 0.259 in. dia.)
G 25 mm (0.98 in.)
H 6.70 to 7.00 mm dia. (0.264 to 0.275 in. dia.)
I 5.0 mm (0.20 in.)
J 20 mm dia. (0.79 in. dia.)
K 12.5 to 12.8 mm dia. (0.493 to 0.503 in. dia.)
L 8.90 to 9.10 mm (0.351 to 0.358 in.)
C1 Chamfer 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
C0.3 Chamfer 0.30 mm (0.012 in.)
9Y1210272GEG0057US0
Crankshaft Bearing 1 Replacing Tool
Application
• Use to press out and press in the crankshaft bearing 1.
[Press Out]
A 135 mm (5.31 in.)
B 72 mm (2.8 in.)
C 40 mm radius (1.6 in. radius)
D 10 mm (0.39 in.)
E 24 mm (0.94 in.)
F 20 mm dia. (0.79 in. dia.)
G 51.20 to 51.40 mm dia. (2.016 to 2.023 in. dia.)
C0.3 Chamfer 0.30 mm (0.012 in.)
[Press In]
A 135 mm (5.31 in.)
B 72 mm (2.8 in.)
C 40 mm radius (1.6 in. radius)
D 10 mm (0.39 in.)
E 24 mm (0.94 in.)
F 20 mm dia. (0.79 in. dia.)
G 68 mm dia. (2.7 in. dia.)
C0.3 Chamfer 0.30 mm (0.012 in.)
9Y1210272GEG0058US0
G-43 (EU)
[2] SPECIAL TOOLS FOR TRACTOR

Tie-rod End Lifter
Code No.
• 07909-39051
Application
• Use for removing the tie-rod end with ease.
WSM000001GEG0029US0
Steering Wheel Puller

Code No.
• 07916-51090
Application
• Use for removing the steering wheel without damaging the
steering shaft.
WSM000001GEG0030US0
Pitman Arm Puller

Code No.
• 07909-39051
Application
• Use for removing the tie-rod end with ease.
WSM000001GEG0050US0
Toe-in Gauge
Code No.
• 07909-31681
Application
• This allows easy measurement of toe-in for all machine models.
WSM000001GEG0034US0
Clutch Center Tool (For B and L Series Tractors)

Application
• The clutch center tool can be used for all B and L series tractors
with a diaphragm clutch by changing tip guides. Center piece
diameter is 14 mm (0.55 in.).
WSM000001GEG0033US0
G-44 (EU)
Relief Valve Pressure Tester
Code No.
• 07916-50045
Application
• This allows easy measurement of relief set pressure.
(1) Gauge (07916-50322) (6) Adaptor C (PS3/8) (07916-50371)
(2) Cable (07916-50331) (7) Adaptor D (PT1/8) (07916-50381)
(3) Threaded Joint (07916-50401) (8) Adaptor E (PS3/8) (07916-50392)
(4) Threaded Joint (07916-50341) (9) Adaptor F (PF1/2) (07916-62601)
(5) Adaptor B (M18 × P1.5) (10) Adaptor 58 (PT1/4) (07916-52391)
(07916-50361)
WSM000001GEG0027US0
Flow Meter
Code No.
• 07916-52791 (Flow Meter)
• 07916-52651 (Hydraulic Test Hose)
Application
• This allows easy testing of hydraulic system.
(1) Flow Meter (2) Hydraulic Test Hose
WSM000001GEG0036US0
Adaptor Set for Flow Meter

Code No.
• 07916-54031
Application
• Use for testing the hydraulic system.
(6) Adaptor 63 (13) Hydraulic Adaptor 1
(7) Adaptor 64
WSM000001GEG0037US0
Hydraulic Outlet
Application
• Use for testing the hydraulic system.
25.8 to 26.2 mm
A
(1.02 to 1.03 in.)
B 44.45 mm (1.750 in.)
C 51.82 mm (2.040 in.)
23.8 to 24.2 mm
D
(0.937 to 0.952 in.)
E 19.05 mm (0.7500 in.)
F 11.43 mm (0.4500 in.)
G M16 × P1.5
H 1.88 mm (0.0740 in.)
18.999 to 19.177 mm
I
(0.74800 to 0.75500 in.)
J 8.73 mm dia. (0.34 in. dia.)
(Reference)
• O-ring nominal size : 9/16 × 3/3 × 3/32
NOTE
• The following special tools are not provided, so make them
referring to the figure.
9Y1210272GEG0064US0
G-45 (EU)
Bushing Replacing Tool
Application
• Use to press out and press in the bushing.
1. For small end bushing
A 157 mm (6.18 in.)
B 24 mm (0.94 in.)
C 120 mm (4.72 in.)
D 21.8 to 21.9 mm dia. (0.859 to 0.862 in. dia.)
F 20 mm dia. (0.79 in. dia.)
a 6.3 µm (250 µin.)
b 6.3 µm (250 µin.)
2. For idle gear bushing
A 196 mm (7.72 in.)
B 26 mm (1.0 in.)
C 150 mm (5.91 in.)
D 25.80 to 25.90 mm dia. (1.016 to 1.019 in. dia.)
F 20 mm dia. (0.79 in. dia.)
a 6.3 µm (250 µin.)
b 6.3 µm (250 µin.)
9Y1210272GEG0060US0
Flywheel Stopper
Application
• Use to loosen and tighten the flywheel screw.
A 20 mm (0.79 in.)
B 15 mm (0.59 in.)
C 10 mm dia. (0.39 in. dia.)
D 30 mm (1.2 in.)
E 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
F 200 mm (7.87 in.)
9Y1210272GEG0061US0
G-46 (EU)
Disassembling Stand
Application
• Use for supporting engine.
NOTE
• This special tool is not provided, so make it referring to figure.
A 75 mm (3.0 in.) G 95 mm (3.7 in.) M 9 mm (0.4 in.)

B 37.5 mm (1.48 in.) H 208 mm (8.19 in.) N 100 mm (3.94 in.)
C 16.5 mm (0.650 in.) I 200 mm (7.87 in.) O 50 mm (2.0 in.)
D 16 mm dia. (0.63b in. dia.) J 150 mm (5.91 in.) P 174 mm (6.85 in.)
E 9 mm (0.4 in.) K 75 mm (3.0 in.) C1 Chamfer 1 mm (0.04 in.)
F 190 mm (7.48 in.) L 12 mm dia. (0.47 in. dia.)
9Y1210272GEG0065US0
G-47 (EU)
PS Plug Wrench
Application
• Use for tightening the plug for ball nut assembling.
A 64 mm (2.51 in.) L 22.0 mm dia. (0.87 in. dia.)

B 48 mm (1.89 in.) M 3.2 mm dia. (0.13 in. dia.)
C 36.2 to 36.3 mm (1.425 to 1.429 in.) N 3 mm dia. (0.12 in. dia.)
D 8 mm (0.31 in.) O 12 mm (0.47 in.)
E 13 mm (0.55 in.) P 3 mm (0.12 in.)
Pin : 6 mm dia. × 15 mm length (0.24 in. dia. × 0.59 in.
F 8 mm (0.31 in.) Q
length)
G 33 mm (1.30 in.) R C3 : Chamfer 3 mm (0.12 in.)
H 45 mm (1.77 in.) S C3 : Chamfer 3 mm (0.12 in.)
I 16 mm (0.63 in.) T R10 : 10 mm radius (0.39 in. radius)
J 6 mm (0.24 in.) U C12 : Chamfer 12 mm (0.47 in.)
K 12.0 to 12.1 mm dia. (0.472 to 0.476 in. dia.) V C1 : Chamfer 1 mm (0.04 in.)
9Y1210272GEG0066US0
G-48 (EU)
9. TIRES
[1] TIRE PRESSURE
CAUTION
• Do not attempt mount a tire. This should be done by a qualified person with the proper equipment.
IMPORTANT
• Do not use tires larger than specified.
• When you intend to mount different size of tires from equipped ones, consult your distributor about front
drive gear ratio for detail.
• Excessive wear of tires may occur due to improper gear ratio.
Through the tire pressure is factory-set to the prescribed level,

it naturally drops slowly in the course of time. Thus, check it every
day and inflate as necessary.
To inflate the wheel tires, use an air compressor or hand pump.
Q Recommended inflation pressure
• Maintain the pressure shown below for normal use.
Tire Sizes Inflation Pressure
7 - 16, 4PR 180 kPa (1.8 kgf/cm2, 26 psi)
8 - 16, 4PR 160 kPa (1.6 kgf/cm2, 23 psi)
Rear 9.5 - 16, 4PR 140 kPa (1.4 kgf/cm2, 20 psi)
212/80D - 15, 4PR 160 kPa (1.6 kgf/cm2, 23 psi)
29 × 12.00 - 15, 4PR 140 kPa (1.4 kgf/cm2, 20 psi)
4.50 - 10, 4PR 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 31 psi)
5 - 12, 4PR 240 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 34 psi)
Front 6 - 12B, 4PR 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 29 psi)
20 × 8.00 - 10, 4PR 160 kPa (1.6 kgf/cm2, 23 psi)
20.5 × 8.00 - 10, 4PR 160 kPa (1.6 kgf/cm2, 23 psi)
NOTE
• Maintain the maximum pressure in front tires, if using a
front loader of when equipped with a full load of front
weights.
Q Dual Tires
• Dual tires are not approved.
(A) Insufficient (C) Excessive
(B) Standard (D) Ground
9Y1210272GEG0045US0
G-49 (EU)
[2] TREAD ADJUSTMENT

CAUTION
• Support tractor securely on stands before removing a wheel.
• Never operate tractor with a loose rim, wheel or axle.
IMPORTANT
• Always attach tires as shown in the figure.
• If not attached as the figure, transmission parts may be damaged.
• Do not use tires larger than specified.
9Y1210272GEG0046US0
(1) Front Wheels

Front wheel cannot be adjusted.
IMPORTANT
• Do not turn front discs to obtain wider tread. In setting up the front wheels, make sure that the inflation
valve stem of the tires face outward.
20 × 8.00-10 Turf
4.5 - 10 Farm 5 - 12 Farm 6 - 12B Farm
20.5 × 8.00-10 Turf
778 mm 767 mm 786 mm 798 mm

(30.6 in.) (30.2 in.) (30.9 in.) (31.4 in.)
A : Tread
9Y1210272GEG0047US0
G-50 (EU)
(2) Rear Wheels

Rear tread can be adjusted in 2 or 3 steps depending on the
model.
1. Loosen the nut (1) of cotter pin bolt.
2. Remove the snap pin (5) and wheel hub pin (4).
3. Change the tread to desired position.
4. Re-set the wheel hub pin, snap pin and cotter pin bolt.
(1) Nut (4) Wheel Hub Pin
(2) Spring Washer (5) Snap Pin
(3) Bolt
7 - 16 Farm 8 - 16 Farm 9.5 - 16 Farm 212/80D - 15 Turf 2 × 12.00-15 Turf
707.0 to 1035mm 743.0 to 1035 mm 791.0 to 1069 mm 743.0 to 1035 mm 843 to 985 mm
(27.84 to 40.74 in.) (29.26 to 40.74 in.) (31.15 to 42.08 in.) (29.26 to 40.74 in.) (33.2 to 38.7 in.)
A : Tread
9Y1210272GEG0048US0
CAUTION
• When working on slopes or working with trailer, set the wheel tread as wide as practical for the job for
maximum stability.
IMPORTANT
• When re-fitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts to the following torques then recheck after driving
the tractor 200 m (200 yards) and there after daily check service.
* Remove the wheel hub and reinstall it on the other side of the wheel disk, then set the wheel as shown.
NOTE
• Insert the bolt (2) from the recessed side of both cotters
and tighten the nut (4) with flat side of cotter as shown in
figure.
(1) Cotter (3) Spring Lock Washer
(2) Bolt (4) Nut
9Y1210272GEG0049US0
G-51 (EU)
[3] TIRE LIQUID INJECTION

Auxiliary weights can be used to increase traction force for plowing in fields or clayey ground.
Another way is to inject water or another liquid, such as a calcium chloride solution in the tires. Water must not
be used in winter since it freezes at 0 °C (32 °F). The calcium chloride solution will not freeze and moreover, affords
higher effect than water since its specific gravity is higher than that of water by about 20 %. Below is an explanation
of calcium chloride solution injection.
IMPORTANT
• Do not fill the front tires with liquid.
9Y1210272GEG0050US0
Preparation of Calcium Chloride Solution
CAUTION
• When making a calcium chloride solution, do not pour
water over calcium chloride since this results in chemical
reaction which will cause high temperature. Instead add a
small amount of calcium chloride to the water at a time until
the desired solution is achieved.
Weight of CaCl2 to be dissolved in 100 L
Freezing temp.
(26.5 U.S.gals, 22.0 Imp.gals) of water
−5 °C (23 °F) 12 kg (26.4 lbs)
−10 °C (14 °F) 21 kg (46.3 lbs)
−15 °C (5 °F) 28 kg (61.7 lbs)
−20 °C (−4 °F) 34 kg (75.0 lbs)
−25 °C (−13 °F) 40 kg (88.2 lbs)
−30 °C (−22 °F) 44 kg (97.0 lbs)
−35 °C (−31 °F) 49 kg (108 lbs)
−40 °C (−40 °F) 52 kg (114.6 lbs)
−45 °C (−49 °F) 56 kg (123.5 lbs)
−50 °C (−58 °F) 61 kg (134.5 lbs)
(a) Water A: Bad

(b) CaCl2 (Calcium Chloride) B: Good
9Y1210272GEG0051US0
Attaching Injector
1. Lift the rear tires off the ground.
2. Turn the tire so that the air valve is at the top.
3. Remove the air valve, and attach the injector (Code No.
07916-52501).
(1) Injector (2) Hose
9Y1210272GEG0052US0
G-52 (EU)
Injection
CAUTION
• When a calcium chloride solution is used, cool it before
pouring it into the tire.
• Do not fill tires with water or solution more than 75 % of full
capacity (to the valve stem level).
• To avoid damage of transmission, do not use rear wheel
weights and liquid ballast at the same time.
The following four ways can be used to inject water or a calcium
chloride solution into tires.
1. Gravity injection (Fig. 1)
2. Pump injection (Fig. 2)
3. Pressure tank injection (Fig. 3)
4. Injection directly from tap (only when water is being used).
NOTE
• Once injection is completed, reset the air valve, and pump
air into the tire to the specified pressure.
Weight of calcium chloride solution filling 75 % of full capacity of
a tire.
Tire sizes 8-16 9.5-16 11.2-16
Slush free at −10 °C (14 °F)
Solid at −30 °C (−22 °F) 35 kg 54 kg 70 kg
[Approx. 1 kg (2 lbs) CaCl2 per 4 (77 lbs) (119 lbs) (155 lbs)
L (1 gal.) of water]
Slush free at −24 °C (−11 °F)
[Approx. 1.5 kg (3.5 lbs) CaCl2 (82 lbs) (126 lbs) (163 lbs)
per 4 L (1 gal.) of water]
Slush free at −47 °C (−53 °F)
[Approx. 2.25 kg (5 lbs) CaCl2 (86 lbs) (132 lbs) (172 lbs)
per 4 L (1 gal.) of water]
(1) Pump (A) Correct : 75 %

(2) Pressure Tank Air Compresses Like A Cushion
(3) Compressor (B) Incorrect : 100 %
(4) Air Full Water Can Not Be
(5) Water Compressed
9Y1210272GEG0053US0
G-53 (EU)
1 ENGINE

SERVICING
CONTENTS
1. TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................................................................1-S1
2. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................1-S4
3. TIGHTENING TORQUES............................................................................................................1-S9
4. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING ...................................................................1-S10
[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING............................................................................................1-S10
(1) Engine Body ..................................................................................................................1-S10
(2) Lubricating System ........................................................................................................1-S12
(3) Cooling System .............................................................................................................1-S13
(4) Fuel System...................................................................................................................1-S15
[2] PREPARATION ...................................................................................................................1-S19
(1) Separating Engine from Tractor ....................................................................................1-S19
[3] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING ..............................................................................1-S26
(1) Cylinder Head, Valves and Oil Pan ...............................................................................1-S26
(2) Gear Case and Timing Gears........................................................................................1-S31
(3) Piston and Connecting Rod...........................................................................................1-S34
(4) Flywheel and Crankshaft ...............................................................................................1-S36
[4] SERVICING .........................................................................................................................1-S39
(1) Cylinder Head and Valves .............................................................................................1-S39
(2) Timing Gears .................................................................................................................1-S45
(3) Piston and Connecting Rod...........................................................................................1-S48
(4) Crankshaft .....................................................................................................................1-S50
(5) Cylinder .........................................................................................................................1-S55
(6) Oil Pump........................................................................................................................1-S56

B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
1. TROUBLESHOOTING
Reference
Symptom Probable Cause Solution
Page
Engine Does Not No fuel Replenish fuel G-9
Start Air in the fuel system Bleed G-36
Water in the fuel system Change fuel and –
repair or replace fuel
system
Fuel hose clogged Clean –
Fuel filter clogged Clean or replace G-26, G-31
Excessively high viscosity of fuel or engine oil at Use specified fuel or G-9
low temperature engine oil
Fuel with low cetane number Use specified fuel –
Fuel leak due to loose injection pipe retaining nut Tighten retaining nut 1-S26
Incorrect injection timing Adjust 1-S15
Fuel camshaft worn Replace 1-S33
Injection nozzle clogged Clean or replace 1-S18
Injection pump malfunctioning Repair or replace 1-S31
Seizure of crankshaft, camshaft, piston, cylinder Repair or replace 1-S34,
or bearing 1-S37,
1-S38
Compression leak from cylinder Replace head gasket, 1-S10
tighten cylinder head
screw, glow plug and
nozzle holder
Improper valve timing Correct or replace 1-S32
timing gear
Piston ring and cylinder worn Replace 1-S35
Excessive valve clearance Adjust 1-S11
Stop solenoid malfunctioning Replace –
Starter Does Not Run Battery discharged Charge G-23
Starter malfunctioning Repair or replace 9-S26
Wiring disconnected Connect –
Engine Revolution Is Fuel filter clogged or dirty Clean or replace G-26, G-31
Not Smooth Air cleaner clogged Clean or replace G-25, G-26
Fuel leak due to loose injection pipe retaining nut Tighten retaining nut 1-S26
Incorrect nozzle injection pressure Adjust 1-S17
Injection nozzle stuck or clogged Repair or replace 1-S18
Governor malfunctioning Repair 1-S33
Either White or Blue Excessive engine oil Reduce to specified G-9
Exhaust Gas Is level
Observed Piston ring and cylinder worn or stuck Repair or replace 1-S35
1-S1 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Reference
Page
Either Black or Dark Overload Reduce the load –
Gray Exhaust Gas Is Low grade fuel used Use specified fuel G-9
Observed
Fuel filter clogged Clean or replace G-26, G-31
Air cleaner clogged Clean or replace G-25, G-26
Deficient nozzle injection Repair or replace 1-S18
nozzle
Deficient Output Incorrect injection timing Adjust 1-S15
Engine's moving parts seem to be seizing Repair or replace –
Deficient nozzle injection Repair or replace 1-S18
nozzle
Compression leak Check the 1-S10
compression
pressure and repair
Excessive Lubricant Piston ring's gap facing the same direction Shift ring gap 1-S35
Oil Consumption direction
Oil ring worn or stuck Replace 1-S35
Piston ring groove worn Replace piston 1-S35
Valve stem and valve guide worn Replace 1-S29
Crankshaft bearing and crank pin bearing worn Replace 1-S38
Oil leaking due to defective seals or packing Replace –
Fuel Mixed into Injection pump's plunger worn Repair or replace 1-S31
Lubricant Oil Deficient nozzle injection Repair or replace 1-S18
nozzle
Injection pump broken Replace 1-S31
Water Mixed into Head gasket defective Replace 1-S28
Lubricant Oil Cylinder block or cylinder head flawed Replace 1-S28
Low Oil Pressure Engine oil insufficient Replenish G-9
Oil strainer clogged Clean 1-S30
Relief valve stuck with dirt Clean –
Relief valve spring weaken or broken Replace –
Excessive oil clearance of crankshaft bearing Replace 1-S52
Excessive oil clearance of crankpin bearing Replace 1-S51
Excessive oil clearance of rocker arm Replace 1-S43
Oil passage clogged Clean –
Different type of oil Use specified type of G-9
oil
Oil pump defective Replace 1-S56
High Oil Pressure Different type of oil Use specified type of G-9
oil
Relief valve defective Replace –
1-S2 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Reference
Page
Engine Overheated Engine oil insufficient Replenish G-18
Fan belt broken or elongated Replace or adjust 1-S13
Coolant insufficient Replenish G-9
Radiator net and radiator fin clogged with dust Clean –
Inside of radiator corroded Clean or replace G-29
Coolant flow route corroded Clean or replace G-29
Radiator cap defective Replace 1-S13
Overload running Reduce the load –
Head gasket defective Replace 1-S28
Unsuitable fuel used Use specified fuel G-9
9Y1210272ENS0011US0
1-S3 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
2. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE BODY
Item Factory Specification Allowable Limit
Valve Clearance (Cold) 0.145 to 0.185 mm –
0.00571 to 0.00728 in.
Compression Pressure 2.84 to 3.24 MPa 2.26 MPa
29.0 to 33.0 kgf/cm2 23.0 kgf/cm2
412 to 469 psi 327 psi
• Difference among Cylinders – 10 % or less

Top Clearance 0.50 to 0.70 mm –
0.0197 to 0.0276 in.
Cylinder Head Surface Flatness – 0.05 mm
0.002 in.
Valve Recessing Intake and Exhaust −0.10 to 0.10 mm 0.30 mm
−0.0039 to 0.0039 in. 0.0118 in.
Valve Stem to Valve Guide Clearance 0.030 to 0.057 mm 0.10 mm
0.00118 to 0.00224 in. 0.0039 in.
• Valve Stem O.D. 5.968 to 5.980 mm –

0.23496 to 0.23543 in.
• Valve Guide I.D. 6.010 to 6.025 mm –

0.23661 to 0.23720 in.
Valve Face Angle 0.785 rad –
45 °
Valve Seat Angle 0.785 rad –
45 °
Width 2.12 mm –
0.0835 in.
Valve Spring Free Length 31.3 to 31.8 mm 28.4 mm
1.232 to 1.252 in. 1.118 in.
Tilt – 1.2 mm
0.047 in.
Setting Load / 64.7 N / 27.0 mm 54.9 N / 27.0 mm

Setting Length 6.6 kgf / 27.0 mm 5.6 kgf / 27.0 mm
14.6 lbf / 1.063 in. 12.3 lbf / 1.063 in.
Rocker Arm Shaft to Rocker Arm Clearance 0.016 to 0.045 mm 0.15 mm
0.00063 to 0.00177 in. 0.0059 in.
• Rocker Arm Shaft O.D. 10.473 to 10.484 mm –

0.41232 to 0.41276 in.
• Rocker Arm I.D. 10.500 to 10.518 mm –

0.41339 to 0.41410 in.
Push Rod Alignment – 0.25 mm
0.00988 in.
1-S4 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE

Tappet to Tappet Guide Oil Clearance 0.016 to 0.052 mm 0.10 mm
0.00063 to 0.00205 in. 0.0039 in.
• Tappet O.D. 17.966 to 17.984 mm –

0.70732 to 0.70803 in.
• Tappet Guide I.D. 18.000 to 18.018 mm –

0.70866 to 0.70937 in.
Timing Gear
• Crank Gear to Idle Gear Backlash 0.043 to 0.124 mm 0.15 mm
0.00169 to 0.00488 in. 0.0059 in.
• Idle Gear to Cam Gear Backlash 0.047 to 0.123 mm 0.15 mm

0.00185 to 0.00484 in. 0.0059 in.
• Idle Gear to Injection Pump Gear Backlash 0.046 to 0.124 mm 0.15 mm

0.00181 to 0.00488 in. 0.0059 in.
• Crank Gear to Oil Pump Drive Gear Backlash 0.041 to 0.123 mm 0.15 mm
0.00161 to 0.00484 in. 0.0059 in.
Idle Gear Side Clearance 0.20 to 0.51 mm 0.80 mm
0.0079 to 0.0201 in. 0.0315 in.
Camshaft Side Clearance 0.15 to 0.31 mm 0.50 mm
0.0059 to 0.0122 in. 0.0197 in.
Alignment – 0.01 mm
0.0004 in.
Cam Height Intake and Exhaust 26.88 mm 26.83 mm
1.0583 in. 1.0563 in.
Camshaft Journal to Cylinder Block Bore Oil Clearance 0.050 to 0.091 mm 0.15 mm
0.00197 to 0.00358 in. 0.0059 in.
• Camshaft Journal O.D. 32.934 to 32.950 mm –

1.29661 to 1.29724 in.
• Cylinder Block Bore I.D. 33.000 to 33.025 mm –

1.29921 to 1.30020 in.
Idle Gear Shaft to Idle Gear Bushing Oil Clearance 0.020 to 0.084 mm 0.10 mm
0.00079 to 0.00331 in. 0.0039 in.
• Idle Gear Shaft O.D. 19.967 to 19.980 mm –

0.78610 to 0.78661 in.
• Idle Gear Bushing I.D. 20.000 to 20.051 mm –

0.78740 to 0.78941 in.
Piston Pin Bore I.D. 20.000 to 20.013 mm 20.05 mm
0.78740 to 0.78791 in. 0.7894 in.
Piston Pin to Small End Bushing Oil Clearance 0.014 to 0.038 mm 0.10 mm
0.00055 to 0.00150 in. 0.0039 in.
• Piston Pin O.D. 20.002 to 20.011 mm –

0.78748 to 0.78783 in.
• Small End Bushing I.D. 20.025 to 20.040 mm –

0.78839 to 0.78897 in.
1-S5 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE

Piston Pin to Small End Bushing (Spare Oil Clearance 0.015 to 0.075 mm 0.15 mm
Parts) 0.00059 to 0.00295 in. 0.0059 in.
• Small End Bushing I.D. 20.026 to 20.077 mm –

0.78843 to 0.79043 in.
Piston Ring Gap
• Top Ring 0.15 to 0.30 mm 1.20 mm
0.0059 to 0.0118 in. 0.0472 in.
• Second Ring 0.30 to 0.45 mm 1.20 mm

0.0118 to 0.0177 in. 0.0472 in.
• Oil Ring 0.15 to 0.30 mm 1.20 mm

0.0059 to 0.0118 in. 0.0472 in.
Piston Ring to Piston Ring Groove
• Second Ring Clearance 0.090 to 0.120 mm 0.15 mm
0.00354 to 0.00472 in. 0.0059 in.
• Oil Ring Clearance 0.04 to 0.08 mm 0.15 mm

0.0016 to 0.0031 in. 0.0059 in.
Connecting Rod Alignment – 0.05 mm
0.0197 in.
Crankshaft Side Clearance 0.15 to 0.31 mm 0.50 mm
0.0059 to 0.0122 in. 0.0197 in.
Alignment – 0.02 mm
0.0008 in.
Crankpin to Crankpin Bearing Oil Clearance 0.020 to 0.051 mm 0.15 mm
0.00079 to 0.00201 in. 0.0059 in.
• Crankpin O.D. 33.959 to 33.975 mm –

1.33697 to 1.33760 in.
• Crankpin Bearing I.D. 33.995 to 34.010 mm –

1.33839 to 1.33898 in.
Crankshaft Journal to Crankshaft Bearing 1 Oil Clearance 0.034 to 0.106 mm 0.20 mm
0.00134 to 0.00417 in. 0.0079 in.
• Crankshaft Journal O.D. 39.934 to 39.950 mm –

1.57221 to 1.57284 in.
• Crankshaft Bearing 1 I.D. 39.984 to 40.040 mm –

1.57417 to 1.57638 in.
(Flywheel Side) 0.00110 to 0.00232 in. 0.0079 in.
O.D. 43.934 to 43.950 mm –

• Crankshaft Journal 1.72968 to 1.73031 in.
I.D. 43.978 to 43.993 mm –

• Crankshaft Bearing 2 1.73142 to 1.73201 in.
1-S6 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE

(Intermediate) 0.00110 to 0.00232 in. 0.0079 in.
O.D. 39.934 to 39.950 mm –

• Crankshaft Journal 1.57221 to 1.57284 in.
I.D. 39.978 to 39.993 mm –

• Crankshaft Bearing 3 1.57394 to 1.57453 in.
Cylinder Liner I.D. 67.000 to 67.019 mm 67.150 mm
2.63779 to 2.63854 in. 2.64370 in.
Cylinder Liner I.D. 67.250 to 67.269 mm 67.400 mm
[Oversize : 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.)] 2.64764 to 2.64839 in. 2.65354 in.
LUBRICATING SYSTEM
Engine Oil Pressure At Idle Speed More than –
49 kPa
0.50 kgf/cm2
7 psi
At Rated Speed 197 to 441 kPa 147 kPa

2.00 to 4.50 kgf/cm2 1.50 kgf/cm2
28.5 to 64.0 psi 21.3 psi
Inner Rotor to Outer Rotor Clearance 0.03 to 0.14 mm –
0.0012 to 0.0055 in.
Outer Rotor to Pump Body Clearance 0.07 to 0.15 mm –
0.0028 to 0.0059 in.
Inner Rotor to Cover Clearance 0.075 to 0.135 mm –
0.00295 to 0.00531 in.
COOLING SYSTEM
Fan Belt Tension 7.0 to 9.0 mm / 98 N –
0.28 to 0.35 in. / 98 N
(10 kgf, 22 lbf)
Thermostat At Beginning 69.5 to 72.5 °C –
• Valve Opening Temperature 157.1 to 162.5 °F
Opened 85 °C –
Completely 185 °F
Radiator Cap Pressure Falling 10 seconds or more –
Time 88 → 59 kPa
0.9 → 0.6 kgf/cm2
13 → 9 psi
Radiator Water Leakage No leak at specified –
Test Pressure pressur
157 kPa
1.6 kgf/cm2
23 psi
1-S7 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
FUEL SYSTEM
Injection Pump [Z482/D722] Injection Timing 0.30 to 0.33 rad –
17 to 19 °
before T.D.C.
Injection Pump [D782] Injection Timing 0.28 to 0.31 rad –
16 to 18 °
before T.D.C.
Pump Element Fuel Tightness – 13.73 kPa
140 kgf/cm2
1991 psi
Delivery Valve Fuel Tightness 10 seconds 5 seconds
13.73 → 12.75 kPa 13.73 → 12.75 kPa
140 → 130 kgf/cm2 140 → 130 kgf/cm2
1991 → 1849 psi 1991 → 1849 psi
Injection Nozzle Injection Pressure 13.73 to 14.71 kPa –
140 to 150 kgf/cm2
1991 to 2134 psi
Injection Nozzle Valve Seat Valve Seat When the pressure is –
Tightness 12.75 kPa
(130 kgf/cm2, 1849 psi),
the valve seat must be
fuel tightness
9Y1210272ENS0012US0
1-S8 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Tightening torques of screws, bolts and nuts on the table below are especially specified.
(For general use screws, bolts and nuts : See page G-11.)
[TRACTOR BODY]
Item N·m kgf·m lbf·ft
Steering wheel mounting nut 30 to 49 3.0 to 5.0 22 to 36
Drag link slotted nut 18 to 35 1.9 to 3.5 14 to 25
Power Steering delivery pipe nut 35 to 45 3.6 to 4.5 26 to 33
Front axle frame mounting screw 78 to 90 7.9 to 9.2 58 to 66
Clutch housing and engine mounting screw 18 to 20 1.8 to 2.1 13 to 15
Clutch cover mounting screw 24 to 27 2.4 to 2.8 18 to 20
[ENGINE]
Dimension ×
Pitch
*Cylinder head cover screw M6 × 1 9.81 to 11.2 1.00 to 1.15 7.24 to 8.31
Injection pipe retaining nut M12 × 1.5 25 to 34 2.5 to 3.5 18 to 25
Overflow pipe retaining nut M12 × 1.5 20 to 24 2.0 to 2.5 15 to 18
Nozzle holder assembly M20 × 1.5 49 to 68 5.0 to 7.0 37 to 50
Glow plug M8 × 1 7.9 to 14 0.80 to 1.5 5.8 to 10
*Rocker arm bracket nut M6 × 1 9.81 to 11.2 1.00 to 1.15 7.24 to 8.31
*Cylinder head screw M8 × 1.25 38 to 42 3.8 to 4.3 28 to 31
*Fan drive pulley screw M12 × 1.5 118 to 127 12.0 to 13.0 86.8 to 94.0
*Nut M20 × 1 79 to 88 8.0 to 9.0 58 to 65
*Idle gear shaft mounting screw M6 × 1 9.81 to 11.2 1.00 to 1.15 7.24 to 8.31
Oil pump mounting screw M8 × 1.25 17.7 to 21.5 1.80 to 2.20 13.1 to 15.9
*Connecting rod screw M7 × 0.75 27 to 30 2.7 to 3.1 20 to 22
*Flywheel screw M10 × 1.25 54 to 58 5.5 to 6.0 40 to 43
Bearing case cover mounting screw M6 × 1 9.81 to 11.2 1.00 to 1.15 7.24 to 8.31
*Main bearing case screw 2 M7 × 1 27 to 30 2.7 to 3.1 20 to 22
*Main bearing case screw 1 M6 × 1 13 to 15 1.3 to 1.6 9.4 to 11
Oil pressure switch PT 1/8 15 to 19 1.5 to 2.0 11 to 14
Nozzle holder – 35 to 39 3.5 to 4.0 26 to 28
Drain plug with copper gasket M12 × 1.25 33 to 37 3.3 to 3.8 24 to 27
Drain plug with copper gasket M22 × 1.5 64 to 73 6.5 to 7.5 47 to 54
Drain plug with rubber coated gasket M22 × 1.5 45 to 53 4.5 to 5.5 33 to 39
NOTE
• For "*" marked screws, bolts and nuts on the table, apply engine oil to their threads and seats before
tightening.
• The letter "M" in Size × Pitch means that the screw, bolt or nut dimension stands for metric. The size is
the nominal outside diameter in mm of the threads. The pitch is the nominal distance in mm between two
threads.
9Y1210272ENS0013US0
1-S9 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
4. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING

[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
(1) Engine Body
Compression Pressure
1. Run the engine until it is warmed up.
2. Stop the engine.
3. Remove the air cleaner, the muffler and all injection nozzles.
4. Set a compression tester (Code No. 07909-30208) with the
adaptor to the nozzle hole.
5. Keep the engine stop lever at "Stop Position".
6. Set a compression tester (Code No. 07909-30208) with the
adaptor (Adaptor H, Code No. 07909-31231) to the nozzle hole.
7. While cranking the engine with the starter, measure the
compression pressure.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each cylinder.
9. If the measurement is below the allowable limit, apply a small
amount of oil to the cylinder wall through the nozzle hole and
measure the compression pressure again.
10. If the compression pressure is still less than the allowable limit,
check the top clearance, valve clearance and cylinder head.
11. If the compression pressure increases after applying oil, check
the cylinder wall and piston rings.
NOTE
• Check the compression pressure with the specified valve
clearance.
• Always use a fully charged battery for preforming this test.
• Variances in cylinder compression values should be under
10 %.
3.73 to 4.11 MPa
Factory specification 38.0 to 42.0 kgf/cm2
541 to 597 psi
Compression pressure
2.26 MPa
Allowable limit 23.0 kgf/cm2
327 psi
9Y1210272ENS0014US0
1-S10 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Valve Clearance
IMPORTANT
• Valve clearance must be checked and adjusted when
engine is cold.
1. Remove the head cover, the glow plugs and the timing window
(3) cover on the clutch housing.
2. Align the "1TC" marking line (4) on the flywheel and center of
timing window so that the No. 1 piston comes to the
compression top dead center.
3. Check the following valve clearance marked with "," using a
feeler gauge.
4. If the clearance is not within the factory specifications, loosen
the lock nut (2) and adjust with the adjusting screw (1).
5. Turn the flywheel 6.28 rad (360 °) and align the "1TC" marking
line and the center of timing window.
6. Check the remaining valve clearance in a same way.
0.145 to 0.185 mm
Valve clearance "A" Factory specification
0.00571 to 0.0728 in.
NOTE
• The "TC" marking line on the flywheel is just for No. 1
cylinder. There is no "TC" marking for the other cylinders.
• No. 1 piston comes to the T.D.C. position when the "TC"
marking line is aligned with center of timing window on
clutch-housing. Turn the flywheel 0.26 rad (15 °) clockwise
and counterclockwise to see if the piston is at the
compression top dead center or the overlap position. The
piston is at the compression top dead center when both the
IN. and EX. valves do not move; it is at the overlap position
when both the valves move.
• After turning the flywheel counterclockwise twice or three
times, recheck the valve clearance, firmly tighten the lock
nut of the adjusting screw.
• The sequence of cylinder numbers is given as No. 1, No. 2
and No. 3 starting from the gear case side.
Adjustable cylinder location of
IN. EX.
piston
No. 1 , ,
When No. 1 piston
comes to compression No. 2 ,
top dead center
No. 3 ,
No. 1
When No. 1 piston
comes to overlap No. 2 ,
position
No. 3 ,
(1) Adjusting Screw A: Valve Clearance

(2) Lock Nut
(3) Timing Window
(4) 1TC Marking Line
9Y1210272ENS0015US0
1-S11 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
(2) Lubricating System

Engine Oil Pressure
1. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, and set a oil pressure
tester (Code No. 07916-32032). (Adapter screw size : PT 1/8)
2. Start the engine. After warming up, measure the oil pressure of
both idling and rated speeds.
3. If the oil pressure is less than the allowable limit, check the
following.
• Engine oil insufficient
• Oil pump defective
• Oil strainer clogged
• Oil filter cartridge clogged
• Oil gallery clogged
• Excessive oil clearance
• Foreign matter in the relief valve
More than
At idle 49 kPa
Factory speed 0.50 kgf/cm2
specifica- 7.1 psi
tion 197 to 441 kPa
Engine oil pressure At rated
2.00 to 4.50 kgf/cm2
speed
28.5 to 64.0 psi
Factory 147 kPa
Allowable
specifi- 1.50 kgf/cm2
limit
cation 21.3 psi
(When reassembling)
• After checking the engine oil pressure, tighten the engine oil
pressure switch to the specified torque.
15 to 19 N·m
Tightening torque Oil pressure switch 1.5 to 2.0 kgf·m
11 to 14 lbf·ft
9Y1210272ENS0016US0
1-S12 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
(3) Cooling System

Fan Belt Tension
1. Measure the deflection (A), depressing the belt halfway
between the fan drive pulley and alternator pulley at specified
force 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf).
2. If the measurement is not within the factory specifications,
loosen the alternator mounting screws and relocate the
alternator to adjust.
7.0 to 9.0 mm
Deflection (A) Factory specification
0.28 to 0.35 in.
(A) Deflection
9Y1210272ENS0017US0
Fan Belt Damage and Wear
1. Check the fan belt for damage.
2. If the fan belt is damaged, replace it.
3. Check if the fan belt is worn and sunk in the pulley groove.
4. If the fan belt is nearly worn out and deeply sunk in the pulley
groove, replace it.
(A) Good (B) Bad
9Y1210272ENS0018US0
Radiator Cap Air Leakage
CAUTION
• When removing the radiator cap, wait at least ten minutes
after the engine has stopped and cooled down. Otherwise,
hot water way gush out, scalding nearby people.
1. Set a radiator tester (1) and adaptor (2) on the radiator cap.
2. Apply the specified pressure 88 kPa (0.90 kgf/cm2, 13 psi), and
measure the time for the pressure to fall to 59 kPa (0.60 kgf/cm2,
8.5 psi).
3. If the measurement is less than the factory specifications,
replace the radiator cap.
More than 10 seconds for
pressure fall from
Pressure falling time Factory specification 88 to 59 kPa
(from 0.90 to 0.60 kgf/cm2,
from 13 to 8.5 psi)
(1) Radiator Tester (2) Adaptor

9Y1210272ENS0019US0
1-S13 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Radiator Water Leakage
CAUTION
• When removing the radiator cap, wait at least ten minutes
after the engine has stopped and cooled down. Otherwise,
hot water way gush out, scalding nearby people.
1. Pour a specified amount of water into the radiator.
2. Set a radiator tester (1), adaptor (2) and raise the water
pressure to the specified pressure.
3. Check the radiator for water leaks.
4. If the water leak from the pinhole, replace the radiator or repair
with the radiator cement. When water leak is excessive, replace
the radiator.
137 kPa
Radiator water leakage
Factory specification 1.40 kgf/cm2
test pressure
19.9 psi
(1) Radiator Tester (2) Adaptor

9Y1210272ENS0020US0
1-S14 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
(4) Fuel System

CAUTION
• Check the injection pressure and condition after confirming that there is nobody standing in the direction
the fume goes. If the fume from the nozzle directly contacts the human body, cells may be destroyed and
blood poisoning may be caused.
9Y1210272ENS0021US0
Injection Timing
1. Remove the injection pipes and timing window (7) cover.
2. Set the speed control lever to the maximum fuel discharge
position.
3. Turn the flywheel counterclockwise (facing the flywheel) until
fuel flows from the delivery valve holder.
4. Continue to turn the flywheel slowly, and stop it as soon as the
fuel level at the tip of the delivery valve holder begins to
increase.
5. Check to see if the timing angle lines on the flywheel is aligned
with the alignment mark (2).
6. If the injection timing is out of adjustment, readjust the timing
with the injection pump shims (3).
[Z482, D722]
0.30 to 0.33 rad
Injection timing Factory specification
(17 to 19 °) before T.D.C.
[D782]
0.28 to 0.31 rad
Injection timing Factory specification
(16 to 18 °) before T.D.C.
NOTE
• The liquid gasket is not required for assembling.
• Shims are available in thickness of 0.20 mm (0.0079 in.),
0.25 mm (0.0098 in.), 0.30 mm (0.012 in.), 0.35 mm (0.014 in.)
and 0.175 mm (0.00689 in.). Combine these shims for
adjustments.
• Addition or reduction of shim (0.025 mm, 0.00098 in.)
delays or advances the injection timing by approx.
0.0044 rad (0.25 °).
• In disassembling and replacing the injection pump, be sure
to use the same number of new shims with the same
thickness.
• The 0.175 mm (0.00689 in.) thick shim is coated only on the
lower face. Therefore, do not use the 0.175 mm (0.00689 in.)
thick shim as the top shim of the combination (injection
pump side), because this can cause oil leakage.
• Refer to figure of the shim to check the thickness of the
shims.
• The injection timing might be changed by the application.
(Reference)
• The alignment mark (2) of the injection timing line (1) is not in
alignment with the center of the timing window (7).
• The above mark (2) comes aligned with the center of the clutch
housing rib (8).
(1) Timing Line (6) Shim without Hole : 0.30 mm
(2) Alignment Mark (0.012 in.)
(3) Injection Pump Shim (7) Shim with three Holes : 0.35 mm
(Soft Metal Gasket Shim) (0.014 in.)
(4) Shim with two Holes : 0.175 mm (8) Timing Window
(0.00689 in.) (9) Rib
(5) Shim with one Hole : 0.25 mm
(0.0098 in.)
9Y1210272ENS0097US0
1-S15 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Fuel Tightness of Pump Element
1. Remove the engine stop solenoid.
2. Remove the injection pipes and glow plugs.
3. Install the injection pump pressure tester to the injection pump.
4. Install the injection nozzle (1) jetted with the proper injection
pressure to the injection pump pressure tester (2). (Refer to the
photo.)
5. Set the speed control lever to the maximum speed position.
6. Run the starter to increase the pressure.
7. If the pressure can not reach the allowable limit, replace the
pump with new one or repair with a KUBOTA-authorized pump
service shop.
13.7 MPa
Fuel tightness of pump
Allowable limit 140 kgf/cm2
element
1991 psi
NOTE
• Never try to disassemble the injection pump assembly. For
repairs, you are strongly requested to contact a
KUBOTA-authorized pump service shop.
(1) Injection Nozzle (3) Protection Cover for Jetted Fuel
(2) Injection Pump Pressure Tester
9Y1210272ENS0023US0
Fuel Tightness of Delivery Valve
1. Remove the engine stop solenoid.
2. Remove the injection pipes and glow plugs.
3. Set a pressure tester to the fuel injection pump.
4. Install the injection nozzle (1) jetted with the proper injection
pressure to the injection pump pressure tester (2).
5. Run the starter to increase the pressure.
6. Stop the starter when the fuel jets from the injection nozzle.
After that, turn the flywheel by the hand and raise the pressure
to approx. 13.73 MPa (140.0 kgf/cm2, 1991 psi).
7. Now turn the flywheel back about half a turn (to keep the plunger
free). Maintain the flywheel at this position and clock the time
taken for the pressure to drop from 13.73 to 12.75 MPa (from
140.0 to 130.0 kgf/cm2, from 1991 to 1849 psi).
8. Measure the time needed to decrease the pressure from 13.73
to 12.75 MPa (140.0 to 130.0 kgf/cm2, 1991 to 1849 psi).
9. If the measurement is less than allowable limit, replace the
pump with new one or repair with a KUBOTA-authorized pump
service shop.
10 seconds
13.73 → 12.75 MPa
140.0 → 130.0 kgf/cm2
Fuel tightness of delivery 1991 → 1849 psi
valve 5 seconds
13.73 → 12.75 MPa
Allowable limit
140.0 → 130.0 kgf/cm2
1991 → 1849 psi
NOTE
• Never try to disassemble the injection pump assembly. For
repairs, you are strongly requested to contact a
KUBOTA-authorized pump service shop.
(1) Injection Nozzle (3) Protection Cover for Jetted Fuel
(2) Injection Pump Pressure Tester
9Y1210272ENS0024US0
1-S16 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Nozzle Spraying Condition
CAUTION
• Check the injection pressure and condition after
confirming that there is nobody standing in the direction
the fume goes.
• If the fume from the nozzle directly injects the human body,
cells may be destroyed and blood poisoning may be
caused.
1. Set the injection nozzle to a nozzle tester, and check the nozzle
spraying condition.
2. If the spraying condition is defective, replace the nozzle piece.
(a) Good (b) Bad
9Y1210272ENS0025US0
Fuel Injection Pressure
1. Set the injection nozzle to a nozzle tester (Code No.
07909-31361).
2. Slowly move the tester handle to measure the pressure at which
fuel begins jetting out from the nozzle.
replace the adjusting washer (1) in the nozzle holder to adjust it.
13.73 to 14.70 MPa
Fuel injection pressure Factory specification 140.0 to 150.0 kgf/cm2
1992 to 2133 psi
(Reference)
• Pressure variation with 0.01 mm (0.0004 in.) difference of
adjusting washer thickness.
Approx. 235 kPa (2.41 kgf/cm2, 34.1 psi)
(1) Adjusting Washer
9Y1210272ENS0026US0
Valve Seat Tightness

1. Set the injection nozzle to a nozzle tester (Code No.
07909-31361).
2. Raise the fuel pressure, and keep at 12.75 MPa (130.0 kgf/cm2,
1849 psi) for 10 seconds.
3. If any fuel leak is found, replace the nozzle piece.
No fuel leak at
12.75 MPa
Valve seat tightness Factory specification
130.0 kgf/cm2
1849 psi
9Y1210272ENS0027US0
1-S17 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Nozzle Holder
1. Secure the nozzle retaining nut (7) with a vise.
2. Remove the nozzle holder (1), and take out parts inside.
(When reassembling)
• Assemble the nozzle in clean fuel oil.
• Install the push rod (4), noting its direction.
• After assembling the nozzle, be sure to adjust the fuel injection
pressure.
35 to 39 N·m
Nozzle holder 3.5 to 4.0 kgf·m
26 to 28 lbf·ft
20 to 24 N·m
Tightening torque Overflow pipe nut 2.0 to 2.50 kgf·m
15 to 18 lbf·ft
49 to 68 N·m
Nozzle holder assembly 5.0 to 7.0 kgf·m
37 to 50 lbf·ft
(1) Nozzle Holder (5) Distance Piece

(2) Adjusting Washer (6) Nozzle Piece
(3) Nozzle Spring (7) Nozzle Retaining Nut
(4) Push Rod
9Y1210272ENS0028US0
1-S18 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
[2] PREPARATION
(1) Separating Engine from Tractor
Bonnet, Front Grille, Side Cover and Battery Negative Cable
1. Open the bonnet (3) and remove the front grille (1).
2. Disconnect the negative cable (2).
3. Disconnect the head light connectors, horn connectors and
remove the bonnet (3).
4. Remove the side covers (4).
NOTE
• When disconnecting the battery cables, disconnect the
negative cable first. When connecting, positive cable first.
(1) Front Grille (3) Bonnet
(2) Battery Negative Cable (4) Side Cover
9Y1210272ENS0001US0
Draining Coolant
CAUTION
• Never open the radiator cap while operating or immediately
after stopping. Otherwise, hot water will spout out from the
radiator. Wait for more than ten minutes to cool the
radiator, before opening the cap.
1. Loosen the drain cock (3) from the radiator hose to drain
coolant.
2. Remove the radiator cap (1) to drain coolant completely.
3.4 L
Coolant
3.0 Imp.qts
(1) Radiator Cap (3) Drain Cock

(2) Recovery Tank
9Y1210272ENS0002US0
1-S19 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Draining Engine Oil
(When refilling)
• Fill with the new oil up to the upper notch on the dipstick.
IMPORTANT
temperatures.
• Refer to "LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT" (See page
G-9).
1.6 L
B1220 1.7 U.S.qts
1.4 Imp.qts
Engine oil capacity
2.4 L
B1620
2.5 U.S.qts
B1820
2.1 Imp.qts

(2) Oil Inlet
(3) Dipstick
9Y1210272ENS0003US0
1-S20 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Draining Transmission Fluid
1. Place an oil pan underneath the transmission case, and remove
the drain plugs (1).
3. Reinstall the drain plug.
(When refilling)
• Fill new oil from filling port after removing the filling plug (2) up
• After running the engine for few minutes, stop it and check the
IMPORTANT
few minutes to prevent damage to the transmission.
10.5 L
2.31 Imp.gals
(1) Drain Plug [A] With Mid-PTO Model

(2) Filling Plug [B] Without Mid-PTO Model
9Y1210272ENS0004US0
Steering Wheel
1. Remove the steering wheel cap.
2. Remove the steering wheel mounting nut and remove the
steering wheel (1) with a steering wheel puller (2).
(When reassembling)
30 to 49 N·m
Steering wheel mounting
Tightening torque 3.0 to 5.0 kgf·m
nut
22 to 36 lbf·ft
(1) Steering Wheel (2) Steering Wheel Puller

9Y1210272ENS0005US0
1-S21 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Meter Panel and Panel Under Cover
1. Tap out the spring pin (2) and remove the hand accelerator
lever (1).
2. Open the meter panel (3) and disconnect the hourmeter cable,
meter panel connector (6), combination switch connector (4)
and hazard switch connector (7) (Except B1220). Then remove
the meter panel (3).
3. Disconnect the main switch connector (8) and remove the panel
under cover (5).
(1) Hand Accelerator Lever (5) Panel Under Cover
(2) Spring Pin (6) Meter Panel Connector
(3) Meter Panel (7) Hazard Switch Connector
(4) Combination Switch Connector [Except B1220]
(8) Main Switch Connector
9Y1210272ENS0006US0
1-S22 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Fuel Tank
1. Disconnect the fuel hose (4) from the fuel filter, then drain fuel
completely.
2. Disconnect the overflow hoses (1) and pull out the hour meter
cable (7).
3. Disconnect the fuel hose (2) at the feed pump side.
4. Remove the fuel filter assembly. (3).
5. Disconnect the combination light lead wires (5). [Except B1220]
6. Disconnect the key stop timer connector (15), flusher unit
connector (17), starter relay connector (11) and lead wires (16).
[Except B1220]
7. Disconnect the key stop timer connector (15), starter relay
connector (10), regulator connector (18) and lead wires (16).
[Only B1220]
8. Remove the tank frame stay 1 (6) and the tank frame stay 2
(12).
9. Disconnect the fuse box (8) from the fuel tank (14).
10. Remove the fuel tank (14) with tank frame (13).
11. Disconnect the drag link (9).
(When reassembling)
IMPORTANT
• Do not loosen the slotted nut (10) to align the hole.
• Install the cotter pins as shown in the figure.
18 to 35 N·m
Tightening torque Slotted nut 1.9 to 3.5 kgf·m
14 to 25 lbf·ft
(1) Overflow Hose (12) Tank Frame Stay 2

(2) Fuel Hose (13) Tank Frame
(3) Fuel Filter Assembly (14) Fuel Tank
(4) Fuel Hose (15) Key Stop Timer Connector
(5) Combination Light Lead Wire (16) Lead Wire
[Except B1220] (17) Flusher Unit Connector
(6) Tank Frame Stay 1 [Except B1220]
(7) Hour Meter Cable (18) Regulator [Only B1220]
(8) Fuse Box
(9) Drag Link [A] B1620 and B1820
(10) Slotted Nut [B] B1220
(11) Starter Relay Connector
9Y1210272ENS0007US0
1-S23 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Hydraulic Pipes
1. Disconnect the accelerator rod (4) and engine stop rod (3).
2. Remove the power steering delivery pipe (1). [Power steering
model]
3. Disconnect the pipe clamp and the disconnect the 3 point hitch
delivery pipe (5).
4. Disconnect the suction hose (2).
5. Disconnect the glow plug lead wire, thermo sensor lead wire, oil
pressure switch lead wire (6) and starter motor lead wire.
6. Disconnect the stop solenoid connector, alternator connector
and lead wire. [Except B1220]
7. Disconnect the dynamo connector. [Only B1220].
(When reassembling)
35 to 45 N·m
Power steering delivery
pipe nut
26 to 33 lbf·ft
(1) Power Steering Delivery Pipe (5) 3 point Hitch Delivery Pipe
[Only Power Steering Model] (6) Oil Pressure Switch Lead Wire
(2) Suction Hose
(3) Engine Stop Rod [A] Power Steering Model
(4) Accelerator Rod [B] Manual Steering Model
9Y1210272ENS0008US0
Universal Joint
1. Loosen the clamp (2) and slide the universal joint cover (1) to
the rear.
2. Tap out the spring pin (4).
3. Slide the universal joint (3) to the rear.
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the splines of the propeller shaft and universal
joint.
• When inserting the spring pin (4), face the split in the direction
parallel to the universal joint cover (1) so that the water drain
hole may become downward.
• Replace the spring pin (4) with new one.
(1) Universal Joint Cover (3) Universal Joint
(2) Clamp (4) Spring Pin
9Y1210272ENS0009US0
1-S24 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Separating the Engine from the Clutch Housing
1. Place the disassembling jack under the center frame.
2. Hoist the engine by the chain at the engine hook.
3. Remove the engine mounting screws, then separate the engine
from the clutch housing with starter motor.
(When reassembling)
• Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 1206D or equivalent) to join
face of the engine and clutch housing.
18 to 20 N·m
Clutch housing and engine
mounting screw
13 to 15 lbf·ft
[A] Power Steering Model [B] Manual Steering Model

9Y1210272ENS0010US0
Outer Parts and Separating Engine from Front Axle Frame

1. Remove the muffler pipe (5) and muffler (2).
2. Remove the air cleaner assembly (8).
3. Remove the hydraulic pump (9).
4. Remove the clutch assembly (3).
5. Remove the hour meter cable (7).
6. Remove the radiator hoses (6).
7. Disconnect the drain cock assembly (4).
8. Remove the radiator assembly (1).
9. Remove the front axle frame mounting screws and separate the
engine from the front axle frame.
(When reassembling)
• Direct the shorter end of the clutch disc boss toward the
flywheel.
• Apply molybdenum disulphide (Three Bond 1901 or equivalent)
to the splines of clutch boss.
• Insert the pressure plate noting the position of straight pins.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to align the center of disc and flywheel by inserting
the clutch center tool (10).
NOTE
• Do not allow grease and oil on the clutch disc facing.
78 to 92 N·m
Front axle frame mounting
7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m
screw
58 to 66 lbf·ft
Tightening torque
24 to 27N·m
Clutch cover mounting
2.4 to 2.8 kgf·m
screw
18 to 20 lbf·ft
(1) Radiator Assembly (6) Radiator Hose

(2) Muffler (7) Hour Meter Cable
(3) Clutch Assembly (8) Air Cleaner Assembly
(4) Drain Cock Assembly (9) Hydraulic Pump
(5) Muffler Pipe (10) Clutch Center Tool
9Y1210272ENS0029US0
1-S25 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
[3] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

(1) Cylinder Head, Valves and Oil Pan
Cylinder Head Cover
1. Disconnect the breather hose (1).
2. Remove the cylinder head cover screws (2).
3. Remove the cylinder head cover (3).
(When reassembling)
• Check to see if the cylinder head cover gasket is not defective.
9.81 to 11.2 N·m
Tightening torque Cylinder head cover screw 1.00 to 1.15 kgf·m
7.24 to 8.31 lbf·ft
(1) Breather Hose (3) Cylinder Head Cover

(2) Cylinder Head Cover Screws
9Y1210272ENS0030US0
Injection Pipes
1. Loosen the screws to the pipe clamps (2).
2. Detach the injection pipes (1).
(When reassembling)
• Sent compressed air into the pipes to blow out dust. Then,
reassemble the pipes in the reverse order.
25 to 34 N·m
Tightening torque Injection pipe retaining nut 2.5 to 3.5 kgf·m
18 to 25 lbf·ft
(1) Injection Pipe (2) Pipe Clamp

9Y1210272ENS0031US0
Nozzle Holder Assembly and Glow Plug
1. Remove the overflow pipe (1).
2. Remove the nozzle holder assemblies (4).
3. Remove the copper gasket (5) and heat seal (6).
4. Remove the lead (2) from the glow plugs (3).
5. Remove the glow plugs (3).
(When reassembling)
• Replace the copper gasket and heat seal with new one.
20 to 24 N·m
Overflow pipe retaining nut 2.0 to 2.5 kgf·m
15 to 18 lbf·ft
49 to 68 N·m
Tightening torque Nozzle holder assembly 5.0 to 7.0 kgf·m
37 to 50 lbf·ft
7.9 to 14 N·m
Glow plug 0.80 to 1.5 kgf·m
5.8 to 10 lbf·ft
(1) Overflow Pipe (4) Nozzle Holder Assembly

(2) Lead (5) Copper Gasket
(3) Glow Plug (6) Heat Seal
9Y1210272ENS0032US0
1-S26 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Nozzle Heat Seal Service Removal Procedure
IMPORTANT
• Use a plus (phillips head) screw driver (1) that has a
diameter which is bigger than the heat seal hole (Approx.
6.0 mm (0.24 in.)).
1. Drive screw driver (1) lightly into the heat seal hole.
2. Turn screw driver three or four times each way.
3. While turning the screw driver, slowly pull the heat seal (4) out
together with the injection nozzle gasket (3).
4. If the heat seal drops, repeat the above procedure
(When reassembling)
• Heat seal and injection nozzle gasket must be changed when
the injection nozzle is removed for cleaning or for service.
(1) Plus Screw Driver (3) Injection Nozzle Gasket
(2) Injection Nozzle (4) Heat Seal
9Y1210272ENS0033US0
Rocker Arm and Push Rod
1. Remove the rocker arm bracket screws (2).
2. Detach the rocker arm assembly (1).
3. Remove the push rods (3).
(When reassembling)
• When putting the push rods (3) onto the tappets (4), check to
see if their ends are properly engaged with the dimples.
IMPORTANT
• After installing the rocker arm, be sure to adjust the valve
clearance.
9.81 to 11.2 N·m
Tightening torque Rocker arm bracket screw 1.00 to 1.15 kgf·m
7.24 to 8.31 lbf·ft
(1) Rocker Arm Assembly (3) Push Rod

(2) Rocker Arm Bracket Screws (4) Tappet
9Y1210272ENS0034US0
1-S27 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Cylinder Head and Cylinder Head Gasket
1. Loosen the pipe clamps (1), and remove the water return pipe
(2).
2. Remove the cylinder head screw in the order of (n or j) to (a).
3. Remove the cylinder head gasket.
(When reassembling)
• Replace the cylinder head gasket with a new one.
• When mounting the gasket, set it to the pin pipe holes. Take
care not to mount it reversely.
• The cylinder head should be free of scratches and dust.
• Install the cylinder head, using care not to damage the gasket.
• After applying engine oil to the thread of screws, tighten them in
several steps and specified sequence (a) to (n or j).
NOTE
• Do not use O-ring on the pin pipe.
• It is not necessary to retighten the cylinder head screw and
to readjust valve clearance after engine warmed up.
38 to 42 N·m
Tightening torque Cylinder head screw 3.8 to 4.3 kgf·m
28 to 31 lbf·ft
(1) Pipe Clamp A : Gear Case Side

(2) Water Return Pipe (n or j) to (a) : To Loosen
(3) Pin Pipe (a) to (n or j) : To Tighten
[a] Z482
[b] D722 and D782
9Y1210272ENS0035US0
Tappets
1. Remove the tappets (1) from the crankcase.
(When reassembling)
• Visually check the contact between tappets and cams for proper
rotation. If defect is found, replace tappets.
• Before installing the tappets, apply engine oil thinly around
them.
IMPORTANT
• Do not change the combination of tappet and tappet guide.
(1) Tappet
9Y1210272ENS0036US0
1-S28 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Valves
1. Remove the valve caps (4).
2. Remove the valve spring collet (3), pushing the valve spring
retainer (2) by valve spring replacer (1).
3. Remove the valve spring retainer (2), valve spring (5) and valve
stem seal (6).
4. Remove the valve (7).
(When reassembling)
• Wash the valve stem and valve guide hole, and apply engine oil
sufficiently.
• After installing the valve spring collets, lightly tap the stem to
assure proper fit with a plastic hammer.
IMPORTANT
• Do not change the combination of valve and valve guide.
(1) Valve Spring Replacer (5) Valve Spring
(2) Valve Spring Retainer (6) Valve Stem Seal
(3) Valve Spring Collet (7) Valve
(4) Valve Cap
9Y1210272ENS0037US0
Thermostat Assembly
1. Remove the thermostat cover mounting screws (1), and remove
the thermostat cover (2).
2. Remove the thermostat assembly (4).
(When reassembling)
• Replace the gasket (3) with a new one.
(1) Thermostat Cover Mounting Screw (3) Thermostat Cover Gasket
(2) Thermostat Cove (4) Thermostat Assembly
9Y1210272ENS0038US0
Water Pump Assembly

1. Loosen the alternator mounting screws, and remove the fan
belt.
2. Remove the fan and fan pulley.
3. Remove the water pump assembly (1) from the gear case cover
(3).
(When reassembling)
• Replace the gasket (2) with a new one.
(1) Water Pump Assembly (3) Gear Case Cover
(2) Water Pump Gasket
9Y1210272ENS0039US0
1-S29 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Oil Pan and Oil Strainer
1. Remove the oil pan mounting screws (2).
2. Remove the oil pan (1) by lightly tapping the rim of the pan with
a wooden hammer.
3. Remove the oil strainer (3).
(When reassembling)
• After cleaning the oil strainer, check to see that the filter mesh
in clean, and install it.
• Visually check the O-ring (4), apply engine oil, and install it.
• Securely fit the O-ring to the oil strainer.
• To avoid uneven tightening, tighten oil pan mounting screws in
diagonal order form the center.
[For Z482]
• Using the hole (6) numbered "2", install the oil strainer by
mounting screw.
[For D722 and D782]
• Using the hole (5) numbered "3", install the oil strainer by
mounting screw.
IMPORTANT
• Scrape off the old adhesive completely. Wipe the sealing
surface clean using waste cloth soaked with gasoline. Now
apply new adhesive 3.0 to 5.0 mm (0.12 to 0.19 in.) thick all
over the contact surface. Apply the adhesive also on the
center of the flange as well as on the inner wall of each bolt
hole.
• Cut the nozzle of the "liquid gasket" (Three Bond 1207D or
equivalent) container at its second notch. Apply "liquid
gasket" about 3.0 to 5.0 mm (0.12 to 0.19 in.) thick.
Within 20 minutes after the application of fluid sealant,
reassemble the components. Wait then for about 30
minutes, and pour oil in the crankcase. (D722 and D782
only)
(1) Oil Pan [a] Z482
(2) Oil Pan Mounting Screw [b] D722 and D782
(3) Oil Strainer
(4) O-ring
(5) Hole Numbered "3"
(6) Hole Numbered "2"
9Y1210272ENS0040US0
1-S30 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
(2) Gear Case and Timing Gears

Injection Pump, Fuel Feed Pump and Speed Control Plate
1. Remove the socket head screws and nuts, and remove the
injection pump (1).
2. Remove the screws and separate the speed control plate (2),
taking care not to damage the governor spring (4).
3. Disconnect the governor spring (4) and remove the speed
control plate (2).
4. Remove the fuel feed pump (3).
(When reassembling)
• Hook the governor spring (4) to the governor lever (5) first and
install the speed control plate (2).
• Be sure to place the copper washers underneath two screws
(8). (Two screws (8) in the upper of the speed control plate (2).)
• Position the slot (7) on the fork lever just under the slot (6) on
the crankcase.
• Insert the injection pump (1) so that the control rod (10) should
be pushed by the idling adjusting spring (9) at its end and the
pin (11) on the rod engages with the slot (7) on the fork lever (as
shown in the photo).
NOTE
• The sealant is applied to both sides of the soft metal gasket
shim. The liquid gasket is not required for assembling.
• Addition or reduction of shim (0.05 mm, 0.002 in.) delays or
advances the injection timing by approx. 0.009 rad (0.5 °).
• In disassembling and replacing, be sure to use the same
number of new gasket shims with the same thickness.
(1) Injection Pump (7) Slot (Fork Lever Side)
(2) Speed Control Plate (8) Screw and Copper Washer
(3) Fuel Feed Pump (9) Idling Adjusting Spring
(4) Governor Spring (10) Control Rod
(5) Governor Lever (11) Pin
(6) Slot (Crankcase Side)
9Y1210272ENS0041US0
Fan Drive Pulley
1. Secure the flywheel to keep it from turning.
2. Remove the fan drive pulley screw.
3. Draw out the fan drive pulley with a puller.
(When reassembling)
• Install the pulley to crankshaft, aligning the mark (1) on them.
• Apply engine oil to the fan drive pulley retaining screw. And
tighten it.
118 to 127 N·m
Tightening torque Fan drive pulley screw 12.0 to 13.0 kgf·m
86.8 to 94.0 lbf·ft
(1) Alignment Mark

9Y1210272ENS0043US0
1-S31 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Gear Case
1. Disconnect the start spring (2) from the fork lever 1 (3).
2. Remove the screw (1) of inside the gear case and outside
screws.
3. Remove the gear case (4).
(When reassembling)
• Apply a liquid gasket (Three Bond 1215 or equivalent) to both
sides of the gear case gasket.
• Be sure to set three O-rings inside the gear case.
(1) Screw (Inside) (3) Fork Lever 1
(2) Start Spring (4) Gear Case
9Y1210272ENS0044US0
Idle Gear
1. Remove the nut (2) and the idle gear assembly (1).
2. Remove the idle gear shaft mounting screws (3).
3. Remove the idle gear shaft (4) (if necessary).
(When reassembling)
• Apply engine oil to the idle gear shaft mounting screw (3). And
tighten them.
• Install the idle gear, aligning the mark (5) on the gears referring
to the photo.
79 to 88 N·m
Nut 8 to 9 kgf·m
58 to 65 lbf·ft
Tightening torque
9.81 to 11.2 N·m
Idle gear shaft mounting
1.00 to 1.15 kgf·m
screw
7.24 to 8.31 lbf·ft
(1) Idle Gear Assembly (4) Idle Gear Shaft

(2) Nut (5) Alignment Mark
(3) Idle Gear Shaft Mounting Screw
9Y1210272ENS0099US0
1-S32 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Camshaft
1. Remove the camshaft mounting screws (1) and draw out the
camshaft with gear (2) on it.
(When reassembling)
• When install the camshaft, apply engine oil to the camshaft
journals.
• Apply engine oil to the camshaft mounting screws. And tighten
them.
(1) Camshaft Mounting Screw (2) Camshaft Gear
9Y1210272ENS0046US0
Fuel Camshaft
1. Remove the retaining plate (6).
2. Remove the fork lever holder mounting screws (8), then draw
out the injection pump gear (1) and fuel camshaft (7) with the
governor fork assembly.
(When reassembling)
• Hook the governor spring (5) to the fork lever 2 (4) before
installing the fork lever assembly to the crankcase.
(1) Injection Pump Gear (5) Governor Spring
(2) Governor Sleeve (6) Retaining Plate
(3) Fork Lever 1 (7) Fuel Camshaft
(4) Fork Lever 2 (8) Fork Lever Holder Mounting Screw
9Y1210272ENS0047US0
Oil Pump and Crankshaft Gear

1. Remove the oil pump gear (7).
2. Remove the oil pump mounting screw (6) and the oil pump (5).
3. Remove the collar (4), O-ring (3) and crankshaft oil slinger (2).
(For Z482, D722 and D782)
4. Remove the crankshaft gear (1) with a puller
(When reassembling)
• Install the collar (4) after aligning the marks on the gears. (See
the photo at "Idle Gear".)
18 to 21 N·m
Tightening torque Oil pump mounting screw 1.8 to 2.2 kgf·m
13 to 15 lbf·ft
(1) Crankshaft Gear (5) Oil Pump

(2) Crankshaft Oil Slinger (6) Oil Pump Mounting Screw
(3) O-ring (7) Oil Pump Gear
(4) Crankshaft Collar
9Y1210272ENS0048US0
1-S33 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
(3) Piston and Connecting Rod

Connecting Rod Cap
1. Remove the connecting rod caps (1) using a bihexagonal 8 mm
socket.
(When reassembling)
• Align the marks (a) with each other. (Face the marks toward the
injection pump.)
• Apply engine oil to the connecting rod screws and lightly screw
it in by hand, then tighten it to the specified torque.
If the connecting rod screw won't be screwed in smoothly, clean
the threads.
If the connecting rod screw is still hard to screw in, replace it.
27 to 30 N·m
Tightening torque Connecting rod screw 2.7 to 3.1 kgf·m
20 to 22 lbf·ft
(1) Connecting Rod Cap (a) Mark

9Y1210272ENS0049US0
Piston
1. Turn the flywheel and bring the piston to top dead center.
2. Draw out the piston upward by lightly tapping it from the bottom
of the crankcase with the grip of a hammer.
3. Draw out the other pistons after the same method as above.
(When reassembling)
• Before inserting the piston into the cylinder, apply enough
engine oil to the cylinder.
• When inserting the piston into the cylinder, face the mark on the
connecting rod to the injection pump.
NOTE
• Do not change the combination of cylinder and piston.
Make sure of the position of each piston by marking. For
example, mark "1" on the No. 1 piston.
• When installing the piston into the cylinder, place the gaps
of all of the piston rings as shown in the figure.
• Carefully insert the piston using a piston ring compressor
(1). Otherwise, their chrome-plated section may be
scratched, causing trouble inside the cylinder.
Models Mark
Z482, D722 3
D782 B
(1) Piston Ring Compressor (a) 0.79 rad (45 °)

(b) 0.79 rad (45 °)
(A) Top Ring Gap (c) 1.6 rad (90 °)
(B) Second Ring Gap (d) Mark
(C) Oil Ring Gap
(D) Piston Pin Hole
9Y1210272ENS0050US0
1-S34 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Piston Ring and Connecting Rod
1. Remove the piston rings using a piston ring tool.
2. Remove the piston pin (7), and separate the connecting rod (6)
from the piston (5).
(When reassembling)
• When installing the ring, assemble the rings so that the
manufacturer's mark (12) near the gap faces the top of the
piston.
• When installing the oil ring onto the piston, place the expander
joint (10) on the opposite side of the oil ring gap (11).
• Apply engine oil to the piston pin.
• When installing the connecting rod to the piston, immerse the
piston in 80 °C (176 °F) oil for 10 to 15 minutes and insert the
piston pin to the piston.
• When installing the connecting rod to the piston, align the mark
(9) on the connecting rod to the fan-shaped concave (8).
IMPORTANT
• Mark the same number on the connecting rod and the
piston so as not to change the combination.
(1) Top Ring (7) Piston Pin
(2) Second Ring (8) Fan-Shaped Concave
(3) Oil Ring (9) Mark
(4) Piston Pin Snap Ring (10) Expander Joint
(5) Piston (11) Oil Ring Gap
(6) Connecting Rod (12) Manufacture's Mark
9Y1210272ENS0051US0
1-S35 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
(4) Flywheel and Crankshaft

Flywheel
1. Secure the flywheel to keep it from turning using a flywheel
stopper.
2. Remove all flywheel screws (1) and then remove the flywheel
(2).
(When reassembling)
• Set the No. 1 crankpin at the top dead center (T.D.C.).
• Align the "1TC" mark (a) on the outer surface of the flywheel
horizontally with the alignment mark (b) on the rear end plate.
• Apply engine oil to the threads and the undercut surface of the
flywheel screw and fit the screw.
54 to 58 N·m
Tightening torque Flywheel screw 5.5 to 6.0 kgf·m
40 to 43 lbf·ft
(1) Flywheel Screw (a) 1TC Mark

(2) Flywheel (b) Alignment Mark
9Y1210272ENS0052US0
Bearing Case Cover

1. Remove the bearing case cover mounting screws. First, remove
inside screws (1) and then outside screws (2).
2. Remove the bearing case cover (5).
(When reassembling)
• Fit the bearing case gasket (3) and the bearing case cover
gasket (4) with correct directions.
• Install the bearing case cover (5) to position the casting mark
"UP" (a) on it upward.
• Apply engine oil to the oil seal (6) lip and take care that it is not
rolled when installing.
• Tighten the bearing case cover mounting screws with even
force on the diagonal line.
9.81 to 11.2 N·m
Bearing case cover
mounting screw
7.24 to 8.31 lbf·ft
(1) Bearing Case Cover Mounting (a) Top Mark "UP"

Screw (Inside) (b) Upside
(2) Bearing Case Cover Mounting
Screw (Outside)
(3) Bearing Case Gasket
(4) Bearing Case Cover Gasket
(5) Bearing Case Cover
(6) Oil Seal
9Y1210272ENS0053US0
1-S36 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Crankshaft Assembly
[For Z482 and D722]
1. Remove the main bearing case screw 2 (1).
2. Draw out all the crankshaft.
[For D782]
1. Remove the main bearing case screw 2 (1).
2. Turn the crankshaft to set the crankpin of the third cylinder to the
bottom dead center. Then draw out the crankshaft until the
crankpin of the second cylinder comes to the center of the third
cylinder.
3. Turn the crankshaft by 2.09 rad (120 °) counterclockwise to set
the crankpin of the second cylinder to the bottom dead center.
Draw out the crankshaft until the crankpin of the first cylinder
comes to the center of the third cylinder.
4. Repeat the above steps to draw out all the crankshaft.
(When reassembling)
• Clean the oil passage of the crankshaft with compressed air.
• Install the crankshaft assembly, aligning the screw hole of main
bearing case screw 2 with the screw hole of crankcase.
• When tightening the main bearing case 2, apply oil to the main
bearing case screw 2 (1) and screw by hand before tightening
the specific torque. If not smooth to screw by hand, align the
screw holes between the crankcase and the main bearing case.
27 to 30 N·m
Tightening torque Main bearing case screw 2 2.7 to 3.1 kgf·m
20 to 22 lbf·ft
(1) Main Bearing Case Screw 2 A : Cut place for removing and
installing the crankshaft (D782)
[A] Z482
[B] D722 and D782
9Y1210272ENS0054US0
1-S37 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Main Bearing Case Assembly (Z482, D722 and D782)
1. Remove the two main bearing case screws 1 (4), and remove
the main bearing case assembly 1 (1), being careful with
crankshaft bearing 3 (5).
2. Remove the main bearing case assembly 2 (2) and the main
bearing case assembly (3) as above. Keep in mind, however,
that the thrust bearing (7) is installed in the main bearing case
assembly (3).
(When reassembling)
• Clean the oil passage in the main bearing cases.
• Apply clean engine oil to the bearings.
• Install the main bearing case assemblies in original positions.
Since diameters of main bearing cases vary, install them in
order of marking (b) (1 for Z482 and 1, 2 for D722, D782) from
the gear case side. (Refer to the figure.)
• Match the alignment numbers (a) on the main bearing case
assembly 1 (1).
• Do the same for the main bearing case assembly 2 (2) and the
main bearing case assembly (3) too.
• When installing the main bearing case 1 and 2, face the mark
"FLYWHEEL" to the flywheel.
• Install the thrust bearing (7) with its oil groove facing outward.
• Confirm that the main bearing case moves smoothly after
tightening the main bearing case screw 1 to the specified
torque.
13 to 15 N·m
Tightening torque Main bearing case screw 1 1.3 to 1.6 kgf·m
9.4 to 11 lbf·ft
(1) Main Bearing Case Assembly 1 (a) Alignment Number

(2) Main Bearing Case Assembly 2 (b) Marking (1 or 2)
(3) Main Bearing Case Assembly
(4) Main Bearing Case Screw 1
(5) Crankshaft Bearing 3
(7) Thrust Bearing
9Y1210272ENS0055US0
1-S38 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
[4] SERVICING
(1) Cylinder Head and Valves
Top Clearance
1. Remove the cylinder head. (Do not attempt to remove the
cylinder head gasket.)
2. Move the piston up and stick a strip of fuse [1.5 mm dia. (0.059
in. dia.), 5.0 to 7.0 mm long (0.20 to 0.28 in. long)] on the piston
head at three positions with grease so as to avoid the intake and
exhaust valves and the combustion chamber ports.
3. Lower the piston, and install the cylinder head and tighten the
cylinder head screws to the specified torque.
4. Turn the flywheel until the piston exceeds top dead center.
5. Remove the cylinder head, and measure the thickness of the
squeezed fuses.
check the oil clearance between the crankpin and crankpin
bearing and between the piston pin and small end bushing.
NOTE
• After checking the top clearance, be sure to assemble the
cylinder head with a new cylinder head gasket.
0.50 to 0.70 mm
Top clearance Factory specification
0.020 to 0.027 in.
38 to 42 N·m
Tightening torque Cylinder head screw 3.8 to 4.3 kgf·m
28 to 31 lbf·ft
(1) Fuse
9Y1210272ENS0056US0
Cylinder Head Surface Flatness
1. Clean the cylinder head surface.
2. Place a straightedge on the cylinder head's four sides and two
diagonal as shown in the figure.
3. Measure the clearance with a thickness gauge.
4. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, correct it with a
surface grinder.
IMPORTANT
• Do not place the straightedge on the combustion chamber.
• Be sure to check the valve recessing after correcting.
Cylinder head surface 0.05 mm
flatness 0.002 in.
9Y1210272ENS0057US0
1-S39 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Cylinder Head Flaw
1. Prepare an air spray red check.
2. Clean the surface of the cylinder head with detergent (2).
3. Spray the cylinder head surface with the red permeative liquid
(1). Leave it five to ten minutes after spraying.
4. Wash away the read permeative liquid on the cylinder head
surface with the detergent (2).
5. Spray the cylinder head surface with white developer (3).
6. If flawed, it can be identified as red marks.
(1) Red Permeative Liquid (3) White Developer
(2) Detergent
9Y1210272ENS0058US0
Valve Recessing
1. Clean the cylinder head surface, valve face and valve seat.
2. Insert the valve into the valve guide.
3. Measure the valve recessing with a depth gauge.
4. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace the
valve.
5. If it still exceeds the allowable limit after replacing the valve,
replace the cylinder head.
−0.10 (protrusion) to 0.10
(recessing) mm
Valve recessing −0.0039 (protrusion) to
(Intake and exhaust) 0.0039 (recessing) in.
0.30 (recessing) mm
Allowable limit
0.012 (recessing) in.
(1) Cylinder Head Surface (A) Recessin

(B) Protrusion
9Y1210272ENS0059US0
Clearance between Valve Stem and Valve Guide

1. Remove carbon from the valve guide section.
2. Measure the valve stem O.D. with an outside micrometer.
3. Measure the valve guide I.D. with a small hole gauge, and
calculate the clearance.
4. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the valves.
If it still exceeds the allowable limit, replace the valve guide.
0.030 to 0.057 mm
Clearance between Factory specification
0.0012 to 0.0022 in.
valve stem and valve
guide 0.10 mm
Allowable limit
0.0039 in.
5.968 to 5.980 mm
Valve stem O.D. Factory specification
0.2350 to 0.2354 in.
6.010 to 6.025 mm
Valve guide I.D. Factory specification
0.2367 to 0.2372 in.
9Y1210272ENS0060US0
1-S40 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Replacing Valve Guide
(When removing)
1. Press out the used valve guide using a valve guide replacing
tool. (Refer to "SPECIAL TOOLS".)
(When installing)
1. Clean a new valve guide and valve guide bore, and apply
engine oil to them.
2. Press in a new valve guide using a valve guide replacing tool.
3. Ream precisely the I.D. of the valve guide to the specified
dimension.
Valve guide I.D. 6.010 to 6.025 mm
(intake and exhaust) 0.2367 to 0.2372 in.
IMPORTANT
• Do not hit the valve guide with a hammer during
replacement.
(A) When Removing (B) When Installing
9Y1210272ENS0061US0
Valve Seating
1. Coat the valve face lightly with prussian blue and put the valve
on its seat to check the contact.
2. If the valve does not seat all the way around the valve seat or
the valve contact is less than 70 %, correct the valve seating as
follows.
3. If the valve contact does not comply with the reference value,
replace the valve or correct the contact of valve seating.
2.12 mm
Valve seat width Factory specification
0.0835 in.
(1) Correct (3) Incorrect

(2) Incorrect
9Y1210272ENS0062US0
1-S41 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Correcting Valve and Valve Seat
NOTE
• Before correcting the valve and seat, check the valve stem
and the I.D. of valve guide section, and repair them if
necessary.
• After correcting the valve seat, be sure to check the valve
recessing.
(1) Correcting Valve
1. Correct the valve with a valve refacer.
0.79 rad
Valve face angle Factory specification
45 °
(2) Correcting Valve Seat

1. Slightly correct the seat surface with a 0.79 rad (45 °) valve seat
cutter.
2. Fitting the valve, check the contact position of the valve face
and seat surface with prussian blue. (Visual check) [If the valve
has been used for a long period, the seat tends to come in
contact with the upper side of the valve face.]
3. Grind the upper surface of the seat with a 0.26 rad (15 °) valve
seat cutter until the valve seat touches to the center of the valve
face (so that (1) equals (2) as shown in the figure.)
4. Grind the seat with a 0.79 rad (45 °) valve seat cutter again, and
visually recheck the contact between the valve and seat
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the correct contact is achieved.
6. Continue lapping until the seated rate becomes more than 70 %
of the total contact area.
0.79 rad
Valve seat angle Factory specification
45 °
(1) Valve Seat Width (A) Check Contact

(2) Identical Dimensions (B) Correct Seat Width
(C) Check Seat Surface
(D) Check Contact
(a) 0.26 rad (15 °)
(b) 0.79 rad (45 °)
9Y1210272ENS0063US0
Valve Lapping
1. Apply compound evenly to the valve lapping surface.
2. Insert the valve into the valve guide. Lap the valve onto its seat
with a valve flapper or screwdriver.
3. After lapping the valve, wash the compound away and apply oil,
then repeat valve lapping with oil.
4. Apply prussian blue to the contact surface to check the seated
rate. If it is less than 70 %, repeat valve lapping again.
IMPORTANT
• When valve lapping is performed, be sure to check the
valve recessing and adjust the valve clearance after
assembling the valve.
9Y1210272ENS0064US0
1-S42 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Free Length and Tilt of Valve Spring
1. Measure the free length (B) of valve spring with vernier calipers.
If the measurement is less than the allowable limit, replace it.
2. Put the valve spring on a surface plate, place a square on the
side of the valve spring.
3. Check to see if the entire side is in contact with the square.
Rotate the valve spring and measure the maximum tilt (A).
If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace it.
4. Check the entire surface of the valve spring for scratches.
If there is any defect, replace it.
1.2 mm
Tilt (A) Allowable limit
0.047 in.
31.3 to 31.8 mm
1.24 to 1.25 in.
Free length (B)
28.4 mm
Allowable limit
1.12 in.
(A) Tilt (B) Free Length

9Y1210272ENS0065US0
Valve Spring Setting Load
1. Place the valve spring on a tester and compress it to the same
length it is actually compressed the engine.
2. Read the compression load on the gauge.
3. If the measurement is less than the allowable limit, replace it.
65 N / 27.0 mm
Factory specification 6.6 kgf / 27.0 mm
Setting load / 15 lbf / 1.06 in.
Setting length 55 N / 27.0 mm
Allowable limit 5.6 kgf / 27.0 mm
12 lbf / 1.06 in.
9Y1210272ENS0066US0
Oil Clearance between Rocker Arm and Rocker Arm Shaft
1. Measure the rocker arm shaft O.D. with an outside micrometer.
2. Measure the rocker arm I.D. with an inside micrometer, and
then calculate the oil clearance.
3. If the oil clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the
rocker arm and measure the oil clearance again. If it still
exceeds the allowable limit, replace also the rocker arm shaft.
0.016 to 0.045 mm
Oil clearance between Factory specification
0.00063 to 0.0017 in.
rocker arm and rocker
arm shaft 0.15 mm
Allowable limit
0.0059 in.
10.473 to 10.484 mm
Rocker arm shaft O.D. Factory specification
0.41233 to 0.41275 in.
10.500 to 10.518 mm
Rocker arm I.D. Factory specification
0.41339 to 0.41409 in.
9Y1210272ENS0067US0
1-S43 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Push Rod Alignment
1. Place the push rod on V blocks.
2. Measure the push rod alignment.
push rod.
0.25 mm
Push rod alignment Allowable limit
0.0098 in.
9Y1210272ENS0068US0
Oil Clearance between Tappet and Tappet Guide Bore

1. Measure the tappet O.D. with an outside micrometer.
2. Measure the I.D. of the tappet guide bore with a cylinder gauge,
and calculate the oil clearance.
3. If the oil clearance exceeds the allowable limit or the tappet is
damaged, replace the tappet.
0.016 to 0.052 mm
0.00063 to 0.0020 in.
tappet and tappet guide
bore 0.10 mm
Allowable limit
0.0039 in.
17.966 to 17.984 mm
Tappet O.D. Factory specification
0.70733 to 0.70803 in.
18.000 to 18.018 mm
Tappet guide bore I.D. Factory specification
0.70867 to 0.70937 in.
9Y1210272ENS0069US0
1-S44 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
(2) Timing Gears

Timing Gear Backlash
1. Set a dial indicator (lever type) with its tip on the gear tooth.
2. Move the gear to measure the backlash, holding its mating gear.
3. If the backlash exceeds the allowable limit, check the oil
clearance of the shaft and the gear.
4. If the oil clearance is proper, replace the gear.
0.0430 to 0.124 mm
Backlash between idle 0.00170 to 0.00488 in.
gear and crank gear 0.15 mm
Allowable limit
0.0059 in.
0.0470 to 0.123 mm
Backlash between idle 0.00185 to 0.00484 in.
gear and cam gear 0.15 mm
Allowable limit
0.0059 in.
0.0460 to 0.124 mm
Backlash between idle Factory specification
0.00182 to 0.00488 in.
gear and injection pump
gear 0.15 mm
Allowable limit
0.0059 in.
0.0410 to 0.123 mm
Injection pump gear to 0.00162 to 0.00484 in.
governor gear 0.15 mm
Allowable limit
0.0059 in.
9Y1210272ENS0070US0
Idle Gear Side Clearance
1. Set a dial indicator with its tip on the idle gear.
2. Measure the side clearance by moving the idle gear to the front
and rear.
3. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace the idle
gear collar.
0.20 to 0.51 mm
0.0079 to 0.020 in.
Idle gear side clearance
0.80 mm
Allowable limit
0.031 in.
9Y1210272ENS0071US0
Camshaft Side Clearance
1. Set a dial indicator with its tip on the camshaft.
2. Measure the side clearance by moving the cam gear to the font
and rear.
camshaft stopper.
0.15 to 0.31 mm
0.0059 to 0.012 in.
Camshaft side clearance
0.50 mm
Allowable limit
0.020 in.
9Y1210272ENS0072US0
1-S45 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Camshaft Alignment
1. Support the camshaft with V blocks on the surface plate at both
end journals.
2. Set a dial indicator with its tip on the intermediate journal.
3. Measure the camshaft alignment.
camshaft.
0.01 mm
Camshaft alignment Allowable limit
0.0004 in.
9Y1210272ENS0073US0
Cam Height
1. Measure the height of the cam at its highest point with an
outside micrometer.
2. If the measurement is less than the allowable limit, replace the
camshaft.
26.88 mm
Cam height of intake and 1.058 in.
exhaust 26.83 mm
Allowable limit
1.056 in.
9Y1210272ENS0074US0
Oil Clearance of Camshaft Journal
1. Measure the camshaft journal O.D. with an outside micrometer.
2. Measure the cylinder block bore I.D. for camshaft with a inside
micrometer, and calculate the oil clearance.
camshaft.
0.050 to 0.091 mm
Oil clearance of 0.0020 to 0.0035 in.
camshaft journal 0.15 mm
Allowable limit
0.0059 in.
32.934 to 32.950 mm
Camshaft journal O.D. Factory specification
1.2967 to 1.2972 in.
Camshaft bearing I.D. 33.000 to 33.025 mm
(Cylinder block bore I.D.) 1.2993 to 1.3001 in.
9Y1210272ENS0075US0
1-S46 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Oil Clearance between Idle Gear Shaft and Idle Gear Bushing
1. Measure the idle gear shaft O.D. with an outside micrometer.
2. Measure the idle gear bushing I.D. with an inside micrometer,
bushing.
4. If it still exceeds the allowable limit, replace the idle gear shaft.
0.020 to 0.084 mm
0.00079 to 0.0033 in.
idle gear shaft and idle
gear bushing 0.10 mm
Allowable limit
0.0039 in.
19.967 to 19.980 mm
Idle gear shaft O.D. Factory specification
0.78611 to 0.78661 in.
20.000 to 20.051 mm
Idle gear bushing I.D. Factory specification
0.78741 to 0.78940 in.
9Y1210272ENS0076US0
Replacing Idle Gear Bushing

(A) When removing
1. Press out the used idle gear bushing using an idle gear bushing
replacing tool. (Refer to "SPECIAL TOOLS".)
(B) When installing
1. Clean a new idle gear bushing and idle gear bore, and apply
engine oil to them.
2. Press in a new brushing using an idle gear bushing replacing
tool, until it is flush with the end of the idle gear.
(A) When Removing (B) When Installing
9Y1210272ENS0077US0
1-S47 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
(3) Piston and Connecting Rod

Piston Pin Bore Internal Diameter
1. Measure the piston pin bore I.D. in both the horizontal and
vertical directions with a cylinder gauge.
piston.
20.000 to 20.013 mm
0.78741 to 0.78791 in.
Piston pin bore I.D.
20.05 mm
Allowable limit
0.7894 in.
9Y1210272ENS0078US0
Oil Clearance between Piton Pin and Small End Bushing
1. Measure the piston pin O.D. where it contacts the bushing with
an outside micrometer.
2. Measure the small end bushing I.D. with an inside micrometer,
bushing. If it still exceeds the allowable limit, replace the piston
pin.
0.014 to 0.038 mm
0.00056 to 0.0014 in.
piston pin and small end
bushing 0.10 mm
Allowable limit
0.0039 in.
20.002 to 20.011 mm
Piston pin O.D. Factory specification
0.78748 to 0.78783 in.
20.025 to 20.040 mm
Small end bushing I.D. Factory specification
0.78839 to 0.78897 in.
9Y1210272ENS0079US0
Replace Small End Bushing
(A) When removing
1. Press out the used bushing using a small end bushing replacing
tool. (Refer to "SPECIAL TOOLS".)
(B) When installing
1. Clean a new small end bushing and small end hole, and apply
engine oil to them.
2. Using a small end bushing replacing tool, press in a new
bushing (service parts) taking due care to see that the position
of the connecting rod oil hole matches the bushing hole.
[Servicing parts dimension]
0.015 to 0.075 mm
0.00059 to 0.0029 in.
piston pin and small end
bushing (Spare parts) 0.15 mm
Allowable limit
0.0059 in.
Small end bushing I.D. 20.026 to 20.077 mm

(Spare parts) 0.78843 to 0.79043 in.
(1) Seam (A) When Removing

(2) Oil Hole (B) When Installing
(a) 0.79 rad (45 °)
9Y1210272ENS0080US0
1-S48 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Connecting Rod Alignment
NOTE
• Since the I.D. of the connecting rod small end bushing is
the basis of this check, check bushing for wear
beforehand.
1. Install the piston pin into the connecting rod.
2. Install the connecting rod on the connecting rod alignment tool.
3. Put a gauge over the piston pin, and move it against the face
plate.
4. If the gauge does not fit squarely against the face plate,
measure the space between the pin of the gauge and the face
plate.
connecting rod.
Connecting rod 0.05 mm
Allowable limit
alignment 0.002 in.
9Y1210272ENS0081US0
Piston Ring Gap
1. Insert the piston ring into the lower part of the cylinder (the least
worn out part) with a piston ring compressor and piston.
2. Measure the ring gap with a feeler gauge.
piston ring.
Factory
0.15 to 0.30 mm
specifica-
0.0059 to 0.011 in.
Top ring tion
Allowable 1.20 mm
limit 0.0472 in.
Factory
0.30 to 0.45 mm
specifica-
Second 0.012 to 0.017 in.
Piston ring gap tion
ring
Allowable 1.20 mm
limit 0.0472 in.
Factory
0.15 to 0.30 mm
specifica-
0.0059 to 0.011 in.
Oil ring tion
Allowable 1.20 mm
limit 0.0472 in.
9Y1210272ENS0082US0
1-S49 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Clearance between Piston Ring and Piston Ring Groove
1. Clean the rings and the ring grooves, and install each ring in its
groove.
2. Measure the clearance between the ring and the groove with a
feeler gauge.
3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the piston
ring.
4. If the clearance still exceeds the allowable limit after replacing
the ring, replace the piston.
Factory
0.0900 to 0.120 mm
specifica-
Second 0.00355 to 0.00472 in.
tion
ring
Allowable 0.15 mm
limit 0.0059 in.
Piston ring gap
Factory
0.040 to 0.080 mm
specifica-
0.0016 to 0.0031 in.
Oil ring tion
Allowable 0.15 mm
limit 0.0059 in.
9Y1210272ENS0083US0
(4) Crankshaft
Crankshaft Side Clearance
1. Set a dial indicator with its tip on the end of the crankshaft.
2. Measure the side clearance by moving the crankshaft to the
front and rear.
thrust bearings.
4. If the same size bearing is useless because of the crankshaft
journal wear, replace it with an oversize one referring to the
table and figure.
0.15 to 0.31 mm
Crankshaft side 0.0059 to 0.012 in.
clearance 0.50 mm
Allowable limit
0.020 in.
(Reference)
• Oversize thrust bearing
Oversize Bearing Code Number Marking
0.20 mm Thrust bearing 1 02 15261-23950 020 OS

0.0079 in. Thrust bearing 2 02 15261-23970 020 OS
0.40 mm Thrust bearing 1 04 15261-23960 040 OS

0.016 in. Thrust bearing 2 04 15261-23980 040 OS
0.20 mm 0.40 mm
Oversize
0.0079 in. 0.0016 in.
54.50 to 54.70 mm 54.60 to 54.80 mm
Dimension A
2.146 to 2.153 in. 2.150 to 2.157 in.
26.20 to 26.25 mm 26.40 to 26.45 mm
Dimension B
1.032 to 1.033 in. 1.040 to 1.041 in.
2.80 to 3.20 mm radius 2.80 to 3.20 mm radius
Dimension C
0.111 to 0.125 in. radius 0.111 to 0.125 in. radius
The crankshaft journal must be fine-finished to higher than Rmax=0.8S
9Y1210272ENS0084US0
1-S50 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Crankshaft Alignment
1. Support the crankshaft with V blocks on the surface plate at
both end journals.
2. Set a dial indicator with its tip on the intermediate journal.
3. Measure the crankshaft alignment.
crankshaft.
0.02 mm
Crankshaft alignment Allowable limit
0.0008 in.
9Y1210272ENS0085US0
Oil Clearance between Crankpin and Crankpin Bearing
1. Clean the crankpin and crankpin bearing.
2. Put a strip of plastigage on the center of the crankpin.
3. Install the connecting rod cap and tighten the connecting rod
screws to the specified torque, and remove the cap again.
4. Measure the amount of the flattening with the scale, and get the
oil clearance.
crankpin bearing.
6. If the same size bearing is useless because of the crankpin
wear, replace it with an undersize one referring to the table and
figure.
NOTE
• Never insert the plastigage into the crankpin oil hole.
• Be sure not to move the crankshaft while the connecting
rod screws are tightened.
0.020 to 0.051 mm
0.00079 to 0.0020 in.
crankpin and crankpin
bearing 0.15 mm
Allowable limit
0.0059 in.
33.959 to 33.975 mm
Crankpin O.D. Factory specification
1.3370 to 1.3375 in.
33.995 to 34.010 mm
Crankpin bearing I.D. Factory specification
1.3384 to 1.3389 in.
(Reference)
• Undersize crankpin bearing
Oversize Bearing Code Number Marking
0.20 mm
Crankpin bearing 02 15861-22970 020 US
0.0079 in.
0.40 mm
Crankpin bearing 04 15861-22980 040 US
0.016 in.
0.20 mm 0.40 mm
Oversize
0.0079 in. 0.0016 in.
Dimension A
0.091 to 0.10 in.radius 0.091 to 0.10 in.radius
1.0 to 1.5 mm relief 1.0 to 1.5 mm relief
*Dimension B
0.040 to 0.059 in. relief 0.040 to 0.059 in. relief
33.759 to 33.775 mm dia. 33.559 to 33.575 mm dia.
Dimension C
1.3291 to 1.3297 in. dia. 1.3213 to 1.3218 in. dia.
The crankpin journal must be fine-finished to higher than Rmax=0.8S
*Holes to be de-burred and edges rounded with 1.0 to 1.5 mm (0.040 to 0.059
in.) relief.
9Y1210272ENS0086US0
1-S51 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Oil Clearance between Crankshaft Journal and Crankshaft
Bearing 1
1. Measure the O.D. of the crankshaft front journal with an outside
micrometer.
2. Measure the I.D. of the crankshaft bearing 1 with an inside
micrometer, and calculate the oil clearance.
crankshaft bearing 1.
journal wear, replace it with an undersize one referring to the
table and the figure.
0.0340 to 0.106 mm
Oil Clearance between Factory specification
0.00134 to 0.00417 in.
crankshaft journal and
crankshaft bearing 1 0.20 mm
Allowable limit
0.0079 in.
39.934 to 39.950 mm
Crankshaft journal O.D. Factory specification
1.5722 to 1.5728 in.
39.984 to 40.040 mm
Crankshaft bearing 1 I.D. Factory specification
1.5742 to 1.5763 in.
(Reference)
• Undersize crankshaft bearing 1
Undersize Bearing Code Number Marking
0.20 mm
Crankshaft bearing 1 02 15861-23910 020 US
0.0079 in.
0.40 mm
Crankshaft bearing 1 04 15861-23920 040 US
0.016 in.
• Undersize dimensions of crankshaft journal
0.20 mm 0.40 mm
Undersize Models
0.0079 in. 0.0016 in.
All 1.8 to 2.2 mm radius 1.8 to 2.2 mm radius
Dimension A
models 0.071 to 0.086 in. radius 0.071 to 0.086 in. radius
*Dimension All 1.0 to 1.5 mm relief 1.0 to 1.5 mm relief
B models 0.040 to 0.059 in. relief 0.040 to 0.059 in. relief
39.734 to 39.750 mm 39.534 to 39.550 mm
Dimension C dia. dia.
1.5644 to 1.5649 in. dia. 1.5565 to 1.5570 in. dia.
*Holes to be de-burred and edges rounded with 1.0 to 1.5 mm (0.040 to
0.059 in.) relief.
9Y1210272ENS0087US0
Crankshaft Bearing 1
(When removing)
1. Press out the used crankshaft bearing 1 using a crankshaft
bearing 1 replacing tool. (Refer to "SPECIAL TOOLS".)
(When installing)
1. Clean a new crankshaft bearing 1 and crankshaft journal bore,
and apply engine oil to them.
2. Using a crankshaft bearing 1 replacing tool, press in a new
bearing 1 (2) so that its seam (1) directs toward the exhaust
manifold side. (See figure.)
0 to 0.3 mm
Dimension (A) Factory specification
0 to 0.01 in.
(1) Seam (3) Cylinder Block

9Y1210272ENS0088US0
1-S52 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Oil Clearance between Crankshaft Journal and Crankshaft
Bearing 2 and Crankshaft Bearing 3
1. Put a strip of plastigage on the center of the journal.
2. Install the bearing case and tighten the bearing case screws 1
to the specified torque, and remove the bearing case again.
3. Measure the amount of the flattening with the scale, and get the
oil clearance.
crankshaft bearing 2 (crankshaft bearing 3).
journal wear, replace it with an undersize one referring to the
table and figure.
NOTE
• Be sure not to move the crankshaft while the bearing case
screws are tightened.
Oil clearance between 0.028 to 0.059 mm
crankshaft journal and 0.0011 to 0.0023 in.
crankshaft bearing 2 0.20 mm
(crankshaft bearing 3) Allowable limit
0.0079 in.
Crankshaft journal O.D. 43.934 to 43.950 mm

(Flywheel side) 1.7297 to 1.7303 in.
43.978 to 43.993 mm
1.7315 to 1.7320 in.
Crankshaft journal O.D. 39.934 to 39.950 mm

(Intermediate) 1.5722 to 1.5728 in.
39.978 to 39.993 mm
1.5740 to 1.5745 in.
(Reference)
• Undersize crankshaft bearing 2 and 3
Undersize Bearing Code Number Marking
0.20 mm Crankshaft bearing 2 02 15694-23930 020 US

0.0079 in. Crankshaft bearing 3 02 15861-23860 020 US
0.40 mm Crankshaft bearing 2 04 15694-23940 040 US

0.016 in. Crankshaft bearing 3 04 15861-23870 040 US
• Undersize dimensions of crankshaft journal
0.20 mm 0.40 mm
Undersize
0.0079 in. 0.0016 in.
Dimension A
0.071 to 0.086 in. radius 0.071 to 0.086 in. radius
1.0 to 1.5 mm relief 1.0 to 1.5 mm relief
*Dimension B
0.040 to 0.059 in. relief 0.040 to 0.059 in. relief
39.734 to 39.750 mm dia. 39.534 to 39.550 mm dia.
Dimension C
1.5644 to 1.5649 in. dia. 1.5565 to 1.5570 in. dia.
43.734 to 43.750 mm dia. 43.534 to 43.550 mm dia.
Dimension D
1.7219 to 1.7224 in. dia. 1.7140 to 1.7145 in. dia.
*Holes to be de-burred and edges rounded with 1.0 to 1.5 mm (0.040 to
0.059 in.) relief.
9Y1210272ENS0089US0
1-S53 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
Replacing Crankshaft Sleeve
1. Remove the used crankshaft sleeve (2).
2. Set the sleeve guide (3) to the crankshaft (1).
3. Heat a new sleeve to a temperature between 150 and 200 °C
(302 and 392 °F), and fix the sleeve to the crankshaft as shown
in figure.
4. Press fit the sleeve using the auxiliary socket for pushing (4).
(Refer to "SPECIAL TOOLS".)
NOTE
• Mount the sleeve with its largely chamfered surface facing
outward.
• Should heating is not enough, a sleeve might stop halfway,
so careful.
(1) Crankshaft (3) Sleeve Guide
(2) Crankshaft Sleeve (4) Auxiliary Socket for Pushing
9Y1210272ENS0091US0
1-S54 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
(5) Cylinder
Cylinder Wear
1. Measure the cylinder liner I.D. at the six positions (see figure)
with a cylinder gauge to find the maximum and minimum I.D.'s.
2. Get the difference (Maximum wear) between the maximum and
the minimum I.D.'s.
3. If the wear exceeds the allowable limit, bore and hone to the
oversize dimension. (Refer to "Correcting Cylinder".)
4. Visually check the cylinder wall for scratches. If deep scratches
are found, the cylinder should be bored. (Refer to "Correcting
Cylinder".)
67.000 to 67.019 mm
2.6378 to 2.6385 in.
Cylinder liner I.D.
67.150 mm
Allowable limit
2.6437 in.
(A) Top (a) Right-angled to Piston Pin

(B) Middle (b) Piston Pin Direction
(C) Bottom (Skirt)
9Y1210272ENS0092US0
Correct Cylinder (Oversize)

1. When the cylinder is worn beyond the allowable limit, bore and
hone it to the specified dimension.
67.250 to 67.269 mm
2.6477 to 2.6483 in.
Cylinder liner I.D.
67.400 mm
Allowable limit
2.6535 in.
Finishing Hone to 2.2 to 3.0 μmRz (87 to 110 μin.Rz)
2. Replace the piston and piston rings with oversize ones.
Oversize : 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.)
Marking : 025
NOTE
• When the oversize cylinder is worn beyond the allowable
limit, replace the cylinder block with a new one.
(1) Cylinder I.D. (Before Correction) (2) Cylinder I.D. [Oversize]
9Y1210272ENS0093US0
1-S55 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ENGINE
(6) Oil Pump

Rotor Lobe Clearance
1. Measure the clearance between lobes of the inner rotor and the
outer rotor with a thickness gauge.
2. If the clearance exceeds the factory specifications, replace the
oil pump rotor assembly.
0.030 to 0.14 mm
Rotor lobe clearance Factory specification
0.0012 to 0.0055 in.
9Y1210272ENS0094US0
Clearance between Outer Rotor and Pump Body

1. Measure the clearance between the outer rotor and the pump
body with a thickness gauge.
2. If the clearance exceeds the factory specifications, replace the
oil pump rotor assembly.
Clearance between outer 0.070 to 0.15 mm
rotor and pump body 0.0028 to 0.0059 in.
9Y1210272ENS0096US0
Clearance between Rotor and Cover

1. Put a strip of plastigage onto the rotor face with grease.
2. Install the cover and tighten the screws.
3. Remove the cover carefully, and measure the amount of the
flattening with the scale and get the clearance.
4. If the clearance exceeds the factory specifications, replace oil
pump rotor assembly.
Clearance between rotor 0.0750 to 0.135 mm
and cover 0.00296 to 0.00531 in.
9Y1210272ENS0095US0
1-S56 (EU)
2 CLUTCH

MECHANISM
CONTENTS
1. LINKAGE MECHANISM ............................................................................................................. 2-M1

B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM CLUTCH
1. LINKAGE MECHANISM
(1) Engine Flywheel (4) Pressure Plate (7) Clutch Release Fork (10) Clutch Release Bearing
(2) Clutch Disc (5) Diaphragm Spring (8) Clutch Pedal (11) Clutch Shaft
(3) Clutch Cover (6) Clutch Rod (9) Clutch Release Hub (12) Pressure Plate Assembly
Engine torque is transmitted to the pressure plate assembly (12) via the flywheel (1) which is connected to the
engine crankshaft. Therefore, the clutch cover constantly runs with engine. The clutch disc (2) is located between the
flywheel (1) and the pressure plate (4) of pressure plate assembly. Torque is transmitted to the clutch disc (2) by the
pressure created by diaphragm spring (5) installed in pressure plate assembly. Then, the torque is transmitted to the
transmission via the clutch shaft (11).
When the clutch pedal (8) is depressed, the clutch release hub (9) and the clutch release bearing (10) move
towards the flywheel and push the fingers of the diaphragm spring (5). In other words, this movement pulls the
pressure plate (4) up and disengages the clutch.
9Y1210272CLM0001US0
2-M1 (EU)
SERVICING
CONTENTS
4. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING .....................................................................2-S4
[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING..............................................................................................2-S4
[2] PREPARATION .....................................................................................................................2-S4
(1) Separating Engine from Clutch Housing .........................................................................2-S4
(2) Separating Clutch Assembly .........................................................................................2-S10
[3] SERVICING .........................................................................................................................2-S11

B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM CLUTCH
1. TROUBLESHOOTING
Reference
Page
Clutch Drags Clutch pedal free travel excessive Adjust 2-S4
Dust on clutch disc generated from clutch disc Remove rust 2-S10
facing
Release fork broken Replace 2-S10
Clutch disc or pressure plate warped Replace 2-S11
Wiring of the pressure plate worn or broken Replace (Pressure 2-S11
plate assembly)
Clutch Slips Clutch pedal free travel too small Adjust 2-S4
Clutch disc excessively worn Replace 2-S11
Grease or oil on clutch disc facing Replace 2-S10
Diaphragm spring weaken or broken Replace 2-S11
Wiring of the pressure plate worn or broken Replace (Pressure 2-S11
plate assembly)
Chattering Grease or oil on clutch disc facing Replace 2-S10
Clutch disc boss spline worn or rusted Replace or remove 2-S11
rest
Clutch shaft bent or spline worn Replace 2-S11
Pressure plate or flywheel face cracked or Replace 2-S11
scored
Diaphragm spring strength uneven or diaphragm Replace 2-S11
spring broken
Rattle During Clutch disc boss spline worn Replace 2-S11
Running Bearing worn or sticking Replace 2-S11
Clutch Squeaks Bearing sticking or dry Replace 2-S11
Clutch disc excessively worn Replace 2-S10
Vibration Clutch shaft bent Replace 2-S11
Clutch disc rivet worn or broken Replace 2-S11
Clutch parts broken Replace –
9Y1210272CLS0001US0
2-S1 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM CLUTCH
Hydraulic Pump Free Travel on 15 to 25 mm –
Clutch Pedal 0.59 to 0.98 in.
Distance "A" 10 to 15 mm –
0.40 to 0.59 in.
Clutch Disc Boss to Gear Shaft Backlash – 2.0 mm
(Displacement 0.079 in.
around Disc Edge)
Clutch Disc Disc Surface to – 0.30 mm
Rivet Top (Depth) 0.012 in.
Pressure Plate Flatness – 0.2 mm
0.008 in.
9Y1210272CLS0002US0
2-S2 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM CLUTCH
Slotted nut 18 to 35 1.9 to 3.5 14 to 25
Power steering delivery pipe nut (If equipped) 35 to 45 3.6 to 4.5 26 to 33
Clutch mounting screw 24 to 27 2.4 to 2.8 18 to 20
9Y1210272CLS0003US0
2-S3 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM CLUTCH

Checking Clutch Pedal Free Travel
CAUTION
• When checking, park the tractor on flat ground, apply the
parking brake, stop the engine and remove the key.
1. Slightly depress the clutch pedal (1) and measure free travel at
top of pedal stroke "L".
2. If adjustment is needed, loosen the lock nut (2) and turn buckle
(3) to adjust the rod length within acceptable limits.
3. Retighten the lock nut (2).
4. After adjusting it, move the clutch pedal (1) by just the stroke "L"
(Free Travel).
While keeping the condition, measure distance "A" between the
step (4) and the clutch pedal (1).
5. If the measurement not within the factory specifications, adjust
it with the clutch pedal stopper bolt (5).
NOTE
• After adjustment, fix the stopper bolt with the lock nut (6).
Clutch pedal free travel "L" on top of clutch pedal 15 to 25 mm
(Reference) 0.59 to 0.98 in.
Distance "A"
Distance "A" on clutch 10 to 15 mm
pedal stroke "B" above 0.40 to 0.59 in.
80 mm (3.1 in.)
(1) Clutch Pedal (4) Step

(2) Lock Nut (5) Stopper Bolt
(3) Turn Buckle (6) Lock Nut
9Y1210272CLS0004US0
[2] PREPARATION
(1) Separating Engine from Clutch Housing
NOTE
9Y1210272ENS0001US0
2-S4 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM CLUTCH
Draining Coolant
CAUTION
coolant.
3.4 L
Coolant
3.0 Imp.qts

(2) Recovery Tank
9Y1210272ENS0002US0
Draining Engine Oil

(When refilling)
IMPORTANT
temperatures.
G-9).
1.6 L
B1220 1.7 U.S.qts
1.4 Imp.qts
Engine oil capacity
2.4 L
B1620
2.5 U.S.qts
B1820
2.1 Imp.qts

(2) Oil Inlet
(3) Dipstick
9Y1210272ENS0003US0
2-S5 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM CLUTCH
(When refilling)
IMPORTANT
10.5 L
2.31 Imp.gals

9Y1210272ENS0004US0
Steering Wheel
(When reassembling)
30 to 49 N·m
nut
22 to 36 lbf·ft

9Y1210272ENS0005US0
2-S6 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM CLUTCH
lever (1).
under cover (5).
9Y1210272ENS0006US0
2-S7 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM CLUTCH
Fuel Tank
completely.
cable (7).
[Except B1220]
[Only B1220]
(12).
(When reassembling)
IMPORTANT
18 to 35 N·m
14 to 25 lbf·ft

(8) Fuse Box
9Y1210272ENS0007US0
2-S8 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM CLUTCH
Hydraulic Pipes
model]
delivery pipe (5).
(When reassembling)
35 to 45 N·m
pipe nut
26 to 33 lbf·ft
(2) Suction Hose
9Y1210272ENS0008US0
Universal Joint
the rear.
(When reassembling)
joint.
9Y1210272ENS0009US0
2-S9 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM CLUTCH
(When reassembling)
18 to 20 N·m
mounting screw
13 to 15 lbf·ft

9Y1210272ENS0010US0
(2) Separating Clutch Assembly

Separating the Clutch Assembly
1. Remove the clutch assembly (2) from the flywheel.
(When reassembling)
• Direct the shorter end of the clutch disc boss toward the
flywheel.
• Apply molybdenum disulphide (Three Bond 1901 or equivalent)
to the splines of clutch disc boss.
• Install the pressure plate, noting the position of straight pins.
IMPORTANT
• Align the center of clutch disc and flywheel by inserting the
clutch center tool (3).
NOTE
• Do not allow grease and oil on the clutch disc facing.
24 to 27 N·m
Tightening torque Clutch mounting screw 2.4 to 2.8 kgf·m
18 to 20 lbf·ft
(1) Clutch Disc (3) Clutch Center Tool

(2) Clutch Assembly
9Y1210272CLS0005US0
Clutch Rod and Clutch Release Fork

1. Remove the clutch pedal rod.
2. Remove the external snap ring (2) at the end of clutch rod (4)
and remove the clutch release fork (3) and release bearing (5)
with release hub.
(When reassembling)
• Set the clutch release fork (3) and release hub with set spring
(1) in the correct direction.
(1) Set Spring (4) Clutch Rod
(2) External Spring (5) Release Bearing
(3) Clutch Release Fork
9Y1210272CLS0006US0
2-S10 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM CLUTCH
[3] SERVICING
Backlash between Clutch Disc and Clutch Shaft
1. Mount the clutch disc onto the clutch shaft.
2. Hold the clutch shaft so that it does not rotate.
3. Slightly move the disc and measure the displacement around
disc edge.
4. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace clutch
disc.
Displacement around 2.0 mm
Allowable limit
disc edge 0.079 in.
9Y1210272CLS0007US0
Clutch Disc Wear
1. Measure the depth from clutch disc surface to the top of rivet at
least 10 points with a depth gauge.
2. If the depth is less than the allowable limit, replace the disc.
3. If oil is sticking to clutch disc, or disc surface is carbonized,
replace the clutch disc.
Disc surface to rivet top 0.3 mm
Allowable limit
(Depth) 0.01 in.
9Y1210272CLS0008US0
Pressure Plate Flatness

1. Place a straightedge on the pressure plate and measure
clearance with a feeler gauge at several points.
2. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace it.
3. When the pressure plate is worn around its outside and its
inside surface only is in contact with the straightedge, replace
even if the clearance is within allowable limit.
Clearance between
0.2 mm
pressure plate and Allowable limit
0.008 in.
straightedge
9Y1210272CLS0009US0
Checking Pressure Plate and Diaphragm
1. Check the pressure plate and if scratched on its surface, correct
with sandpaper or replace it.
2. Check the diaphragm for crack and scratches. If defects are
found, replace it.
9Y1210272CLS0010US0
Checking Clutch Release Bearing

1. Check the clutch release bearing. If surface is worn excessively,
or abnormal sounds occur, replace it.
9Y1210272CLS0011US0
2-S11 (EU)
3 TRANSMISSION

MECHANISM
CONTENTS
1. STRUCTURE.............................................................................................................................. 3-M1
[1] B1220 ................................................................................................................................... 3-M1
[2] B1620 AND B1820 ............................................................................................................... 3-M2
2. POWER TRAIN FOR TRAVELLING SYSTEM........................................................................... 3-M3
[1] MAIN GEAR SHIFT SECTION ............................................................................................. 3-M3
[2] HI-LO GEAR SHIFT SECTION ............................................................................................ 3-M4
[3] FRONT WHEEL DRIVE SHIFT SECTION ........................................................................... 3-M4
3. POWER TRAIN FOR PTO GEAR .............................................................................................. 3-M5
[1] REAR PTO SHIFT SECTION ............................................................................................... 3-M5
(1) B1220 ............................................................................................................................. 3-M5
(2) B1620 and B1820........................................................................................................... 3-M6
[2] MID PTO SHIFT SECTION [IF EQUIPPED] ........................................................................ 3-M7
(1) B1620 and B1820........................................................................................................... 3-M7
4. SHIFT LINKAGE......................................................................................................................... 3-M8

B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM TRANSMISSION
1. STRUCTURE
[1] B1220
(1) Front Wheel Drive Section (3) Lo-Hi Gear Shift Section (5) One-Way Clutch Section (Rear PTO)
(2) Main Gear Shift Section (4) Differential Gear Section (6) PTO Gear Shift Section
3-M1 (EU)
[2] B1620 AND B1820
(1) Front Wheel Drive Section (3) Lo-Hi Gear Shift Section (5) One-Way Clutch Section (Rear PTO) (7) PTO Gear Shift Section
(2) Main Gear Shift Section (4) Differential Gear Section (6) Mid PTO Shift Section (If Equipped)
3-M2 (EU)
2. POWER TRAIN FOR TRAVELLING SYSTEM

[1] MAIN GEAR SHIFT SECTION
Power Train
[B1220]
Q 1 : 1st Speed
1st gear shaft → 14T gear → Spline boss → 2nd
gear shaft (2) → 28T gear → Spline boss → 2nd gear
shaft → 11T gear → 26T gear → Spline boss → 4th gear
shaft (1)
Q 2 : 2nd Speed
shaft (1)
Q 3 : 3rd Speed
shaft (1)
Q R : Reverse
shaft → 13T gear → 15T gear → 17T gear → 26T gear
→ Spline boss → 4th gear shaft (1)
[B1620 and B1820]

Q 1 : 1st Speed
shaft (1)
Q 2 : 2nd Speed
shaft (1)
Q 3 : 3rd Speed
shaft (1)
Q R : Reverse
shaft → 13T gear → 15T gear → 17T gear → 26T gear
→ Spline boss → 4th gear shaft (1)
(1) 4th Shaft (2) 2nd Gear Shaft with
11T-13T-18T Gear
9Y1210272TRM0003US0
3-M3 (EU)
[2] HI-LO GEAR SHIFT SECTION

Q L : Low Range
4th gear shaft (1) → 11T gear → 32T gear → Spline
boss → Spiral bevel pinion shaft (2)
Q H : High Range
4th gear shaft (1) → 23T gear → Spline boss → 12T
gear → Spline boss → Spiral bevel pinion shaft (2)
(1) 4th Gear Shaft with 11T Gear (2) Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft
9Y1210272TRM0004US0
[3] FRONT WHEEL DRIVE SHIFT SECTION

Q Front Wheel Drive
Spiral bevel pinion shaft (2) → Spline boss → 13T
gear → 20T gear → Spline boss → Front wheel drive
shaft (1)
(1) Front Wheel Drive Shaft (2) Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft
9Y1210272TRM0005US0
3-M4 (EU)
3. POWER TRAIN FOR PTO GEAR

[1] REAR PTO SHIFT SECTION
(1) B1220
(1) 1st Gear Shaft with 14T Gear (3) 5th Gear Shaft with 11T Gear (4) PTO Shaft (5) 2nd Gear Shaft with
(2) One-Way Clutch 11T-13T-18T Gear
Q L : Low Range
1st gear shaft (1) → 14T gear → 28T gear → Spline boss → 2nd gear shaft (5) → 13T gear → 17T gear → Spline
boss → 3rd gear shaft → Spline boss → One-way clutch (2) → Spline boss → 5th gear shaft → 11T gear → 24T gear
→ Spline boss → PTO shaft (4)
Q H : High Range
→ Spline boss → PTO shaft (4)
9Y1210272TRM0006US0
3-M5 (EU)
(2) B1620 and B1820
(1) 1st Gear Shaft with 16T Gear (3) 5th Gear Shaft with 12T Gear (5) 2nd Gear Shaft with (A) Mid PTO Section
(2) One-Way Clutch (4) PTO Gear Shaft with 30T 11T-13T-18T Gear (If equipped)
Gear
Q L : Low Range
→ PTO shaft (4)
Q H : High Range
→ PTO shaft (4)
9Y1210272TRM0007US0
3-M6 (EU)
[2] MID PTO SHIFT SECTION [IF EQUIPPED]

(1) B1620 and B1820
(1) 1st Gear Shaft with 16T Gear (2) 2nd Gear Shaft with (3) Mid PTO Gear Shaft with 12T
11T-13T-18T Gear Gear
Q Engage
1st gear shaft (1) → 16T gear → 26T gear → Spline boss → 2nd gear shaft (2) → 18T gear → 13T gear → 19T
gear → 12T gear → Mid PTO shaft (3)
9Y1210272TRM0008US0
3-M7 (EU)
4. SHIFT LINKAGE
(1) Main Gear Shift Lever Shaft (3) Main Gear Shift Fork (5) PTO Gear Shift Lever (7) Hi-Lo Gear Shift Fork (9) Safety Switch for PTO Gear Shift
(2) Safety Switch for Main Gear Shift (4) Front Wheel Drive Shift Lever (6) Hi-Lo Gear Shift Lever (8) PTO Gear Shift Fork
3-M8 (EU)
SERVICING
CONTENTS
4. DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING ..........................................................................................3-S4
[1] PREPARATION .....................................................................................................................3-S4
(1) Separating Engine from Clutch Housing .........................................................................3-S4
(2) Separating Center Frame and Transmission.................................................................3-S11
(1) Disassembling Clutch Housing......................................................................................3-S14
(2) Disassembling Transmission Case ...............................................................................3-S15
(3) Disassembling Differential Gear Case...........................................................................3-S20
[3] SERVICING .........................................................................................................................3-S21
(1) Clutch Housing ..............................................................................................................3-S21
(2) Transmission Case........................................................................................................3-S21
(3) Differential Gear ............................................................................................................3-S23

1. TROUBLESHOOTING
CLUTCH HOUSING
Reference
Page
Noise from Clutch Bearing worn Replace 3-S21
Housing
TRANSMISSION CASE SECTION

Reference
Page
Noise from Transmission oil insufficient Refill 3-S6
Transmission Gear worn or broken Replace 3-S16
Improper backlash between spiral bevel pinion Adjust 3-S24
and bevel gear
Improper backlash between differential pinion Adjust 3-S23
and differential side gear
Bearing worn Replace 3-S21
Gear Slip Out of Mesh Shift fork spring tension insufficient Replace 3-S18
Shift fork or shifter worn Replace 3-S18
Shift fork bent Replace 3-S18
DIFFERENTIAL CASE SECTION

Reference
Page
Excessive or Unusual Improper backlash between spiral bevel pinion Adjust 3-S24
Noise at All Time and bevel gear
Improper backlash between differential pinion Adjust 3-S23
and differential side gear
Insufficient or improper type of transmission fluid Replenish or Replace 3-S6
used
Noise while Turning Differential pinions or differential side gears worn Replace 3-S23
or damaged
Differential lock binding (does not disengage) Replace 3-S15
Bearings worn Replace 3-S21
Differential Lock Can Deferential lock shift fork damaged Replace –
Not Be Set Deferential lock shifter mounting pin damaged Replace 4-S5
Differential lock clutch damaged Replace 4-S5
Differential Lock Differential lock pedal return spring weaken or Replace –
Pedal Does Not damaged
Return Differential lock fork shaft rusted Repair 4-S5
9Y1210272TRS0001US0
3-S1 (EU)
Shift Fork to Shift Gear Groove Clearance 0.10 to 0.35 mm 0.5 mm
0.0040 to 0.013 in. 0.02 in.
17T-15T Gear to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Clearance 0.027 to 0.067 mm 0.10 mm
0.0011 to 0.0026 in. 0.0039 in.
• Front Wheel Drive Shaft O.D. 21.967 to 21.980 mm –

0.86485 to 0.86535 in.
• 17T-15T Gear I.D. 28.007 to 28.021 mm –

1.1027 to 1.1031 in.
• Needle O.D 2.994 to 3.000 mm –

0.1179 to 0.1181 in.
Spiral Bevel Pinion Side Clearance Less than 0.15 mm –
Less than 0.0059 in.
Spiral Bevel Pinion to Spiral Bevel Gear Backlash 0.1 to 0.3 mm 0.4 mm
0.004 to 0.01 in. 0.02 in.
• Adjusting Shim Thickness 0.2 mm, 0.008 in. –
0.5 mm, 0.02 in. –

Differential Pinion to Differential Side Gear Backlash 0.1 to 0.3 mm 0.4 mm
0.004 to 0.01 in. 0.02 in.
• Adjusting Shim Thickness 0.8 mm, 0.03 in. –
1.0 mm, 0.039 in. –
1.2 mm, 0.047 in. –

Differential Case to Differential Side Gear Clearance 0.025 to 0.066 mm 0.30 mm
0.00099 to 0.0025 in. 0.012 in.
• Differential Case O.D. 32.000 to 32.025 mm –

1.2599 to 1.2608 in.
• Spiral Bevel Gear I.D. 32.000 to 32.025 mm –

1.2599 to 1.2608 in.
• Differential Side Gear O.D 31.959 to 31.975 mm –

1.2583 to 1.2588 in.
Differential Pinion Shaft to Differential Clearance 0.048 to 0.084 mm 0.30 mm
Pinion 0.0019 to 0.0033 in. 0.012 in.
• Differential Pinion Shaft O.D. 14.032 to 14.050 mm –

0.55244 to 0.55314 in.
• Differential Pinion I.D. 13.966 to 13.984 mm –

0.54985 to 0.55055 in.
9Y1210272TRS0004US0
3-S2 (EU)
Sloted nut 18 to 35 1.9 to 3.5 14 to 25
Power steering delivery pipe nut (If equipped) 35 to 45 3.6 to 4.5 26 to 33
Clutch mounting screw 24 to 27 2.4 to 2.8 18 to 20
Clutch housing mounting screw and nut 63 to 72 6.4 to 7.4 47 to 53
ROPS mounting bolt (M12) (If equipped) 90 to 95 9.2 to 9.6 67 to 70
3 Point hitch shaft setting screw 15 to 20 1.6 to 2.0 11 to 14
3 Point hitch shaft setting screw lock nut 43 to 47 4.4 to 4.7 32 to 34
Rear wheel mounting nut 145 to 150 14.8 to 15.3 107 to 111
Joint bolt (3 Point hitch delivery pipe) 50 to 60 5.1 to 6.1 37 to 44
Transmission case and center frame mounting screw 63 to 72 6.4 to 7.4 47 to 53
Top link bracket, L.H. mounting screw 78 to 90 7.9 to 9.2 58 to 66
Hydraulic cylinder case mounting screw 40 to 44 4.0 to 4.5 29 to 32
Rear axle case mounting screw 40 to 44 4.0 to 4.5 29 to 32
Main gear shift cover mounting screw 18 to 20 1.8 to 2.1 13 to 15
Front cover mounting screw 40 to 44 4.0 to 4.5 29 to 32
Mid-PTO case mounting screw (If equipped) 40 to 44 4.0 to 4.5 29 to 32
Transmission case and differential case mounting nut 40 to 44 4.0 to 4.5 29 to 32
Rear PTO cover mounting screw 40 to 44 4.0 to 4.5 29 to 32
Differential bearing holder mounting screw 18 to 20 1.8 to 2.1 13 to 15
Spiral bevel gear UBS screw 37.5 to 42.5 3.83 to 4.33 27.7 to 31.3
9Y1210272TRS0005US0
3-S3 (EU)
4. DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING

[1] PREPARATION
(1) Separating Engine from Clutch Housing
NOTE
9Y1210272ENS0001US0
Draining Coolant
CAUTION
coolant.
3.4 L
Coolant
3.0 Imp.qts

(2) Recovery Tank
9Y1210272ENS0002US0
3-S4 (EU)
Draining Engine Oil
(When refilling)
IMPORTANT
temperatures.
G-9).
1.6 L
B1220 1.7 U.S.qts
1.4 Imp.qts
Engine oil capacity
2.4 L
B1620
2.5 U.S.qts
B1820
2.1 Imp.qts

(2) Oil Inlet
(3) Dipstick
9Y1210272ENS0003US0
3-S5 (EU)
(When refilling)
IMPORTANT
10.5 L
2.31 Imp.gals

9Y1210272ENS0004US0
Steering Wheel
(When reassembling)
30 to 49 N·m
nut
22 to 36 lbf·ft

9Y1210272ENS0005US0
3-S6 (EU)
lever (1).
under cover (5).
9Y1210272ENS0006US0
3-S7 (EU)
Fuel Tank
completely.
cable (7).
[Except B1220]
[Only B1220]
(12).
(When reassembling)
IMPORTANT
18 to 35 N·m
14 to 25 lbf·ft

(8) Fuse Box
9Y1210272ENS0007US0
3-S8 (EU)
Hydraulic Pipes
model]
delivery pipe (5).
(When reassembling)
35 to 45 N·m
pipe nut
26 to 33 lbf·ft
(2) Suction Hose
9Y1210272ENS0008US0
Universal Joint
the rear.
(When reassembling)
joint.
9Y1210272ENS0009US0
3-S9 (EU)
(When reassembling)
18 to 20 N·m
mounting screw
13 to 15 lbf·ft

9Y1210272ENS0010US0
Separating Clutch Housing from Center Frame

1. Place the disassembling stand under the clutch housing (1).
(When reassembling)
63 to 72 N·m
Clutch housing mounting
screw and nut
47 to 53 lbf·ft
(1) Clutch Housing

9Y1210272TRS0038US0
3-S10 (EU)
(2) Separating Center Frame and Transmission

(When refilling)
IMPORTANT
10.5 L
2.31 Imp.gals

9Y1210272ENS0004US0
Battery Negative Cable

2. Disconnect the battery negative cable (2).
NOTE
grounding cable first. When connecting, the positive cable
first.
(1) Bonnet (3) Front Grille
(2) Battery Negative Cable
9Y1210272TRS0006US0
3-S11 (EU)
ROPS and Three Point Hitch
1. Remove the upper frame mounting bolts and nuts, then remove
the upper frame (1). [If equipped]
2. Disconnect the wire harness and remove the tail lamps (4).
[Except B1220]
3. Remove the license plate (2). [If equipped]
4. Remove the fender stay. [Without ROPS model]
5. Remove the top link and lift rods (5).
6. Remove the lower link (7) and the collars from the three point
hitch shaft (6).
7. Remove the lower link bracket. [Without ROPS model]
8. Remove the lower frames (2). [If equipped]
90 to 95 N·m
ROPS mounting bolt (M12) 9.2 to 9.6 kgf·m
67 to 70 lbf·ft
15 to 20 N·m
3 Point hitch shaft setting
screw
11 to 14 lbf·ft
43 to 47 N·m
3 Point hitch shaft setting
4.4 to 4.7 kgf·m
screw lock nut
32 to 34 lbf·ft
(1) Upper Frame [If Equipped] (5) Lift Load

(2) Lower Frame [If Equipped] (6) Three Point Hitch Shaft
(3) License Plate (7) Lower Link
(4) Tail Lamp
9Y1210272TRS0007US0
Rear Wheel, Seat, Fender and Seat Under Cover
1. Place the disassembling jack under the transmission case.
2. Remove the seat (2).
3. Remove the rear wheels (5).
4. Disconnect the lever guides (3) and remove the fenders (1).
5. Remove the seat under cover (4).
145 to 150 N·m
Tightening torque Rear wheel mounting nut 14.8 to 15.3 kgf·m
107 to 111 lbf·ft
(1) Fender (4) Seat Under Cover

(2) Seat (5) Rear Wheel
(3) Lever Guide
9Y1210272TRS0008US0
3-S12 (EU)
Steering Wheel, Meter Panel, Panel Under Cover and Step
steering wheel (2) with a steering wheel pillar (Code No.
07916-51090).
lever (1).
4. Open the meter panel (3).
5. Disconnect the meter panel connector, combination switch
connector, hazard switch connector and hour meter cable. Then
remove the meter panel (3). [Except B1220]
6. Disconnect the meter panel connector and head light switch
connector. Then remove the meter panel. [Only B1220]
7. Disconnect the main switch connector and remove the panel
under cover (4).
8. Remove the rubber mat (5).
9. Disconnect the springs and parking brake rod, and then remove
the steps.
30 to 49 N·m
nut
22 to 36 lbf·ft
(1) Accelerator Lever (4) Panel Under Cover

(2) Steering Wheel (5) Rubber Mat
(3) Meter Panel (6) Spring Pin
9Y1210272TRS0009US0
Delivery Pipe, Suction Pipe, Position Control Lever and Front
Wheel Drive Lever
1. Remove the brake rod, R.H. (3).
2. Disconnect the hydraulic control lever (1).
3. Remove the pipe clamps and disconnect the 3 Points hitch
delivery pipe (2) from hydraulic cylinder case.
4. Disconnect the suction pipe (4) at the transmission case side.
50 to 60 N·m
Joint bolt (3 Points hitch
delivery pipe)
37 to 44 lbf·ft
(1) Hydraulic Control Lever (3) Brake Rod, R.H.

(2) 3 Point Hitch Delivery Pipe (4) Suction Pipe
9Y1210272TRS0010US0
Seat Stay and Others
1. Disconnect the wire harness from the front seat stay and (1) and
remove the front seat stay (1) and rear seat stay (3).
2. Disconnect the main gear shift switch connector (2) and PTO
safety switch connector (4).
3. Disconnect the lead wires of brakes switch (5).
4. Remove the brake rod, L.H..
(1) Front Seat Stay (4) PTO Safety Switch Connector
(2) Main Gear Shift Switch Connector (5) Lead Wire
(3) Rear Seat Stay (6) Brake Rod, L.H.
9Y1210272TRS0011US0
3-S13 (EU)
Separating Transmission Assembly
1. Separate the transmission assembly from center frame.
(When reassembling)
63 to 72 N·m
Transmission case and
center frame mounting bolt
47 to 53 lbf·ft
9Y1210272TRS0012US0

(1) Disassembling Clutch Housing
Clutch Rod and Clutch Release Fork
1. Remove the clutch pedal rod.
2. Remove the external snap ring (2) at the end of clutch rod (4)
and remove the clutch release fork (3) and release bearing (5)
with release hub.
(When reassembling)
• Set the clutch release fork (3) and release hub with set spring
(1) in the correct direction.
(1) Set Spring (4) Clutch Rod
(2) External Snap Ring (5) Release Bearing
(3) Clutch Release Fork
9Y1210272TRS0040US0
Clutch Shaft
1. Remove the oil seal (1).
2. Remove the internal snap ring (2).
3. Pull out the clutch shaft assembly (3).
(When reassembling)
• Apply small amount of the grease to the oil seal (1).
(1) Oil Seal (3) Clutch Shaft Assembly
(2) Internal Snap Ring
9Y1210272TRS0039US0
3-S14 (EU)
(2) Disassembling Transmission Case

Separating Hydraulic Cylinder, Rear Axle and Others
1. Tap out the spring pin (16) and remove the universal joint with
front wheel drive propeller shaft (4).
2. Remove the differential lock rod (6).
3. Remove the main gear shift lever (2), front wheel drive lever (3)
with lever guide, R.H. and hydraulic control lever. [Except
B1220]
4. Remove the main gear shift lever with lever guide, R.H. and
hydraulic control lever. [Only B1220]
5. Remove the external snap ring, then remove the PTO gear shift
lever (9) with rod and range gear shift lever (8) with lever guide,
L.H..
6. Remove the right and left side parking brake rods (7), (11).
7. Remove the rod (15). [Except B1220]
8. Remove the pin (13), then remove the parking brake arm (12)
and shaft (5). [Except B1220]
9. Remove the parking brake assembly (14). [Except B1220]
10. Remove the top link bracket, L.H. (10).
11. Remove the hydraulic cylinder assembly (1).
12. Remove the rear axle cases (8).
(When reassembling)
• When inserting the spring pin (16), face their splits in the
direction parallel the universal joint as shown in the figure
below.
• Apply grease to the spline of the front wheel drive propeller
shaft, universal joint and ball coupling.
• Replace the spring pin with new one.
78 to 90 N·m
Top link bracket, L.H.
7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m
mounting screw
58 to 66 lbf·ft
40 to 44 N·m
Hydraulic cylinder case
mounting screw
29 to 32 lbf·ft
40 to 44 N·m
Rear axle case mounting
4.0 to 4.5 kgf·m
screw
29 to 32 lbf·ft
(1) Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly (9) PTO Gear Shift Lever

(2) Main Gear Shift Lever (10) Top Link Bracket, L.H.
(3) Front Wheel Drive Lever (11) Parking Brake Rod, L.H.
[Except B1220] [Except B1220]
(4) Front Wheel Drive Propeller Shaft (12) Parking Brake Arm
(5) Parking Brake Shaft [Except B1220] [Except B1220]
(6) Differential Lock Rod (13) Pin [Except B1220]
(7) Parking Brake Rod, R.H. (14) Parking Brake Assembly
[Except B1220] [Except B1220]
(8) Rear Axle Case (15) Rod [Except B1220]
(16) Spring Pin
9Y1210272TRS0013US0
Main Gear Shift Cover and Hydraulic Filter
1. Remove the main gear shift cover (1).
2. Remove the hydraulic filter (2).
(When reassembling)
18 to 20 N·m
Main gear shift cover
mounting screw
13 to 15 lbf·ft
(1) Main Gear Shift Cover (2) Hydraulic Filter

9Y1210272TRS0014US0
3-S15 (EU)
Front Cover and Mid-PTO Case
1. Remove the front cover mounting screw and remove the front
cover (1).
2. Remove the mid-PTO case (2) from transmission case. [If
equipped]
(When reassembling)
• Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 1206D or equivalent) to joint
face of the front cover and mid-PTO case to transmission case.
NOTE
• When reassembling the front cover to the transmission
case, be sure to wrap the front drive shaft with vinyl tape.
And then, attach the front cover, taking care not to damage
the oil seals of the front cover with the front drive shaft.
40 to 44 N·m
Front cover mounting
4.0 to 4.5 kgf·m
screw
29 to 32 lbf·ft
Tightening torque
40 to 44 N·m
Mid-PTO case mounting
4.0 to 4.5 kgf·m
screw [If equipped]
29 to 32 lbf·ft
(1) Front Cover (2) Mid-PTO Case [If Equipped]

9Y1210272TRS0015US0
1st Gear Shaft
2. Remove the 1st gear shaft (1) to the rear.
NOTE
• When reassembling the front cover to the transmission
case, be sure to wrap the 1st gear shaft with vinyl tape. And
then, insert the 1st gear shaft to the front cover, take care
not to damage the oil seal of the front cover with 1st gear
shaft.
(1) 1st Gear Shaft (2) Internal Snap Ring
9Y1210272TRS0016US0
2nd Gear Shaft
1. Remove the bearing (5), then 26T gear (3).
2. Remove the 26T gear (2).
3. Remove the bearing (6), then external snap ring and 17T-15T
gear (1).
4. Remove the 2nd gear shaft (4).
NOTE
• When installing the needle bearings into the 17T-15T gear
(1), apply transmission oil to the needle bearings.
(1) 17T-15T Gear (4) 2nd Gear Shaft
(2) 26T Gear (5) Bearing
(3) 26T Gear
9Y1210272TRS0017US0
3-S16 (EU)
3rd Shaft
1. Remove the middle shaft (6) and 19T gear (5). [If equipped]
2. Draw out the 3rd shaft (1) with 17T-13T gear (2) and shift fork
(3) with shift rod (4).
(When reassembling)
• Install the shift fork (3) and shift rod (4) as shown in the figure.
(1) 3rd Shaft a : Front
(2) 17T-13T Gear b : Rear
(3) Shift Fork
(4) Shift Rod
(5) 19T Gear [If equipped]
(6) Middle Shaft [If equipped]
9Y1210272TRS0018US0
Separating Transmission Case and Mid Case with Differential

Case
1. Remove the external snap ring (2) and one-way clutch cum (1).
2. Separate the transmission case (4) and differential case (3).
(When reassembling)
face of the transmission case and differential case.
Transmission case and 40 to 44 N·m
Tightening torque differential case mounting 4.0 to 4.5 kgf·m
nut 29 to 32 lbf·ft
(1) One-way Clutch Cum (3) Differential Case

(2) External Snap Ring (4) Transmission Case
9Y1210272TRS0019US0
3-S17 (EU)
4th Gear Shaft and Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft
1. Draw out the spiral bevel pinion shaft (2) with 12T-32T shift gear
(3), 13Tgear (6) and shift fork (5) with shift rod (4).
2. Draw out the 4th gear shaft (1) rearward.
(When reassembling)
• When installing the spiral bevel pinion shaft, be sure to install
the shims (8).
• Install the shift fork (4), so that the groove (7) of the shift rod (6)
faces rearward.
• When reassembling the shift fork, attach it making the shift fork
arm fit the rear shift groove of the shift fork.
(1) 4th Gear Shaft (6) 13T Gear
(2) Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft (7) Groove
(3) 12T-32T Shift Gear (8) Shim
(4) Shift Rod
(5) Shift Fork a : Rear
9Y1210272TRS0020US0
Front Wheel Drive Shaft

1. Draw out the front wheel drive shaft (1) with 20T gear (2).
(1) Front Wheel Drive Shaft (2) 20T Gear
9Y1210272TRS0021US0
3-S18 (EU)
Mid-PTO Shaft [If Equipped]
1. Remove the oil seal (1) and internal snap ring (3).
2. Remove the mid-PTO shaft (2) with bearings.
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to lip and outer of oil seal.
(1) Oil Seal (3) Internal Snap Ring
(2) Mid-PTO Shaft (4) Bearing
9Y1210272TRS0022US0
Main Gear Shift Fork

1. Remove the cotter pin (3) and remove the spring (4) and ball (5).
2. Draw out the shift rod (6) and remove the 1st-reverse gear shift
fork (2).
3. Remove the 2nd-3rd gear shift fork (1), in the same way as the
1st-reverse shift fork removing procedure.
4. Take out the interlocker (10) and slide the shift arm stopper (9)
and then remove the shift arm (7).
5. Remove the shift shaft (8).
(1) 2nd-3rd Gear Shift Fork (6) Shift Rod
(2) 1st-Reverse Gear Shift Fork (7) Shift Arm
(3) Cotter Pin (8) Shift Shaft
(4) Spring (9) Shift Arm Stopper
(5) Ball (10) Interlocker
9Y1210272TRS0023US0
3-S19 (EU)
(3) Disassembling Differential Gear Case

PTO Shaft
1. Remove the rear PTO cover mounting screws and remove the
rear PTO cover assembly (1).
(When reassembling)
face of differential gear case and PTO cover.
40 to 44 N·m
Rear PTO cover mounting
screw
29 to 32 lbf·ft
(1) Rear PTO Cover Assembly

9Y1210272TRS0024US0
Differential Bearing Holder
1. Remove the differential bearing holder mounting screws(1).
2. Remove the differential bearing holder (2) and shims (3), (4).
(When reassembling)
• 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) shim.
• 0.5 mm (0.020 in.) shim.
18 to 20 N·m
Differential bearing holder
mounting screw (M8)
13 to 15 lbf·ft
(1) Screw (3) Shim

(2) Differential Bearing Holder (4) Shim
9Y1210272TRS0025US0
Differential Gear Assembly

1. Remove the internal snap ring (1) from the differential case.
2. Remove the shims (2).
3. Remove the differential gear assembly (3) from the differential
case.
(When reassembling)
• 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) shim.
• 0.5 mm (0.020 in.) shim.
(1) Internal Snap RIng (3) Differential Gear Assembly
(2) Shim
9Y1210272TRS0026US0
3-S20 (EU)
Spiral Bevel Gear
1. Remove the spiral bevel gear UBS screws (1).
2. Remove the spiral bevel gear (2) from differential case (3).
(When reassembling)
• Apply liquid lock (Loctite 262 or its equivalent) to the spiral bevel
gear UBS screws.
37.5 to 42.5 N·m
Spiral bevel gear UBS
screw
27.7 to 31.3 lbf·ft
(1) Spiral Bevel Gear UBS Screw (3) Differential Case

(2) Spiral Bevel Gear
9Y1210272TRS0027US0
Differential Side Gear and Differential Pinion
1. Put parting marks on the differential pinion (1) and the
differential side gear (2).
2. Tap out the dowel pin (3).
3. Remove the differential pinion shaft.
4. Remove the differential pinion (4), differential side gear (2) and
shim (5).
(When reassembling)
• Install the differential pinion and differential side gear, aligning
the parting marks.
(1) Differential Pinion (4) Differential Pinion
(2) Differential Side Gear (5) Shim
(3) Dowel Pin
9Y1210272TRS0028US0
[3] SERVICING
(1) Clutch Housing
Checking Bearing
1. Hold the inner race, and push and pull the outer race in all
directions to check for wear and roughness.
2. Apply transmission fluid to the bearing, and hold the inner race.
Then, turn the outer race to check rotation.
3. If there is any defect, replace it.
9Y1210272TRS0029US0
(2) Transmission Case

Checking Bearing
9Y1210272TRS0029US0
3-S21 (EU)
Clearance between Shift Fork and Shift Gear Groove or Shifter
Groove
1. Insert the fork into the shift gear groove and measure the
clearance with a feeler gauge.
0.03 to 0.4 mm
Clearance between shift Factory specification
0.002 to 0.1 in.
fork and shift gear
groove 0.5 mm
Allowable limit
0.02 in.
0.03 to 0.3 mm
Clearance between shift 0.002 to 0.1 in.
fork and shift groove 0.5 mm
Allowable limit
0.02 in.
9Y1210272TRS0032US0
Clearance between Gear and Shaft
1. Measure the gear I.D. with a cylinder gauge, and then shaft
O.D. with an outside micrometer.
2. Measure the O.D. of two needles in the needle bearing with an
outside micrometer.
3. Clearance is the difference between the gear I.D. and the sum
of shaft O.D. and two needles O.D..
0.027 to 0.067 mm
0.0011 to 0.0026 in.
F.W.D. shaft and
17T-15T gear 0.10 mm
Allowable limit
0.0039 in.
21.967 to 21.980 mm
F.W.D. shaft O.D. Factory specification
0.86485 to 0.86535 in.
28.007 to 28.021 mm
17T-15T gear I.D. Factory specification
1.1027 to 1.1031 in.
2.994 to 3.000 mm
Needle O.D. Factory specification
0.1179 to 0.1181 in.
9Y1210272TRS0033US0
3-S22 (EU)
(3) Differential Gear

Clearance between Differential Case (Spiral Bevel Gear) and
Differential Side Gear
1. Measure the differential side gear boss O.D. with an out side
micrometer.
2. Measure the differential case I.D. and the spiral bevel gear I.D.
with an inside micrometer, and calculate the clearance.
3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace faulty parts.
Clearance between 0.025 to 0.066 mm
differential case (spiral 0.00099 to 0.0025 in.
bevel gear) and 0.30 mm
differential side gear Allowable limit
0.012 in.
32.000 to 32.025 mm
Differential case I.D. Factory specification
1.2599 to 1.2608 in.
32.000 to 32.025 mm
Spiral bevel gear I.D. Factory specification
1.2599 to 1.2608 in.
Differential side gear 31.959 to 31.975 mm
O.D. 1.2583 to 1.2588 in.
9Y1210272TRS0034US0
Clearance between Differential Pinion Shaft and Differential
Pinion
1. Measure the differential pinion shaft O.D. with an outside
micrometer.
2. Measure the differential pinion I.D. with an inside micrometer,
and calculate the clearance.
0.048 to 0.084 mm
0.0019 to 0.0033 in.
differential pinion shaft
and differential pinion 0.30 mm
Allowable limit
0.012 in.
14.032 to 14.050 mm
Differential pinion I.D. Factory specification
0.55244 to 0.55314 in.
Differential pinion shaft 13.966 to 13.984 mm
O.D. 0.54985 to 0.55055 in.
9Y1210272TRS0035US0
Backlash between Differential Pinion and Differential Side
Gear
1. Secure the differential case with a vise.
2. Set the dial indicator (lever type) with its finger on the tooth of
the differential side gear.
3. Press differential pinion and side gear against the differential
case.
4. Hold the differential pinion and move the differential side gear to
measure the backlash.
5. If the backlash exceeds the allowable limit, adjust with
differential side gear shims.
0.1 to 0.3 mm
Backlash between Factory specification
0.004 to 0.01 in.
differential pinion and
differential side gear 0.4 mm
Allowable limit
0.02 in.
NOTE
• Thickness of shims : 0.8 mm (0.3 in.), 1.0 mm (0.039 in.),
1.2 mm (0.047 in.)
9Y1210272TRS0036US0
3-S23 (EU)
Backlash between Spiral Bevel Pinion and Spiral Bevel Gear
1. Set the dial indicator (lever type) with its finger on the end of
spiral bevel pinion (4).
2. Move the spiral bevel pinion back and forth to each end and
measure the side clearance.
3. If the side clearance exceeds the factory specifications, adjust
with the shims (3) at front end of spiral bevel pinion.
4. Set the dial indicator (lever type) with its finger on the tooth
surface of bevel gear.
5. Measure the backlash by fixing the spiral bevel pinion (4) and
moving bevel gear (2) by hand.
6. If the backlash exceeds the factory specifications, adjust with
the shims (1), (5) at bearing holder (6) and differential case.
7. Adjust the backlash properly by repeating the above
procedures.
Less than
Side clearance of spiral
Factory specification 0.15 mm
bevel pinion
0.0059 in.
0.1 to 0.3 mm
Backlash between spiral Factory specification
0.004 to 0.01 in.
bevel pinion and spiral
bevel gear 0.4 mm
Allowable limit
0.02 in.
(Reference)
• Thickness of shims (1), (5)
0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
0.5 mm (0.020 in.)
• Thickness of shims (3)
0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
0.3 mm (0.01 in.)
1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
1.4 mm (0.055 in.)
1.8 mm (0.071 in.)
(To be continued)
3-S24 (EU)
(Continued)
(1) Shim
(2) Bevel Gear
(3) Shim
(4) Spiral Bevel Pinion
(5) Shim
(6) Bearing Holder
9Y1210272TRS0037US0
3-S25 (EU)
4 REAR AXLE

MECHANISM
CONTENTS
1. STRUCTURE.............................................................................................................................. 4-M1

B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM REAR AXLE
1. STRUCTURE
(1) 9T Differential Gear Shaft

(Brake Shaft)
(2) 58T Spur Gear
(3) Ball Bearing
(4) Rear Axle Case
(5) Rear Axle
(6) Differential Gear
(7) 37T Spiral Bevel Gear
The rear axles are the semifloating type with ball bearings (3) between the rear axle (5) and the rear axle case
(4), which supports the rear wheel load as well as transmitting power to the rear wheels.
The differential gears (6) automatically control the revolution of right and left wheels when the rear wheels
encounter unequal road resistance during turning.
9Y1210272RAM0001US0
4-M1 (EU)
SERVICING
CONTENTS
3. DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING ..........................................................................................4-S3
[1] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING ................................................................................4-S3
[2] SERVICING ...........................................................................................................................4-S5

1. TROUBLESHOOTING
Reference
Page
Excessive or Unusual Improper backlash between differential gear Replace –
Noise at All Time shaft and final reduction gear
Insufficient or improper type of transmission fluid Replenish or change 4-S3
used
Noise while Turning Brake shaft and 58T gear and internal gear worn Replace 4-S5,
or damaged 5-S10
9Y1210272RAS0001US0
4-S1 (EU)
Rear wheel cotter setting bolt and nut 123 to 147 12.6 to 15.0 91 to 108
Rear wheel hub mounting nut 108 to 125 11.0 to 12.8 80 to 93
9Y1210272RAS0003US0
4-S2 (EU)
3. DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING

(When refilling)
IMPORTANT
10.5 L
2.31 Imp.gals

9Y1210272ENS0004US0

NOTE
first.
9Y1210272TRS0006US0
4-S3 (EU)
Rear Wheels
1. Place a jack under the transmission case.
2. Loosen the rear wheel cotter setting bolt and nut (1).
3. Take out the wheel hub pin (2).
4. Take out the rear wheel (1).
IMPORTANT
• When re-fitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts to the
following torques and then recheck them after driving the
tractor approx. 200 m (200 yards).
(When reassembling)
123 to 147 N·m
Rear wheel cotter setting
12.6 to 15.0 kgf·m
bolt and nut
91 to 108 lbf·ft
Tightening torque
108 to 125 N·m
Rear wheel hub mounting
11.0 to 12.8 kgf·m
nut
80 to 93 lbf·ft
(1) Rear Wheel (3) Cotter Setting Bolt

(2) Wheel Hub Pin
9Y1210272RAS0004US0
Rear Axle Case (Left Hand Side)

1. Remove the brake rod, L.H. (1) with spring (2).
2. Remove the parking brake rod, L.H. (3). [Except B1220]
3. Remove the pin (5) and parking brake arm (6). [Except B1220]
4. Remove the rear axle case, L.H. (4).
(When reassembling)
face of the rear axle case and differential gear case after
eliminating the water and oil.
40 to 45 N·m
screw
29 to 33 lbf·ft
(1) Brake Rod, L.H. (4) Rear Axle Case, L.H.

(2) Spring (5) Pin [Except B1220]
(3) Parking Brake Rod, L.H. (6) Parking Brake Arm [Except B1220]
[Except B1220]
9Y1210272RAS0005US0
4-S4 (EU)
Rear Axle Case (Right Hand Side)
1. Remove the brake rod, R.H. (2) with spring (3).
2. Remove the parking brake rod, R.H. (1). [Except B1220]
3. Remove the pin (6), then remove the parking brake shaft (4).
[Except B1220]
4. Remove the rear axle case, R.H. (5).
(When reassembling)
40 to 45 N·m
screw
29 to 33 lbf·ft
(1) Parking Brake Rod, R.H. (4) Parking Brake Shaft [Except B1220]
[Except B1220] (5) Rear Axle Case, R.H.
(2) Brake Rod, R.H. (6) Pin [Except B1220]
(3) Spring
9Y1210272RAS0006US0
Differential Lock Shift Fork, Differential Lock Clutch (Right

Side Only), 58T Gear and Rear Axle
1. Remove the spring (1).
2. Draw out the differential lock shift fork (2) and differential lock
clutch (3)
3. Remove the external snap ring (6) and remove the bearing (5).
4. Draw out the 58T gear (4) from the rear axle (7).
5. Tap out the rear axle (7) to the outside of the rear axle case.
(1) Spring (5) Bearing
(2) Differential Lock Shift Fork (6) External Snap Ring
(3) Differential Lock Clutch (7) Rear Axle
(4) 58T Gear
9Y1210272RAS0007US0
[2] SERVICING
Checking Ball Bearing
9Y1210272RAS0008US0
4-S5 (EU)
5 BRAKES

MECHANISM
CONTENTS
1. LINKAGE .................................................................................................................................... 5-M1

[1] B1220 ................................................................................................................................... 5-M1
[2] B1620 AND B1820 ............................................................................................................... 5-M2
2. OPERATION............................................................................................................................... 5-M3

B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM BRAKES
1. LINKAGE
[1] B1220
(1) Rear Axle Case (3) Adjusting Nut (5) Brake Rod (7) Parking Brake Lever
(2) Lock Nut (4) Brake Cam Lever (6) Brake Pedal
Independent mechanical wet disc brakes are used for the right and left traveling brakes. They are operated by
the brake pedals through the mechanical linkages and provide stable braking and require little adjustment.
The parking brake is a mechanical type which is designed to actuate the traveling brakes through the linkages
Pulling the parking brake lever (7) results in the same state as the obtained when the brake pedals are depressed.
9Y1210272BRM0001US0
5-M1 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM BRAKES
[2] B1620 AND B1820
(1) Brake Pedal (3) Parking Brake Pedal (5) Parking Brake Lever Rod (7) Parking Brake Rod
(2) Brake Rod (4) Parking Brake Release Lever (6) Parking Brake Arm (8) Brake Cam Lever
Independent mechanical wet disc brakes are used for the right and left traveling brakes. They are operated by
the brake pedals through the mechanical linkages and provide stable braking and require little adjustment.
The parking brake is a mechanical type which is designed to actuate the traveling brakes through the linkages.
Depressing the parking brake pedal (3) results in the same state as the obtained when the brake pedals are pressed.
9Y1210272BRM0002US0
5-M2 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM BRAKES
2. OPERATION
(1) Cam Plate (3) Brake Disc (5) Steel Ball (7) Brake Cam
(2) Friction Plate (4) Rear Axle Case (6) Brake Shaft (8) Brake Cam Lever
(Differential Gear Shaft)
The brake body is incorporated in the rear axle case (4) filled with transmission oil and is designed to brake when
the brake disc (3) splinted with the differential gear shaft (6) is pressed against the cam plate (1) by means of the cam
mechanism incorporating steel balls (5).
For greater braking force, two brake discs are provided at the right and left sides respectively, and the friction
plate (2) fixed to the rear axle case is arranged between the brake discs.
Q During Braking
When the brake pedal is pressed, the linage causes the brake cam lever (8) and brake cam (7) to turn into the
direction of arrow shown in the above figure.
Therefore, the cam plate (1) also moves the direction of arrow. At this time, since the cam plate (1) rides on the
steel balls (5) set in the grooves of the rear axle case to press the brake disc (3), the differential gear shaft (6) is braked
by the frictional force generated by the cam plate (1) and brake disc (3).
9Y1210272BRM0003US0
5-M3 (EU)
SERVICING
CONTENTS
(1) Brake Pedal [B1220]........................................................................................................5-S5
(2) Brake Pedal [B1620 and B1820] .....................................................................................5-S6
(3) Separating Rear Axle Case .............................................................................................5-S7
(4) Disassembling Rear Axle Case .....................................................................................5-S10
[3] SERVICING .........................................................................................................................5-S11

B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM BRAKES
1. TROUBLESHOOTING
Reference
Page
Uneven Braking Brake pedal free travel unevenly adjusted Adjust 5-S4
Force Brake disc worn Replace 5-S11
Cam plate warped Replace 5-S11
Brake Drags Brake pedal free travel too small Adjust 5-S4
Ball holes of cam plate for uneven wear Replace 5-S11
Brake pedal return spring weaken or broken Replace 5-S5, 5-S6
Brake cam rusted Repair 5-S11
Poor Braking Force Brake pedal free travel excessive Adjust 5-S4
Brake disc worn Replace 5-S11
Cam plate warped Replace 5-S11
Brake cam or lever damaged Replace 5-S11
Transmission fluid improper Change 5-S7
9Y1210272BRS0001US0
5-S1 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM BRAKES
Brake Pedal Free Travel 30 to 40 mm –
1.2 to 1.5 in.
Cam Plate and Bearing Holder Flatness – –
Cam Plate and Ball Height 22.89 to 22.99 mm 22.40 mm
0.9012 to 0.9051 in. 0.8819 in.
Brake Disc Thickness 3.30 to 3.50 mm 3.0 mm
0.130 to 0.137 in. 0.12 in.
Friction Plate Thickness 1.92 to 2.08 mm 1.52 mm
0.0756 to 0.0818 in. 0.0598 in.
Parking Brake Pedal Free Travel 1 notch –
9Y1210272BRS0002US0
5-S2 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM BRAKES
Rear wheel cotter setting bolt and nut 123 to 147 12.6 to 15.0 91 to 108
Rear wheel hub mounting nut 108 to 125 11.0 to 12.8 80 to 93
9Y1210272BRS0003US0
5-S3 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM BRAKES

Adjusting Brake Pedal Free Travel
CAUTION
brake pedal.
• The difference between the right and left pedal the travel
must be less than 5.0 mm (0.20 in.).
1. Release the parking brake.
2. Slightly depress the brake pedals and measure free travel at top
of pedal stroke.
loosen the lock nut and turn the adjusting nut to adjust the brake
rod length.
4. Retighten the lock nut securely.
5. Keep the free travel in the right and left brake pedals equal.
Brake pedal free travel 30 to 40 mm
"L" 1.2 to 1.5 in.
NOTE
• After checking brake pedal free travel, be sure to engage
the parking brake lever fully and check to see that the brake
pedals are securely locked.
(1) Brake Pedal L : Free Travel
(2) Lock Nut
(3) Adjusting Nut
(4) Brake Lever
9Y1210272BRS0004US0
Adjusting Parking Brake Pedal [B1620 and B1820]
1. Release the parking brake pedal (1).
2. Be sure to adjust the free travel of right and left brake pedal.
3. Check the parking brake performance according to the following
steps 4 to 5.
4. Set the parking brake pedal (1) to 2 notches.
5. Push the tractor by hands.
6. If the tractor is moved, release the parking brake pedal (1).
Loosen the lock nut (4) and the adjusting nut (5). Adjust the
adjusting nut (5) to keep no clearance between the collar (6) on
the parking brake rod (3) and brake lever (7).
7. After adjustment, tighten the lock nut (4) firmly.
IMPORTANT
• After adjustment, recheck the parking brake performance
according to the following steps 1 to 3.
1. Set the parking brake pedal (1) to 2 notches.
2. Push the tractor by hands.
3. If the tractor is moved, check the brake discs and brake plates
in the brake cases.
(1) Parking Brake Pedal (5) Adjusting Nut
(2) Parking Release Lever (6) Collar
(3) Brake Rod (7) Brake Lever
(4) Lock Nut
9Y1210272BRS0006US0
5-S4 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM BRAKES

(1) Brake Pedal [B1220]
(1) External Snap Ring (4) Parking Brake Lever (7) Clutch Pedal (10) Pin
(2) Return Spring (5) Return Spring (8) Pin (11) Brake Pedal, L.H.
(3) Brake Rod (6) Brake Pedal Shaft (9) Clutch Pedal Rod (12) Brake Pedal, R.H.
1. Remove the cotter pins of brake rods (3) and pull out the brake rods (3).
2. Remove the return spring (2), (5).
3. Remove the external snap ring (1) at the end of the brake pedal shaft (6).
4. Remove the pin (10) of the brake pedal, L.H. (11).
5. Remove the clutch pedal rod (9).
6. Pull the right and left brake pedals from the brake pedal shaft (6).
7. Tap out the brake pedal shaft (6) to the left, and remove it with the clutch pedal (7).
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the brake pedal shaft (6).
9Y1210272BRS0018US0
5-S5 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM BRAKES
(2) Brake Pedal [B1620 and B1820]
(1) External Snap Ring (6) Parking Brake Rod, L.H. (11) Parking Release Lever (16) Clutch Pedal Rod
(2) Return Spring (7) Parking Brake Lever, L.H. (12) Return Spring (17) Pin
(3) Brake Rod (8) Pin (13) Brake Pedal Shaft (18) Brake Pedal, L.H.
(4) Parking Brake Rod, R.H. (9) Parking Brake Rod 2 (14) Clutch Pedal (19) Brake Pedal, R.H.
(5) Parking Brake Lever, R.H. (10) Parking Brake Pedal (15) Pin
1. Remove the cotter pins of brake rods (3) and pull out the brake rods (3).
2. Remove the return spring (2), (12).
3. Remove the external snap ring (1) at the end of the brake pedal shaft (13).
4. Remove the pin (17) of the brake pedal, L.H. (18).
5. Remove the clutch pedal rod (16).
6. Pull the right and left brake pedals from the brake pedal shaft (13).
7. Tap out the brake pedal shaft (13) to the left, and remove it with the clutch pedal (14).
8. Remove the snap pins of parking brake rods (4), (6) and pull out the parking brake rod (4), (6).
9. Remove the pin (8) of the parking brake lever, L.H. (7) and remove the parking brake rod 2 (9).
10. Remove the parking brake lever, L.H. (7) and pull out the parking brake lever, R.H. (5).
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the brake pedal shaft (13) and parking brake lever, R.H. (5).
9Y1210272BRS0019US0
5-S6 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM BRAKES
(3) Separating Rear Axle Case

(When refilling)
IMPORTANT
10.5 L
2.31 Imp.gals

9Y1210272ENS0004US0

NOTE
first.
9Y1210272TRS0006US0
5-S7 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM BRAKES
Rear Wheels
1. Place a jack under the transmission case.
2. Loosen the rear wheel cotter setting bolt and nut (1).
3. Take out the wheel hub pin (2).
4. Take out the rear wheel (1).
IMPORTANT
• When re-fitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts to the
following torques and then recheck them after driving the
tractor approx. 200 m (200 yards).
(When reassembling)
123 to 147 N·m
Rear wheel cotter setting
12.6 to 15.0 kgf·m
bolt and nut
91 to 108 lbf·ft
Tightening torque
108 to 125 N·m
Rear wheel hub mounting
11.0 to 12.8 kgf·m
nut
80 to 93 lbf·ft
(1) Rear Wheel (3) Cotter Setting Bolt

(2) Wheel Hub Pin
9Y1210272RAS0004US0
Rear Axle Case (Left Hand Side)

1. Remove the brake rod, L.H. (1) with spring (2).
2. Remove the parking brake rod, L.H. (3). [Except B1220]
3. Remove the pin (5) and parking brake arm (6). [Except B1220]
4. Remove the rear axle case, L.H. (4).
(When reassembling)
40 to 45 N·m
screw
29 to 33 lbf·ft
(1) Brake Rod, L.H. (4) Rear Axle Case, L.H.

(2) Spring (5) Pin [Except B1220]
(3) Parking Brake Rod, L.H. (6) Parking Brake Arm [Except B1220]
[Except B1220]
9Y1210272RAS0005US0
5-S8 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM BRAKES
Rear Axle Case (Right Hand Side)
1. Remove the brake rod, R.H. (2) with spring (3).
2. Remove the parking brake rod, R.H. (1). [Except B1220]
3. Remove the pin (6), then remove the parking brake shaft (4).
[Except B1220]
4. Remove the rear axle case, R.H. (5).
(When reassembling)
40 to 45 N·m
screw
29 to 33 lbf·ft
(1) Parking Brake Rod, R.H. (4) Parking Brake Shaft [Except B1220]
[Except B1220] (5) Rear Axle Case, R.H.
(2) Brake Rod, R.H. (6) Pin [Except B1220]
(3) Spring
9Y1210272RAS0006US0
5-S9 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM BRAKES
(4) Disassembling Rear Axle Case

Differential Lock Shift Fork, Differential Lock Clutch (Right
Side Only), 58T Gear and Rear Axle
1. Remove the spring (1).
2. Draw out the differential lock shift fork (2) and differential lock
clutch (3)
3. Remove the external snap ring (6) and remove the bearing (5).
4. Draw out the 58T gear (4) from the rear axle (7).
5. Tap out the rear axle (7) to the outside of the rear axle case.
(1) Spring (5) Bearing
(2) Differential Lock Shift Fork (6) External Snap Ring
(3) Differential Lock Clutch (7) Rear Axle
(4) 58T Gear
9Y1210272RAS0007US0
Brake Assembly
2. Remove the brake shaft (2) with brake discs.
(When reassembling)
• When installing the internal snap ring (1) to rear axle case (3) as
shown in the figure.
• When installing the bearing holder (4) to the rear axle case (3),
do not forget to install the straight pin (5).
(1) Internal Snap Ring (4) Bearing Holder
(2) Brake Shaft (5) Straight Pin
(3) Rear Axle Case
9Y1210272BRS0007US0
Brake Discs and Friction Plate

1. Remove the external snap ring (1), and remove the brake discs
and friction plate.
(Reference)
• 2 brake discs and 1 friction plates.
(When reassembling)
• Install the brake discs with their holes (2) deviation at less than
1/3 of the total hole area.
(1) External Snap Ring (2) Hole
9Y1210272BRS0008US0
5-S10 (EU)
B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM BRAKES
[3] SERVICING
Brake Cam Lever Movement
1. Move the brake cam lever by hand to check the movement.
2. If the movement is heavy, refine the brake cam with emery
paper.
9Y1210272BRS0014US0
Cam Plate Flatness and Bearing Holder Wear

1. Place a straightedge of 150 mm (5.91 in.) or more in length on
the contacting surface of the cam plate and the bearing holder.
2. Inspect the friction surface of the cam plate and the bearing
holder with the straightedge, and determine if a 0.30 mm
(0.0118 in.) feeler gauge will fit on the part of wear.
3. If it will fit, resurface.
9Y1210272BRS0015US0
Height of Cam Plate and Ball

1. Measure the dimensions of the cam plate with the ball installed.
2. If the measurement is less than the allowable limit, replace the
cam plate and balls.
3. Inspect the ball holes of cam plate for uneven wear.
4. If the uneven wear is found, replace it.
22.89 to 22.99 mm
Height of cam plate and 0.9012 to 0.9051 in.
ball 22.40 mm
Allowable limit
0.8819 in.
9Y1210272BRS0016US0
Brake Disc and Friction Plate Wear
1. Measure the brake disc thickness and the friction plate
thickness with an outside micrometer.
2. If the thickness is less than the allowable limit, replace it.
3.3 to 3.5 mm
0.130 to 0.138 in.
Brake disc thickness
3.0 mm
Allowable limit
0.118 in.
1.92 to 2.08 mm
0.0758 to 0.0819 in.
Friction plate thickness
1.52 mm
Allowable limit
0.0598 in.
9Y1210272BRS0017US0
5-S11 (EU)
6 FRONT AXLE

MECHANISM
CONTENTS
1. STRUCTURE.............................................................................................................................. 6-M1

B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM FRONT AXLE
1. STRUCTURE
(1) Axle (6) Bevel Gear Case (11) Spiral Bevel Pinion (16) Differential Side Gear
(2) Axle Flange (7) Differential Yoke Shaft, L.H. (12) Front Axle Bracket, Front (17) Bevel Gear Shaft
(3) Bevel Gear (8) Front Axle Case (13) Differential Yoke Shaft, R.H. (18) Bevel Gear
(4) Bevel Gear (9) Differential Gear Assembly (14) Front Axle Bracket, Rear (19) Bevel Gear Case
(5) Bevel Gear (10) Differential Pinion Gear (15) Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft
The front axle of the 4WD is constructed as shown above. Power is transmitted from the transmission case
through the propeller shaft to the spiral bevel pinion shaft (15), then to the spiral bevel gear (11) and to the differential
side gear (19).
The power through the differential side gear is transmitted to the differential yoke shaft (7), (13), and to the bevel
gear shaft (17) through the bevel gears (4), (5) in the bevel gear case (6).
The revolution is greatly reduced by the bevel gears (18), (3), then the power is transmitted to the axle (1).
The differential system allows each wheel to rotate at a different speed to make turning easier.
9Y1210272FAM0001US0
6-M1 (EU)
SERVICING
CONTENTS
2. SERVICING SPECIFICATION ....................................................................................................6-S2
(1) Separating Front Axle......................................................................................................6-S4
(2) Disassembling Front Axle................................................................................................6-S6
[2] SERVICING .........................................................................................................................6-S10

1. TROUBLESHOOTING
Reference
Page
Front Wheels Wander Tire pressure uneven Adjust G-49
to Right or Left Clearance between front axle case boss and Replace –
front axle bracket bushing (front, rear) excessive
Tie-rod end loose Tighten –
Air sucked in power steering circuit Bleed –
Front Wheels Cam Front wheel driving gears in front axle gear case Replace 6-S7
Not Be Driven broken
Universal joint broken Replace 3-S9,
3-S15
Front wheel drive gears in transmission broken Replace 3-S18
Front differential gear broken Replace 6-S9
Coupling displaced Reassembling –
Noise Gear backlash excessive Adjust or replace 6-S11
Oil insufficient Replenish 6-S4
Bearings damaged or broken Replace –
Gears damaged or broken Replace –
9Y1210272FAS0001US0
6-S1 (EU)
2. SERVICING SPECIFICATION
Differential Case to Deferential Pinion Clearance 0.032 to 0.068 mm 0.2 mm
0.00126 to 0.00268 in. 0.0079 in.
• Differential Pinion O.D. 15.000 to 15.018 mm –

0.59056 to 0.59125 in.
• Differential Case I.D. 14.950 to 14.968 mm –

0.5889 to 0.58929 in.
Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft Turning Torque 0.8 to 1.0 N·m –
0.08 to 0.10 kgf·m
0.59 to 0.73 lbf·ft
Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft to Spiral Bevel Backlash 0.1 to 0.3 mm –
Gear 0.004 to 0.012 in.
9T Bevel Gear to 23T Bevel Gear Backlash 0.1 to 0.3 mm –
0.004 to 0.012 in.
Front Axle Case Boss to Bracket (Front) Clearance 0.125 to 0.280 mm 0.45 mm
0.0049 to 0.0110 in. 0.018 in.
• Front Axle Case Boss O.D. 49.950 to 49.975 mm –

1.9665 to 1.9675 in.
• Bracket I.D. 50.10 to 50.23 mm –

1.9722 to 1.9774 in.
Front Axle Case Boss to Bracket (Rear) Clearance 0.090 to 0.250 mm 0.45 mm
0.0035 to 0.0098 in. 0.018 in.
• Front Axle Case Boss O.D. 64.94 to 64.97 mm –

2.5567 to 2.5579 in.
• Bracket I.D. 65.06 to 65.19 mm –

2.5614 to 2.5665 in.
9Y1210272FAS0002US0
6-S2 (EU)
Front wheel mounting nut 78 to 90 7.9 to 9.2 58 to 66
Slotted nut 18 to 35 1.9 to 3.5 14 to 25
Front axle bracket mounting screw 126 to 150 12.9 to 15.2 93.0 to 110
Bevel gear case mounting screw 78 to 90 7.9 to 9.2 58 to 66
Knuckle arm mounting screw 78 to 90 7.9 to 9.2 58 to 66
Axle flange mounting screw 48 to 56 4.9 to 5.7 36 to 41
9Y1210272FAS0003US0
6-S3 (EU)

(1) Separating Front Axle
Draining Front Axle Case Oil
1. Place the oil pans underneath the front axle case.
2. Remove the both right and left hand side drain plugs (2) and
filling plug (1) to drain the oil.
3. After draining, reinstall the drain plugs (2).
IMPORTANT
• Use KUBOTA SUPPER UDT fluid or SAE 80, 90 gear oil.
Refer to "LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT". (See page
G-9.)
3.4 L
Oil Capacity 3.6 U.S.qts
3.0 Imp.qts
(1) Filling Plug with Dipstick (A) Oil level with acceptable within
(2) Drain Plug this range.
9Y1210272FAS0005US0
Universal Joint
the rear.
(When reassembling)
joint.
9Y1210272ENS0009US0
6-S4 (EU)
Front Wheel and Drag Link
1. Place the disassembling stand under the front axle frame.
2. Remove the front wheels (2).
3. Remove the drag link (1) from the knuckle arm.
(When reassembling)
IMPORTANT
• Install the cotter pin as shown in the figure.
78 to 90 N·m
Front wheel mounting nut 7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m
58 to 66 lbf·ft
Tightening torque
18 to 35 N·m
Slotted nut 1.9 to 3.5 kgf·m
14 to 25 lbf·ft
(1) Drag Link (3) Slotted Nut

(2) Front Wheel
9Y1210272FAS0006US0
Front Axle Assembly

1. Lift up the front side of tractor and place the disassembling
stand under the front axle.
2. Remove the front axle brackets (Front side and rear side)
mounting screws.
3. Separating the front axle from the front axle frame.
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the splines of the propeller shaft and coupling.
126 to 150 N·m
Front axle bracket
mounting screw
93.0 to 110 lbf·ft
9Y1210272FAS0007US0
6-S5 (EU)
(2) Disassembling Front Axle

Tie-rod and Axle Bracket
1. Remove the slotted nut and remove the tie-rod (3).
2. Remove the front axle brackets (1), (2).
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the O-ring (4), (5), (6).
• After tightening the slotted nut (7) to the specified torque, install
the cotter pin as shown in the figure.
(1) Front Axle Bracket (Front) (5) O-ring
(2) Front Axle Bracket (Rear) (6) O-ring
(3) Tie-rod (7) Slotted Nut
(4) O-ring
9Y1210272FAS0008US0
Bevel Gear Case and Front Gear Case

1. Remove the bevel gear case mounting screws.
2. Remove the bevel gear case (1) and front gear case (4) as a unit
from the front axle case (3).
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the O-ring (2) and take care not to damage it.
• Do not interchange right and left bevel gear case assemblies
and right and left gear case assemblies.
78 to 90 N·m
Bevel gear case mounting
screw
58 to 66 lbf·ft
(1) Bevel Gear Case (3) Front Axle Case

(2) O-ring (4) Front Gear Case
9Y1210272FAS0010US0
6-S6 (EU)
Front Gear Case
1. Remove the knuckle arm (Left side only).
2. Remove the axle flange (2).
3. Remove the external snap ring (3).
4. Remove the bevel gear case (4) from front gear case (1).
5. Remove the oil seal (5).
6. Remove the ball bearing 1 (6).
7. Remove the internal snap ring (7) and remove the ball bearing
2 (8).
8. Remove the bevel gear shaft (9) with ball bearing.
(When reassembling)
1. Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 1206D or equivalent) to joint
face of the axle flange (2) and front gear case (1) after eliminate
the water, oil and stuck liquid gasket.
2. Tighten the axle flange mounting screws and nuts diagonally in
several steps.
3. Install the oil seal (5) of bevel gear case, noting its direction as
78 to 90 N·m
Knuckle arm mounting
7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m
screw
58 to 66 lbf·ft
Tightening torque
48 to 56 N·m
Axle flange mounting screw 4.9 to 5.7 kgf·m
36 to 41 lbf·ft
(1) Front Gear Case (6) Ball Bearing 1

(2) Axle Flange (7) Internal Snap Ring
(3) External Snap Ring (8) Ball Bearing 2
(4) Bevel Gear Case (9) Bevel Gear Shaft
(5) Oil Seal
9Y1210272FAS0011US0
6-S7 (EU)
Bevel Gear Case Gears
2. Take out the bevel gears (4), (5) with ball bearings (3), (6) and
shims (2).
(When reassembling)
• Install the shims (2) to their original position.
(Reference)
• Thickness of adjusting shims :
0.8 mm (0.031 in.)
1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
1.2 mm (0.47 in.)
1.4 mm (0.055 in.)
(1) Internal Snap Ring (5) Bevel Gear
(2) Shim (6) Ball Bearing
(3) Ball Bearing (7) Bevel Gear Case
(4) Bevel Gear
9Y1210272FAS0012US0
Axle
1. Remove the bearing (1).
2. Take out the bevel gear (2).
3. Take out the collar (3).
4. Tap out the axle (4).
(When reassembling)
• Install the oil seal (7) of axle flange (6), noting its direction as
• Install the shims (8), (9) to their original position.
(Reference)
• Thickness of adjusting shim (8) :
0.8 mm (0.031 in.)
1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
1.2 mm (0.47 in.)
1.4 mm (0.055 in.)
0.8 mm (0.031 in.)
1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
1.2 mm (0.47 in.)
(1) Ball Bearing (6) Axle Flange
(2) Bevel Gear (7) Oil Seal
(3) Collar (8) Shim
(4) Axle (9) Shim
(5) Ball Bearing
9Y1210272FAS0013US0
6-S8 (EU)
Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft and Differential Gear Assembly
2. Tap out the spiral bevel pinion shaft (2) by the brass rod and
hammer.
3. Take out the differential gear assembly (3) with differential yoke
shafts, from right side of front axle case (4).
4. Remove the external snap ring (6), and then remove the ball
bearings (7), (9).
(When reassembling)
• Install the adjusting shims (5) to their original position.
(Reference)
0.6 mm (0.02 in.)
0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
1.2 mm (0.047 in.)
1.4 mm (0.055 in.)
1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
(1) Internal Snap Ring (6) External Snap Ring
(2) Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft (7) Ball Bearing
(3) Differential Gear Assembly (8) Collar
(4) Front Axle Case (9) Ball Bearing
(5) Adjusting Shim
9Y1210272FAS0014US0
Differential Gear
1. Tap out the spring pins (5) and remove the external snap ring
(2), and then pull out the both differential yoke shafts (1), (9).
2. Remove the differential side gears (4).
3. Remove the differential pinions (6).
4. Remove the spiral bevel gear (8), and bearings (7), (11).
NOTE
• Arrange the parts to know their original position.
(When reassembling)
• Apply molybdenum disulfide (Three Bond 1901 or equivalent) to
the inner circumferential surface of the differential side gears (4)
and differential pinions (6).
• Be sure to install the spring pins (5) as shown in the figure.
(1) Differential Yoke Shaft RH (7) Ball Bearing
(2) External Snap Ring (8) Spiral Bevel Gear
(3) Thrust Collar (9) Differential Yoke Shaft LH
(4) Differential Side Gear (10) Differential Case
(5) Spring Pin (11) Ball Bearing
(6) Differential Pinion
9Y1210272FAS0015US0
6-S9 (EU)
[2] SERVICING
Clearance between Differential Case and Differential Pinion
1. Measure the differential pinion boss O.D. with an outside
micrometer.
2. Measure the differential case bore I.D. with a cylinder gauge,
calculate the clearance.
0.032 to 0.068 mm
0.00126 to 0.00268 in.
differential case and
differential pinion 0.2 mm
Allowable limit
0.0079 in.
Differential case bore 15.000 to 15.018 mm

I.D. 0.59056 to 0.59125 in.
14.950 to 14.968 mm
Differential pinion O.D. Allowable limit
0.58859 to 0.58929 in.
9Y1210272FAS0009US0
Backlash between 10T Bevel Gear and 16T Bevel Gear
1. Stick a strip of fuse to three spots on the 16T bevel gear (1) with
grease.
2. Fix the front axle case, bevel gear case and front gear case.
3. Turn the axle.
4. Remove the bevel gear case from front axle case and measure
the thickness of the fuses with an outside micrometer.
5. If the backlash is not within the factory specifications, adjust with
shim (3).
Backlash between 10T
0.1 to 0.3 mm
bevel gear and 16T Factory specification
0.004 to 0.012 in.
bevel gear
(Reference)
• Thickness of adjusting shims (3) :
0.8 mm (0.031 in.)
1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
1.2 mm (0.047 in.)
1.4 mm (0.055 in.)
• Tooth contact : More than 35 %
(1) 16T Bevel Gear (3) Shim
(2) 10T Bevel Gear
9Y1210272FAS0016US0
6-S10 (EU)
Backlash between Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft and Spiral Bevel
Gear
1. Set a dia gauge (lever type) with its finger on the spline of spiral
bevel pinion shaft.
2. Measure the backlash be moving the spiral bevel pinion shaft by
hand lightly.
3. If the backlash is not within the factory specifications, select the
adjusting shim (3).
4. Adjust the backlash properly by repeating the above
procedures.
Backlash between spiral
0.1 to 0.3 mm
bevel pinion shaft and Factory specification
0.004 to 0.012 in.
spiral bevel gear
(Reference)
• Above factory specification should be measured on the tooth of
spiral bevel pinion. When measuring the backlash on the spline
of its shaft, factory specification will be 0.0571 to 0.1714 mm
(0.00225 to 0.00675 in.).
• Thickness of adjusting shims (3):
0.6 mm (0.02 in.)
0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
1.2 mm (0.047 in.)
1.4 mm (0.055 in.)
1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
(1) Spiral Bevel Gear (3) Adjusting Shim
(2) Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft
9Y1210272FAS0017US0
6-S11 (EU)
7 STEERING

MECHANISM
CONTENTS
1. STRUCTURE.............................................................................................................................. 7-M1
[1] STEERING LINKAGE........................................................................................................... 7-M1
[2] POWER STEERING............................................................................................................. 7-M2

B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM STEERING
1. STRUCTURE
[1] STEERING LINKAGE
(1) Tie-rod (4) Pitman Arm
(2) Knuckle Arm (5) Steering Wheel
(3) Steering Gear Box (6) Drag Link
9Y1210272STM0001US0
7-M1 (EU)
[2] POWER STEERING

B1820 is equipped with integral type power steering that consists of rotary type control valve with torsion bar.
Hydraulic oil flow is shown as follows.
(1) Valve Housing
(2) Gear Case
(3) Sector Gear Shaft
(4) Rack (Piston)
(5) Worm Shaft
(6) Control Valve
(7) Relief Valve
(8) Steering Wheel
(9) Hydraulic Pump
(10) Oil Filter
(11) Transmission Case
A : Suction Oil
B : Low Pressure Oil
9Y1210272STM0002US0
7-M2 (EU)
SERVICING
CONTENTS
(1) Manual Steering Model....................................................................................................7-S6
(2) Power Steering Model .....................................................................................................7-S7
(3) Hydraulic Pump for Power Steering ................................................................................7-S9
[2] PREPARATION ...................................................................................................................7-S10
(1) Hydraulic Pump for Power Steering [Only B1820].........................................................7-S10
(2) Separating Manual Steering Controller Box Assembly..................................................7-S11
(1) Hydraulic Pump for Power Steering [Only B1820].........................................................7-S14
(2) Manual Steering Controller Body [If Equipped] .............................................................7-S15
(3) Power Steering Controller Body [Only B1820] ..............................................................7-S17
[4] SERVICING .........................................................................................................................7-S19
(1) Hydraulic Pump for Power Steering ..............................................................................7-S19
(2) Manual Steering Controller Body [If Equipped] .............................................................7-S20
(3) Power Steering Controller Body [Only B1820] ..............................................................7-S21

1. TROUBLESHOOTING
MANUAL STEERING MODEL
Reference
Page
Excessive Steering Backlash between sector gear shaft and ball nut Adjust 7-S6
Wheel Play too large
Steering linkage worn Replace –
Sector gear shaft worn Replace 7-S16
Tractor Pulls to Right Tire pressure uneven Adjust G-49
or Left Steering wheel play too small Adjust 7-S6
Front Wheels Steering linkage worn Replace –
Vibration
7-S1 (EU)
POWER STEERING MODEL
Reference
Page
Excessive Steering Backlash between sector gear shaft and rack Adjust 7-S7
Wheel Play (piston) too large
Steering linkage worn Replace –
Sector gear shaft worn Replace 7-S17
Tractor Pulls to Right Tire pressure uneven Adjust G-49
or Left Steering wheel play too small Adjust 7-S7
Front Wheels Steering linkage worn Replace –
Vibration
Hard Steering Transmission fluid improper or insufficient Change G-30
Oil leak from pipe joint Retighten –
Hydraulic pump malfunctioning Replace 7-S10
Improper relief valve adjustment Adjust 7-S8
Relief valve malfunctioning Replace 7-S8
Valve housing and sleeve malfunctioning Replace 7-S18
Seals in the steering gear box damaged Replace 7-S18
Backlash between sector gear shaft and rack Adjust 7-S7
(piston) too small
Air in the hydraulic pipes Air vent –
Low Operating Hydraulic pump malfunctioning Replace 7-S10
Pressure Improper relief valve adjustment Adjust 7-S8
Relief valve malfunctioning Replace 7-S8
Seals in the steering gear box damaged Replace 7-S18
Rack (piston) malfunctioning Replace rack (piston) 7-S18
assembly
Oil leak from pipe or pipe broken Replace –
Steering Wheel Does Valve housing and sleeve jammed Repair or Replace 7-S18
Not Return to Neutral Valve housing oil seal damaged Replace 7-S18
Position
Steering Force Insufficient oil Replenish G-9
Fluctuates Insufficient bleeding Bleed –
Valve housing and sleeve malfunctioning Replace 7-S18
Noise Insufficient oil Replenish G-9
Air sucked in pump from suction circuit Repair –
Pipe deformed Replace –
9Y1210272STS0001US0
7-S2 (EU)
[MANUAL STEERING MODEL]
Steering Wheel Operation Torque Less than –
50 N·m
5.1 kgf·m
37 lbf·ft
Play 5.0 to 30 mm –
0.20 to 1.1 in.
[POWER STEERING MODEL]

HYDRAULIC PUMP FOR POWER STEERING
Pump Delivery At no pressure Above –
9.8 L/min.
2.6 U.S.gals/min.
2.2 Imp.gals/min.
Gear to Casing Clearance – 0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Gear Shaft to Bushing Clearance 0.020 to 0.091 mm 0.12 mm
0.00079 to 0.0035 in. 0.0047 in.
• Bushing I.D. 15.000 to 15.061 mm –

0.59056 to 0.59295 in.
Side Plate Thickness 2.48 to 2.50 mm 2.40 mm
0.0977 to 0.0984 in. 0.0945 in.
7-S3 (EU)

Steering Wheel Less than –
Operation Torque Condition 10 N·m
• Engine Speed 7.0 kgf·m
Maximum 7.4 lbf·ft
• Oil Temperature
45 to 55 °C (113 to 131 °F)
Play 5.0 to 30 mm –
0.20 to 1.1 in.
Power Steering Relief Valve 9.30 to 9.80 MPa –
Steering Pressure Condition 94.9 to 100 kgf/cm2
• Engine Speed 1350 to 1420 psi
Approx. 2800 min-1 (rpm)
• Oil Temperature
45 to 55 °C (113 to 131 °F)
Pump Delivery At no load 7.9 L/min. –
2.1 U.S.gals/min.
1.7 Imp.gals/min.
Steering Gear Box to Rack (Piston) Clearance 0.030 to 0.079 mm 0.14 mm
0.0012 to 0.0031 in. 0.0055 in.
• Gear Box Bore I.D. 61.000 to 61.030 mm –

2.4016 to 2.4027 in.
• Rack (Piston) O.D. 60.951 to 60.970 mm –

2.3997 to 2.4003 in.
Rack (Piston) Assembly Axial Play 0 to 0.02 mm 0.004 mm
0 to 0.0007 in. 0.002 in.
Valve Housing to Sleeve Clearance 0.17 to 0.28 mm 0.40 mm
0.0067 to 0.011 in. 0.016 in.
• Sleeve O.D. 35.77 to 35.83 mm –

1.409 to 1.410 in.
• Valve Housing I.D. 36.00 to 36.05 mm –

1.418 to 1.419 in.
Sector Gear Shaft to Rack (Piston) Backlash Less than –
Deflection 0.30 mm
measured at 0.012 in.
pitman arm end
9Y1210272STS0002US0
7-S4 (EU)
[MANUAL STEERING MODEL]
Pitman arm mounting nut 200 to 207 20.4 to 21.1 148 to 152
Steering control box mounting screw 64 to 74 6.6 to 7.5 48 to 54
Steering column mounting nut 24 to 28 2.4 to 2.8 18 to 20
Side cover mounting screw 24 to 28 2.4 to 2.8 18 to 20
Drag link and slotted nut 18 to 35 1.9 to 3.5 14 to 25
[POWER STEERING MODEL]

Drag link and slotted nut 18 to 35 1.9 to 3.5 14 to 25
Power steering delivery pipe nut 65 to 75 6.7 to 7.6 48 to 55
Return pipe nut 34 to 39 3.5 to 3.9 25 to 28
Power steering controller assembly mounting screw 78 to 90 7.9 to 9.2 58 to 66
Steering column mounting screw 28 2.9 21
Hydraulic pump cover mounting screw 35 to 39 3.5 to 4.0 26 to 29
Pitman arm mounting nut 140 to 150 14.3 to 15.3 103 to 111
Side cover mounting screw 20 to 29 2.0 to 3.0 15 to 21
Valve housing mounting hex. head screw 40 to 49 4.0 to 5.0 29 to 36
Plug 8.9 to 10 0.90 to 1.1 6.5 to 7.9
Relief pressure adjusting screw lock nut 49 to 78 5.0 to 8.0 37 to 57
9Y1210272STS0003US0
7-S5 (EU)

(1) Manual Steering Model
Steering Wheel Play
1. Turn the front wheels straight ahead.
2. Move the steering wheel back and forth until slight movement of
pitman arm is seen. Measure maximum play of steering wheel
at outer rim.
3. If the play is not within the factory specifications, turn the
adjusting screw to adjust.
5.0 to 30 mm
Steering wheel play Factory specification
0.20 to 1.1 in.
(Adjust)
1. Remove the steering wheel.
2. Remove the meter panel and panel under cover.
3. Remove the axle lever retaining screw.
4. Install the steering wheel.
5. Loosen the lock nut and turn the adjusting screw with a screw
driver to adjust the play. When the adjusting screw is turned
clockwise, the play decreases.
6. After adjustment, fix it with the lock nut while holding the
adjusting screw.
9Y1210272STS0004US0
Steering Wheel Operating Torque

1. Park the tractor on flat concrete place.
2. Set a spring balance to the steering wheel to measure the
operating torque.
3. If the measurement exceeds the factory specification, check the
steering controller assembly.
Less than
Steering wheel operating 50 N·m
torque 5.1 kgf·m
37 Ibf·ft
Condition
• Tractor by itself (without any implement and weight)
9Y1210272STS0005US0
7-S6 (EU)
(2) Power Steering Model

Steering Wheel Play
1. Turn the front wheels straight ahead.
2. Move the steering wheel back and forth until slight movement of
pitman arm is seen. Measure maximum play of steering wheel
at outer rim.
3. If the play is not within the factory specifications, turn the
adjusting screw to adjust.
5.0 to 30 mm
Steering wheel play Factory specification
0.20 to 1.1 in.
(Adjust)
1. Remove the steering wheel.
2. Remove the meter panel and panel under cover.
3. Remove the axle lever retaining screw.
4. Install the steering wheel.
5. Loosen the lock nut and turn the adjusting screw with a screw
driver to adjust the play. When the adjusting screw is turned
clockwise, the play decreases.
6. After adjustment, fix it with the lock nut while holding the
adjusting screw.
9Y1210272STS0004US0
Steering Wheel Operating Torque

1. Park the tractor on flat concrete place.
2. Start the engine. After warming up, set the engine speed at
approx. 2800 min-1 (rpm).
3. Set a spring balance to the steering wheel to measure the
operating torque.
4. If the measurement exceeds the factory specification, check the
suction line, delivery line, and the performance of hydraulic
pump. And then, check the power steering assembly.
Less than
Steering wheel operating 10 N·m
torque 1.0 kgf·m
2.2 Ibf·ft
Condition
• Engine speed
• Oil temperature
45 to 55 °C (113 to 131 °F)
• Tractor by itself (without any implement and weight)
9Y1210272STS0007US0
7-S7 (EU)
Relief Valve Setting Pressure
1. Open the bonnet and remove the front grille.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
3. Remove the steering wheel (1) and then remove the meter
panel and panel under cover.
4. Remove the plug (3) of power steering body and then set the
relief valve pressure tester (use adaptor D).
5. Reassemble the meter panel and steering wheel (1).
6. Start the engine. After warming up, set the engine speed at
approx. 2800 min-1 (rpm).
7. Fully turn the steering wheel to the left end to read the relief
pressure. After reading, stop the engine.
8. If the pressure is not factory specification, loosen the lock nut
and adjust by adjusting screw (2).
(Reference)
• Replace the hydraulic pump if pressure does not rise in 9.30 to
9.80 MPa (94.9 to 100 kgf/cm2, 1350 to 1420 psi).
9.30 to 9.80 MPa
Power steering relief
Factory specification 94.9 to 100 kgf/cm2
valve setting pressure
1350 to 1420 psi
Condition
• Engine speed
• Oil temperature
45 to 55 °C (113 to 131 °F)
(1) Steering Wheel (3) Plug
(2) Adjusting Screw
9Y1210272STS0008US0
7-S8 (EU)
(3) Hydraulic Pump for Power Steering

Flowmeter Connecting and Test Preparation
IMPORTANT
• When using a flowmeter other than KUBOTA specified
flowmeter (Code No. 07916-52792), be sure to use the
instructions with that flowmeter.
• In this hook-up, there is no relief valve. Therefore while
testing, do not close the flowmeter loading valve
completely.
1. Remove the steering wheel, meter panel and panel under
cover.
2. Remove the power steering delivery pipe.
3. Set the adaptor 66 (2) to the hydraulic pump (3).
4. Connect the hydraulic test hose (1) (Code No. 07916-52651) to
the adaptor 66 and flowmeter (Code No. 07916-52791) inlet
port.
5. Connect the another hydraulic test hose (4) to flowmeter outlet
port and transmission oil filling port.
6. Open the flowmeter loading valve completely. (Turn
counterclockwise).
7. Start the engine and set the engine speed at 2800 min-1 (rpm).
8. Slowly close the loading valve to generate the pressure approx.
9.8 MPa (100 kgf/cm2, 1400 psi).
9. Hold in this condition until oil temperature reaches approx.
50 °C (122 °F).
(Reference)
• Adaptor is included in the adaptor set (Code No. 07916-54031).
(1) Hydraulic Test Hose (3) Hydraulic Pump
(2) Adaptor 66 (4) Hydraulic Test Hose
9Y1210272STS0009US0
Pump Test
NOTE
• Before pump testing, perform the flowmeter connecting
and test preparation.
1. Open the loading valve completely.
2. Start the engine and set at approx. 2800 min-1 (rpm).
3. Read and note the pump delivery at no pressure.
(Reference)
Above
Hydraulic pump delivery 7.9 L/min.
at no pressure 2.1 U.S.gals/min.
1.7 Imp.gals/min.
Condition
• Engine speed
• Rated pressure
9.8 MPa (100 kgf/cm2, 1400 psi)
• Oil temperature
50 °C (122 °F)
9Y1210272STS0010US0
7-S9 (EU)
[2] PREPARATION
(1) Hydraulic Pump for Power Steering [Only B1820]
IMPORTANT
• The hydraulic pump is precision machined and assembled : If disassemble once, it may be unable to
maintain its original performance. Therefore, when the hydraulic pump fails, replacement should be
carried out with the hydraulic pump assembled except when emergency repair is unavoidable.
• When repair is required, follow the disassembly and servicing procedures shown below with utmost care.
• Be sure to test the hydraulic pump with a flowmeter before disassembling.
• After reassembly, be sure to perform break-in operation and ensure that there is nothing abnormal with
the hydraulic pump.
9Y1210272STS0011US0
Remove Hydraulic Pump
1. Open the bonnet (1) then remove the front grille (3), side cover
(R.H.) and disconnect the battery negative cable (2).
2. Disconnect the fuel filter assembly (8) and then remove the
lever link assembly (9).
3. Disconnect the power steering delivery pipe (4).
4. Disconnect the 3 point hitch delivery pipe (7) and suction hose
(5).
(When reassembling)
NOTE
• For fastening hydraulic pipe nut, use two wrenches. Hold
the fitting with a wrench, turn the pipe nut another wrench
to avoid damage at fitting installed part.
• When disconnecting battery cords, disconnect the
negative cord first. When connecting, positive cord first.
35 to 45 N·m
pipe nut
26 to 33 lbf·ft
(1) Bonnet (6) Hydraulic Pump

(2) Battery Negative Cable (7) 3 Point Hitch Delivery Pipe
(3) Front Grille (8) Fuel Filter Assembly
(4) Power Steering Delivery Pipe (9) Lever Link Assembly
[Power Steering Model]
(5) Suction Hose
9Y1210272STS0012US0
7-S10 (EU)
(2) Separating Manual Steering Controller Box Assembly

NOTE
9Y1210272ENS0001US0
Steering Wheel
(When reassembling)
30 to 49 N·m
nut
22 to 36 lbf·ft

9Y1210272ENS0005US0
lever (1).
under cover (5).
9Y1210272ENS0006US0
7-S11 (EU)
Fuel Tank Assembly
1. Disconnect the fuel hose (1) from fuel filter, then drain fuel
completely.
2. Disconnect the over flow hoses (3) and pull out the hour meter
cable (5).
[Except B1220]
connector (8), starter relay connector (8), regulator connector
and lead wire (13). [Only B1220]
6. Remove the tank frame stay 1 (4) and the tank frame stay 2 (9).
(1) Fuel Hose (10) Fuel Tank Frame
(2) Lead Wire (11) Fuel Tank
(3) Over Flow Hose (12) Key Stop Timer Connector
(4) Tank Frame Stay 1 (13) Lead Wire
(5) Hour Meter Cable (14) Flusher Unit Connector
(6) Fuse Box [Except B1220]
(7) Regulator [Only B1220]
(8) Starter Relay Connector [A] B1220
(9) Tank Frame Stay 2 [B] B1620 and B1820
9Y1210272STS0013US0
7-S12 (EU)
Manual Steering Controller Box Assembly [If Equipped]
1. Remove the flusher unit (1) from the steering post.
2. Remove the parking brake lever rod. [Only B1220]
3. Disconnect the drag link (4) from the pitman arm (3).
4. Remove the manual steering controller box assembly (2).
IMPORTANT
NOTE
the fitting with a wrench, turn the pipe nut with another
wrench to avoid damage at fitting installed part.
18 to 35 N·m
14 to 25 lbf·ft
Tightening torque
64 to 74 N·m
Manual steering controller
6.6 to 7.5 kgf·m
assembly mounting nut
48 to 54 lbf·ft
(1) Flusher Unit (4) Drag Link

(2) Manual Steering Controller Box (5) Slotted Nut
Assembly
(3) Pitman Arm
9Y1210272STS0014US0
Power Steering Controller Box Assembly [Only B1820]
1. Remove the flusher unit (1) from the steering post.
2. Disconnect the return pipe (6) from the power steering controller
box (2).
3. Remove the power steering delivery pipe (5).
4. Disconnect the drag link (4) from the pitman arm (3).
5. Remove the power steering controller box assembly (2).
IMPORTANT
NOTE
the fitting with a wrench, turn the pipe nut with another
wrench to avoid damage at fitting installed part.
35 to 45 N·m
3.6 to 4.5 kgf·m
pipe nut
26 to 33 lbf·ft
35 to 45 N·m
Return pipe nut 3.6 to 4.5 kgf·m
26 to 33 lbf·ft
Tightening torque
18 to 35 N·m
14 to 25 lbf·ft
64 to 74 N·m
Power steering controller
6.6 to 7.5 kgf·m
assembly mounting screw
48 to 54 lbf·ft
(1) Flusher Unit (5) Power Steering Delivery Pipe

(2) Power Steering Controller Box (6) Return Pipe
Assembly (7) Slotted Nut
(3) Pitman Arm
(4) Drag Link
9Y1210272STS0015US0
7-S13 (EU)

(1) Hydraulic Pump for Power Steering [Only B1820]
Hydraulic Pump Cover, Side Plate and Gear
1. Secure the hydraulic pump with a vise, and remove the
hydraulic pump cover.
2. Remove the side plate (5).
3. Remove the drive gear (4) and driven gear (2) from the casing
(1).
(When reassembling)
• Take care not to damage the O-ring.
• Align the holes of the cover and casing.
• Install the side plate, noting its location and direction.
• Install the gears, noting its direction.
35 to 39 N·m
Tightening torque Cover mounting screw 3.5 to 4.0 kgf·m
26 to 29 lbf·ft
(1) Casing (4) Drive Gear

(2) Driven Gear (5) Side Plate
(3) Hydraulic Pump Cover
9Y1210272STS0016US0
7-S14 (EU)
(2) Manual Steering Controller Body [If Equipped]

NOTE
• Replace all the disassembled sealing parts (O-ring, U-seal, oil seal, slipper seal, etc.) with new ones.
• Check all the cleaned-up part for scratches, excessive wear, cracks and other defects. Place them in
order on a clean workbench. Be also careful to keep off dust and dirt.
Steering Column and Pitman Arm
1. Loosen the steering column mounting screw and remove the
steering column (1) with steering shaft and universal joint.
2. Drain the steering gear box oil.
3. Remove the pitman arm mounting nut (2) and remove the
pitman arm (3) with pitman arm puller (Code No. 07909-39011).
(When reassembling)
• Apply liquid lock (Three Bond 1324B or equivalent) to the
steering column mounting screw.
• When reassembling the pitman arm (3) to the sector gear shaft,
according to the following steps 1 to 4.
1. Install the steering wheel temporary to the steering shaft.
2. Turn the steering wheel clockwise to the end.
3. Install the pitman arm (3) to the sector gear shaft, holding the
pitman arm (3) in vertical as shown in the picture left.
4. Tighten the pitman arm mounting nut (2) previously tightening
torque.
24 to 28 N·m
Steering column mounting
2.5 to 2.8 kgf·m
screw
18 to 20 lbf·ft
Tightening torque
200 to 207 N·m
Pitman arm mounting nut 20.4 to 21.1 kgf·m
148 to 152 lbf·ft
(1) Steering Column (A) Turn the Steering Wheel

(2) Pitman Arm Mounting Nut Clockwise
(3) Pitman Arm (B) Pitman Arm in Vertical
9Y1210272STS0017US0
7-S15 (EU)
Side Cover
1. Drain the steering controller box oil.
2. Loosen the lock nut (1).
3. Remove the side cover mounting screws.
4. Adjusting the screw (3) in, to remove the side cover (2).
(When reassembling)
• Apply liquid lock (Three Bond 1206D or equivalent) to joint face
of side cover (2) and steering controller box (4).
• Use KUBOTA SUPER UDT fluid.
Refer to "LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT" (See page
G-9).
0.3 L
Steering gear box Oil capacity 0.3 U.S.qts
0.3 Imp.qts
24 to 28 N·m
Tightening torque Side cover mounting screw 2.4 to 2.8 kgf·m
18 to 20 lbf·ft
(1) Lock Nut (3) Adjusting Screw

(2) Side Cover (4) Controller
9Y1210272STS0018US0
Sector Shaft, Top Cover and Ball Nut Assembly
1. Turn the worn shaft so that sector shaft (1) teeth are aligned with
wider opening in steering box (2).
2. Remove the sector shaft (1).
3. Remove the top cover (4).
4. Remove the top cover (4) mounting screw.
5. Pull the worn shaft (3) with ball nut (1) from the steering gear
box.
(When reassembling)
• Apply liquid lock (Three Bond 1206D or equivalent) to joint face
of top cover (4), steering box (2) and shims.
• Turn the worn shaft so that the ball nut (1) is centered in its
travel. Then, install the sector shaft (3) to center tooth engage
the center of the ball nut (1).
NOTE
• Be sure to check the number of shims used between top
cover and steering gear box.
(1) Ball Nut (3) Sector Shaft
(2) Steering Box (4) Top Cover
9Y1210272STS0019US0
7-S16 (EU)
(3) Power Steering Controller Body [Only B1820]

NOTE
• Replace all the disassembled sealing parts (O-ring, U-seal, oil seal, slipper seal, etc.) with new ones.
• Check all the cleaned-up part for scratches, excessive wear, cracks and other defects. Place them in
order on a clean workbench. Be also careful to keep off dust and dirt.
Steering Column and Pitman Arm
1. Turn the steering shaft several times to drain oil.
2. Loose the steering column mounting screws, and remove the
steering column with steering shaft and universal joint.
(When reassembling)
• Apply liquid lock (Three Bond 1324B or equivalent) to the
steering column mounting screw.
28 N·m
Steering column mounting
Tightening torque 2.9 kgf·m
screw
21 lbf·ft
(1) Steering Column

9Y1210272STS0020US0
Pitman Arm
1. Remove the pitman arm mounting nut and remove the pitman
arm with pitman arm puller (Code No. 07909-39011).
(When reassembling)
IMPORTANT
• Install the pitman arm to the sector gear shaft so that their
marks align.
140 to 150 N·m
Tightening torque Pitman arm mounting nut 14.3 to 15.3 kgf·m
103 to 111 lbf·ft
(1) Alignment Mark (2) Pitman Arm

9Y1210272STS0021US0
Side Cover and Sector Gear Shaft
1. Loosen the lock nut.
2. Remove the side cover mounting screws.
3. Screw in the adjusting screw (1) to remove the side cover.
4. Tap out the sector gear shaft (2) toward the side cover.
(When reassembling)
• Turn the worm shaft so that the rack (piston) is centered in its
travel. Then, install the sector gear shaft so that the center of its
teeth engages the center teeth of the rack (piston).
• Be sure to adjust the backlash between sector gear shaft and
rack (piston).
20 to 29 N·m
Tightening torque Side cover mounting screw 2.0 to 3.0 kgf·m
15 to 21 lbf·ft
(1) Adjusting Screw (2) Sector Gear Shaft

9Y1210272STS0022US0
7-S17 (EU)
Valve Assembly and Rack (Piston)
1. Remove the valve housing mounting hex. head screws.
2. Draw out the valve assembly and rack (piston) as a unit.
(When reassembling)
40 to 49 N·m
Valve housing mounting
hex. head screw
29 to 36 lbf·ft
9Y1210272STS0023US0
Valve Assembly
1. Remove the plug (2).
2. Pull out the worm shaft (3) with sleeve and stub shaft from valve
housing (1).
(When reassembling)
• When tighten the plug, use the PS plug wrench (Refer to G-48).
• Be sure to tighten the plug to specified torque and staking the
plug (2). If the plug is tightened to excessive torque, it may
cause damage to the thrust races and thrust bearings.
8.9 to 10 N·m
Tightening torque Plug 0.90 to 1.1 kgf·m
6.5 to 7.9 lbf·ft
(1) Valve Housing (2) Worm Shaft

(2) Plug
9Y1210272STS0024US0
Disassembling Valve Housing
1. Loosen the lock nut (6) and remove the adjusting screw (5).
2. Remove the relief spring (3) and the relief valve poppet (2).
(When reassembling)
IMPORTANT
• Do not disassemble the relief valve needlessly, since it has
been factory-adjusted.
• If the relief valve is disassembled, replace the adjusting
screw with new one, and after reassembly, be sure to
adjust the setting pressure, then stake the adjusting screw
with a punch.
49 to 78 N·m
Relief pressure adjusting
screw lock nut
37 to 57 lbf·ft
(1) Valve Housing (4) O-ring

(2) Relief Valve Poppet (5) Adjusting Screw
(3) Relief Spring (6) Lock Nut
9Y1210272STS0025US0
7-S18 (EU)
[4] SERVICING
(1) Hydraulic Pump for Power Steering
Clearance between Tip of Gear Tooth and Casing
1. Measure the clearance between gear and casing at several
points with feeler gauge.
2. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the
hydraulic pump assembly.
Clearance between tip of 0.15 mm
Allowable limit
gear tooth and casing 0.0059 in.
9Y1210272STS0027US0
Clearance between Bushing and Shaft

1. Measure the gear shaft O.D. with an outside micrometer.
2. Measure the bushing I.D. with a cylinder gauge.
0.020 to 0.091 mm
Factory spec.
Clearance between 0.00079 to 0.0035 in.
busing and shaft 0.12 mm
Allowable limit
0.0047 in.
15.000 to 15.061 mm
Bushing I.D. Factory spec.
0.59056 to 0.59295 in.
9Y1210272STS0028US0
Side Plate Thickness
1. Measure the side plate thickness with an outside micrometer.
2.48 to 2.50 mm
Allowable limit
0.0945 in.
9Y1210272STS0026US0
7-S19 (EU)
(2) Manual Steering Controller Body [If Equipped]

Bearing and Bearing to Worm Shaft Contact Area
1. Inspect the lower and upper ball bearing and race for roughness
or pitting. If damaged, replace bearing and race.
2. Inspect the lower and upper bearing to worm shaft contact area
for pitting or roughness. Replace parts as necessary.
9Y1210272STS0029US0
Sector Shaft
1. Inspect the sector shaft to steering gear box and side cover
contact areas for wear or scoring.
2. Inspect the teeth area and pitman arm spline for cracks,
chipping or excessive wear. Replace the sector shaft as
necessary.
3. Check the side cover bush and steering gear box bush cracks
or damage. Replace the side and steering gear box.
9Y1210272STS0030US0
Ball Nut
1. Thoroughly clean the worm shaft (2) and ball nut (3). Turn the
ball nut on the shaft, feeling for roughness, binding or sticking.
2. Check the return guide (1) for damage.
3. Inspect the ball nut teeth for excessive wear or roughness.
NOTE
• Do not remove the ball nut from the worn shaft. The two
parts are replaced as a unit only.
(1) Return Guide (3) Ball Nut
(2) Worm Shaft
9Y1210272STS0031US0
7-S20 (EU)
(3) Power Steering Controller Body [Only B1820]

Clearance between Steering Gear Box and Rack (Piston)
1. Measure the steering gear box cylinder I.D. with a cylinder
gauge.
2. Measure the rack (piston) O.D. with an outside micrometer, and
calculate this clearance.
3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the steering
gear box or rack (piston) assembly.
0.030 to 0.079 mm
0.0012 to 0.0031 in.
steering gear box and
rack (piston) 0.14 mm
Allowable limit
0.0055 in.
9Y1210272STS0032US0
Clearance between Valve Housing and Sleeve
1. Measure the valve housing I.D. with a cylinder gauge and the
sleeve O.D. with an outside micrometer, and calculate this
clearance.
2. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the valve
housing or sleeve assembly.
IMPORTANT
• Check to see if the slipper seals of sleeve do not have
excessive wear
0.17 to 0.28 mm
valve housing and sleeve 0.40 mm
Allowable limit
0.016 in.
9Y1210272STS0033US0
Axial Play of Rack (Piston) Assembly
1. Secure the rack (piston) assembly in a vise.
2. Set dial indicator with its finger on the worm shaft of the rack
(piston) assembly.
3. Move the worm shaft axially and measure the play.
4. If the play exceeds the allowable limit, replace the rack (piston)
assembly.
0 to 0.02 mm
Axial play of rack (piston) 0 to 0.0007 in.
assembly 0.04 mm
Allowable limit
0.002 in.
9Y1210272STS0034US0
Backlash between Sector Gear Shaft and Rack (Piston)
1. Attach the pitman arm having no play.
2. Set a dial indicator with its finger on the pitman arm.
3. Move the pitman arm lightly, and measure the deflection.
4. If the measurement is not within the factory specification, adjust
the backlash with the adjusting screw.
Backlash between sector Less than
gear shaft and rack Factory specification 0 .30 mm
(piston) 0.012 in.
9Y1210272STS0038US0
7-S21 (EU)
8 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

MECHANISM
CONTENTS
1. HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT ............................................................................................................... 8-M1

[1] B1220 ................................................................................................................................... 8-M1
[2] B1620 AND B1820 (MANUAL STEERING MODEL)............................................................ 8-M2
[3] B1820 (POWER STEERING MODEL) ................................................................................. 8-M3
2. OIL FLOW................................................................................................................................... 8-M4
[1] B1220 ................................................................................................................................... 8-M4
[2] B1620 AND B1820 (MANUAL STEERING MODEL)............................................................ 8-M4
[3] B1820 (POWER STEERING MODEL) ................................................................................. 8-M5
3. HYDRAULIC PUMP.................................................................................................................... 8-M6
[1] MANUAL STEERING MODEL ............................................................................................. 8-M6
[2] POWER STEERING MODEL ............................................................................................... 8-M6
[3] HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE.......................................................................................... 8-M7
[4] FEEDBACK LINKAGE FOR POSITION CONTROL ............................................................ 8-M8
[5] RELIEF VALVE .................................................................................................................... 8-M9
[6] HYDRAULIC CYLINDER.................................................................................................... 8-M10
[7] HYDRAULIC BLOCK TYPE OUTLET ................................................................................ 8-M11
[8] REAR HYDRAULIC OUTLET............................................................................................. 8-M11

B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
1. HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
[1] B1220
(1) Lowering Speed Adjusting (3) Hydraulic Block (5) Hydraulic Pump (7) Transmission Case
Valve (4) Relief Valve (6) Oil Filter (8) Hydraulic Cylinder
(2) Hydraulic Control Valve
Hydraulic system of B1220 is composed of main components as shown in the figure.

9Y1210272HYM0001US0
8-M1 (EU)
[2] B1620 AND B1820 (MANUAL STEERING MODEL)
(1) Lowering Speed Adjusting (4) Hydraulic Block (6) Oil Filter (8) Relief Valve
Valve (5) Hydraulic Pump (7) Transmission Case (9) Hydraulic Cylinder
(3) Rear Hydraulic Outlet
Hydraulic system of B1620 and B1820 (manual steering model) are composed of main components as shown in
the figure.
9Y1210272HYM0002US0
8-M2 (EU)
[3] B1820 (POWER STEERING MODEL)
(1) Lowering Speed Adjusting (4) Power Steering Assembly (7) Transmission Case (10) Relief Valve
Valve (5) Hydraulic Pump (8) Hydraulic Pump (11) Hydraulic Cylinder
(2) Hydraulic Control Valve (for Power Steering) (for 3 Point Hitch)
(3) Rear Hydraulic Outlet (6) Oil Filter (9) Hydraulic Block
Hydraulic system of B1820 (power steering model) is composed of main components as shown in the figure.
9Y1210272HYM0003US0
8-M3 (EU)
2. OIL FLOW
[1] B1220
(1) Hydraulic Pump
(2) Suction Pipe
(3) Oil Filter
(4) Delivery Pipe
A : Suction Oil
9Y1210272HYM0004US0
[2] B1620 AND B1820 (MANUAL STEERING MODEL)

(1) Hydraulic Pump
(2) Suction Pipe
(3) Oil Filter
(4) Delivery Pipe
(5) Hydraulic Block
A : Suction Oil
9Y1210272HYM0005US0
8-M4 (EU)
[3] B1820 (POWER STEERING MODEL)

(1) Hydraulic Pump
(for 3 Point Hitch)
(2) Power Steering Delivery Pipe
(3) Suction Pipe
(4) Oil Filter
(5) Hydraulic Block
(6) 3 Point Hitch Delivery Pipe
(7) Return Pipe
(8) Power Steering Assembly
(9) Hydraulic Pump
(for Power Steering)
A : Suction Oil
9Y1210272HYM0006US0
8-M5 (EU)
3. HYDRAULIC PUMP
[1] MANUAL STEERING MODEL
The hydraulic pump is composed of the casing (1),
cover (3), side plate (4), and two spur gears (drive gear
(2) and driven gear (5)) that are in mesh.
Hydraulic pump is driven by the fuel camshaft.
Maximum displacement is as follows.
[B1220]
Displacement Engine Speed Condition
8.4 L/min.
Approx. 3100 min-1
2.2 U.S.gals/min. At no load
(rpm)
1.8 Imp.gals/min.
[B1620 and B1820]

14.1 L/min.
Approx. 2800 min-1
(rpm)
3.10 Imp.gals/min.
(1) Casing (4) Side Plate

(2) Drive Gear (5) Driven Gear
(3) Cover
9Y1210272HYM0007US0
[2] POWER STEERING MODEL

The hydraulic pump is composed of the casing (1),
cover (5), side plate (4), and two spur gears (drive gear
(3) and driven gear (2)) that are in mesh.
Hydraulic pump is driven by the fuel camshaft.
Maximum displacement is as follows.
[Hydraulic Pump (for Power Steering)]
7.9 L/min.
Approx. 2800 min-1
(rpm)
1.7 Imp.gals/min.
[Hydraulic Pump (for 3P)]

13.1 L/min.
Approx. 2800 min-1
(rpm)
2.88 Imp.gals/min.
(1) Casing A : Pump for 3 Point Hydraulic

(2) Driven Gear System
(3) Drive Gear B : Pump for Power Steering
(4) Side Plate
(5) Cover
9Y1210272HYM0008US0
8-M6 (EU)
[3] HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE

Neutral
Oil forced into the control valve (1) through P port
and returns to the transmission case through T1 port.
Also, C port is closed by spool (2), oil in the hydraulic
cylinder does not flow to the transmission case.
Thus, the implement remains at its fixed position.
(1) Control valve P : Pump Port
(2) Spool C : Cylinder Port
T0 : Tank Port
(Connected to T2)
T1, T2 : Tank Port
9Y1210272HYM0009US0
Lift
When the control lever is set to the "LIFT" position,
The spool (2) is moved to the left.
The oil forced into the control valve (1) through P port
flows to C port.
The oil pushes and flow into the hydraulic cylinder
through the C port to lift the implement.
T0 : Tank Port
(Connected to T2)
T1, T2 : Tank Port
9Y1210272HYM0011US0
Down
When the control lever is moved to "DOWN"
position, the spool (2) is moved to the right.
Oil in the hydraulic cylinder is forced out to the
transmission case through the T3 port by the weight of
the implement, causing the implement to lower.
Oil forced into the control valve (1) through the P port
and returns to the transmission case through the T1 port.
T0 : Tank Port
(Connected to T2)
T1, T2, T3 : Tank Port
NOTE
• The T0 port is connected to T2 through the relief valve. When the relief valve opens, pressurized oil is
released to the transmission case through T2 ports.
9Y1210272HYM0012US0
8-M7 (EU)
[4] FEEDBACK LINKAGE FOR POSITION CONTROL
(1) Lift Arm RH (3) Feedback Rod (5) Feedback Pin (7) Feedback Arm
(2) Interlocker (4) Hydraulic Control Lever (6) Control Lever Shaft (8) Control Lever Arm
When the hydraulic control lever (4) moved to rearward to lift the implement, the spool of the control valve is pulled
out to form a raising circuit by the motions of feedback arm (7), control lever shaft (6) and control lever arm (8).
And after the lift arm (1) moves upward, the spool is pushed in and returned to form a neutral circuit by the motions
of interlocker (2), feedback rod (3), feedback arm (7), control lever shaft (6) and control lever arm (8).
9Y1210272HYM0010US0
8-M8 (EU)
[5] RELIEF VALVE

The three point hydraulic system circuit has a relief
valve to restrict the maximum pressure in the circuit. The
relief valve is located in control valve body.
Among direct acting relief valves, this type is suited
to higher pressure and has large capacity. Furthermore,
this type is free from unstable operation, such as
chattering, which occurs often in direct acting relief
valves.
When the oil pressure in the circuit is lower than the
setting pressure of the relief valve, the relief valve is not
operated and the oil fed to the relief valve from the
hydraulic pump flows into the position control valve.
When the pressure rises above the relief valve
setting pressure, the oil reaches the room A through the
clearance "a" of the valve seat (4), then the poppet (3)
is pushed against the spring (2) force. This mechanism
relieves the shock of this hydraulic system. Finally, oil
flows out to the transmission case through T2 ports,
preventing any further rise in pressure. The poppet
closes again when enough oil is released to drop
pressure below the valve setting.
(Reference)
[B1220]
• Relief valve setting pressure
9.40 to 10.2 MPa
95.9 to 104 kgf/cm2
1370 to 1470 psi
• Engine speed
• Oil temperature
45 to 55 °C (113 to 131 °F)
[B1620 and B1820]
• Relief valve setting pressure
11.5 to 12.3 MPa
118 to 125 kgf/cm2
1670 to 1780 psi
• Engine speed
• Oil temperature
45 to 55 °C (113 to 131 °F)
NOTE
• Right side of valve seat (4) is connected with left
side of valve seat (4).
(1) Adjusting Plug P: Pump Port
(2) Spring A: Room
(3) Poppet T2 : Tank Port
(4) Valve Seat a: Clearance (Oil Path)
(5) Control Valve Body
9Y1210272HYM0013US0
8-M9 (EU)
[6] HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
(1) Lowering Speed Adjusting (3) Hydraulic Cylinder (6) O-ring (9) Hydraulic Control Valve
Shaft (4) Hydraulic Arm (7) Back-up Ring (10) Lift Arm
(2) Ball (5) Piston (8) Hydraulic Rod
The main components of the hydraulic cylinder (3) are shown in the figure above. While the lift arm (10) is rising,
oil from the hydraulic pump flows into the hydraulic cylinder (3) through the control valve (9). Then oil pushes out the
piston (5).
While the lift arm (10) is lowering, oil in the hydraulic cylinder (3) is discharged to the transmission case through
the control valve (9) by the weight of the implement. At this time, the lowering speed of the implement can be
controlled by the ball (2) attached to the hydraulic cylinder (3). Turning the lowering speed adjusting knob clockwise
decreases the lowering speed, and counterclockwise increases lowering speed. When the lowering speed adjusting
valve (2) is completely closed, the lift arm (10) is held at its position since oil in the hydraulic cylinder (3) is sealed
between the piston (5) and ball (2).
9Y1210272HYM0014US0
8-M10 (EU)
[7] HYDRAULIC BLOCK TYPE OUTLET

The hydraulic block type outlet is located at the
delivery pipe.
This hydraulic block type outlet is provided to take
power out from the tractor to operate the hydraulic
cylinders on the implement, such as front end loader,
front blade and so on.
(1) Block Cover [1] : When implement is not
(2) Block Outlet Cover (Option) attached.
(3) Hydraulic Block [2] : When implement is
(4) From Hydraulic Pump attached.
(5) To Position Control Valve A : To Implement (Inlet)
No relief valve in the
hydraulic block.
B : From implement (Outlet)
9Y1210272HYM0015US0
[8] REAR HYDRAULIC OUTLET

The rear hydraulic outlet is located at the right hand
side of the hydraulic cylinder body.
This rear hydraulic outlet is provided to take power
out from the tractor to operate the hydraulic cylinder on
the implement such as damp trailer so on.
(1) Hydraulic Outlet A : For Implement
(2) Restricting Bolt B : 3 Point Hitch Operation
(3) Lever
(4) Plug
9Y1210272HYM0016US0
8-M11 (EU)
SERVICING
CONTENTS
(1) Hydraulic Pump for 3 Point Hydraulic System.................................................................8-S5
(2) Relief Valve .....................................................................................................................8-S7
(3) Lift Arm ............................................................................................................................8-S8
[2] PREPARATION .....................................................................................................................8-S9
(1) Hydraulic Pump ...............................................................................................................8-S9
(2) Hydraulic Cylinder and Control Valve..............................................................................8-S9
(1) Hydraulic Pump [Manual Steering Model] .....................................................................8-S11
(2) Hydraulic Pump [Power Steering Model].......................................................................8-S12
(3) Hydraulic Cylinder .........................................................................................................8-S13
(4) Hydraulic Control Valve .................................................................................................8-S14
[4] SERVICING .........................................................................................................................8-S15
(1) Hydraulic Pump .............................................................................................................8-S15
(2) Hydraulic Cylinder .........................................................................................................8-S16

1. TROUBLESHOOTING
Reference
Page
Implement Does Not Control valve broken Replace 8-S13
Rise (No Noise) Control valve improperly adjusted Adjust 8-S7
Control valve improperly assembled Repair 8-S13
Relief valve improperly assembled Replace 8-S14
Spool sticks Repair 8-S14
Piston O-ring or cylinder damaged Replace 8-S13
Implement Does Not Oil filter cartridge clogged Clean or Replace –
Rise (Noise) Suction pipe loosen or broken Repair or Replace –
Suction pipe connecting hose loosen or broken Repair or Replace –
Suction pipe O-ring broken Replace –
Insufficient transmission oil Refill G-9
Relief valve setting pressure too low Adjust or Replace 8-S7
Hydraulic pump broken Replace 8-S9
Implement Does Not Feedback rod improperly adjusted Adjust 8-S8
Reach Maximum
Height
Implement Does Not Control valve malfunctioning Repair or Replace 8-S13
Lower
Implement Drops by Hydraulic cylinder worn or damaged Replace –
Its Weight Piston O-ring worn or damaged Replace 8-S13
Control valve malfunctioning Replace 8-S13
Implement Hunts Control valve improperly assembled Adjust 8-S13
9Y1210272HYS0001US0
8-S1 (EU)
HYDRAULIC PUMP FOR THREE POINT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Pump Delivery At no pressure 8.4 L/min. –
B1220 2.2 U.S.gals/min.
1.8 Imp.gals/min.
B1620 and B1820 14.1 L/min. –

(Manual Steering 3.72 U.S.gals/min.
Model) 3.10 Imp.gals/min.
B1820 13.1 L/min. –

(Power Steering 3.46 U.S.gals/min.
Model) 2.88 Imp.gals/min.
Gear to Casing Clearance – 0.15 mm
0.059 in.
Gear Shaft to Bushing Clearance
B1220 0.0050 to 0.0088 mm 0.12 mm
0.00020 to 0.0034 in. 0.0047 in.
B1620 and B1820 0.020 to 0.091 mm 0.12 mm

0.00079 to 0.0035 in. 0.0047 in.
Bushing I.D.
B1220 12.000 to 12.068 mm –
0.47244 to 0.47511 in.
B1620 and B1820 15.000 to 15.061 mm –

0.59056 to 0.59295 in.
B1220 1.98 to 2.00 mm 1.9 mm
0.0780 to 0.0787 in. 0.075 in.
B1620 and B1820 2.48 to 2.50 mm 2.40 mm

0.0977 to 0.0984 in. 0.0945 in.
8-S2 (EU)
THREE POINT HYDRAULIC SYSTE
Relief Valve [B1220] 9.40 to 10.2 MPa –
Setting Pressure Condition 95.9 to 104 kgf/cm2
• Oil Temperature
45 to 55 °C (113 to 131 °F)
Relief Valve [B1620 and B1820] 11.5 to 12.3 MPa –
Setting Pressure Condition 118 to 125 kgf/cm2
• Oil Temperature
45 to 55 °C (113 to 131 °F)
Lift Arm 5.0 to 15 mm –
0.20 to 0.59 in.
Hydraulic Cylinder I.D. 65.05 to 65.10 mm 65.15 mm
2.561 to 2.562 in. 2.565 in.
Hydraulic Arm Shaft to Bushing Clearance 0.020 to 0.11 mm 0.30 mm
0.00079 to 0.0043 in. 0.0012 in.
• Hydraulic Arm Shaft, Right O.D. 31.925 to 31.950 mm –

1.2569 to 1.2578 in.
• Hydraulic Arm Shaft, Left O.D. 29.925 to 29.950 mm –

1.1782 to 1.1791 in.
• Bushing, Right I.D. 31.970 to 32.035 mm –

1.2587 to 1.2612 in.
• Bushing, Left I.D. 29.975 to 30.035 mm –

1.1802 to 1.1824 in.
9Y1210272HYS0002US0
8-S3 (EU)
Power Steering delivery pipe nut 35 to 45 3.6 to 4.5 26 to 33
Top link bracket mounting screw 78 to 90 7.9 to 9.2 58 to 66
3 point hitch delivery pipe joint bolt 50 to 60 5.1 to 6.1 37 to 44
Hydraulic cylinder assembly mounting screw 40 to 44 4.0 to 4.5 29 to 32
Rear wheel mounting nut 80.0 to 110 8.20 to 11.2 59.0 to 81.1
Hydraulic pimp cover mounting screw 35 to 39 3.5 to 4.0 26 to 29
Control valve mounting screw 24 to 27 2.4 to 2.8 18 to 20
9Y1210272HYS0003US0
8-S4 (EU)

(1) Hydraulic Pump for 3 Point Hydraulic System
Flowmeter Connecting and Test Preparation
IMPORTANT
• When using a flowmeter other than KUBOTA specified
flowmeter (Code No. 07916-52792), be sure to use the
instructions with that flowmeter.
• In this hook-up, there is no relief valve. Therefore while
testing, do not close the flowmeter loading valve
completely.
1. Remove the hydraulic block outlet cover.
2. Attach the hydraulic block (5) with adaptor 69 for hydraulic
pump testing to hydraulic block outlet.
3. Connect the hydraulic test hose (1) (Code No. 07916-52651) to
the adaptor 69 (pump port) and flowmeter (2) (Code No.
07916-52791) inlet port.
4. Connect the another hydraulic test hose (3) to flowmeter outlet
port and adaptor 69 (power beyond port).
5. Open the flowmeter loading valve completely. (Turn
counterclockwise).
[Only B1220]
[Except B1220]
9.4 MPa (96 kgf/cm2, 1400 psi). [Only B1220]
11.5 MPa (117 kgf/cm2, 1670 psi). [Except B1220]
10. Hold in this condition until oil temperature reaches approx.
50 °C (122 °F).
(Reference)
• Adaptor is included in the adaptor set (Code No. 07916-54031).
• When testing the hydraulic pump, use the hydraulic block.
(Refer to G-45)
(1) Hydraulic Test Hose (Pump Port) (4) Hydraulic Delivery Pipe 3 Point
(2) Flowmeter Hitch
(3) Hydraulic Test Hose (Power beyond (5) Hydraulic Block
Port)
9Y1210272HYS0005US0
8-S5 (EU)
Pump Test
NOTE
• Before pump testing, perform the flowmeter connecting
and test preparation.
1. Open the loading valve completely.
2. Start the engine and set at approx. 3100 min-1 (rpm). [Only
B1220]
3. Start the engine and set at approx. 2800 min-1 (rpm). [Except
B1220]
4. Read and note the pump delivery at no pressure.
5. Slowly close the loading valve to increase pressure approx.
9.4 MPa (96 kgf/cm2, 1400 psi). [Only B1220]
6. Slowly close the loading valve to increase pressure approx.
11.5 MPa (117 kgf/cm2, 1670 psi). [Except B1220]
7. Read and note the pump flow at rated pressure.
8. Open the loading valve and stop the engine.
(Reference)
Above
8.4 L/min.
B1220
2.2 U.S.gals/min.
1.8 Imp.gals/min.
B1620 and
Above
Hydraulic pump Factory B1820
14.1 L/min.
delivery at no specifica- (Manual
3.72 U.S.gals/min.
pressure tion steering
3.10 Imp.gals/min.
model)
Above
B1820 (Power
13.1 L/min.
steering
3.46 U.S.gals/min.
model)
2.88 Imp.gals/min.
Condition
[B1220]
• Engine speed
• Rated pressure
9.4 MPa (96 kgf/cm2, 1400 psi)
• Oil temperature
50 °C (122 °F)
[B1620 and B1820]
• Engine speed
• Rated pressure
11.5 MPa (117 kgf/cm2, 1670 psi)
• Oil temperature
50 °C (122 °F)
9Y1210272HYS0006US0
8-S6 (EU)
(2) Relief Valve

Relief Valve Steering Pressure
1. Remove the seat under cover.
2. Remove the plug (R 1/16) (1) from the hydraulic cylinder case.
3. Install the adaptor (R 1/16). Then connect the cable and the
pressure gauge to the adaptor (R 1/16.)
4. Remove the feed back rod lock nut.
5. Start the engine and set the engine speed at approx. 3100 min-1
(rpm). [Only B1220]
6. Start the engine and set the engine speed at approx. 2800 min-1
(rpm). [Except B1220].
7. Move the hydraulic control lever all way up to operate the relief
valve and measure the pressure.
8. If the pressure is not within the factory specifications, remove
the hydraulic cylinder assembly (Refer to 8-S9) and adjust with
the adjusting plug (2).
9. Reinstall the hydraulic cylinder assembly. After checking the
pressure, be sure to stake the adjusting plug and control valve
body with a punch and reinstall the feedback rod interlocker
correctly.
9.40 to 10.2 MPa
B1220 95.9 to 104 kgf/cm2
Factory 1370 to 1470 psi
Relief valve setting
specifica-
pressure 11.5 to 12.3 MPa
tion B1620 and
118 to 125 kgf/cm2
B1820
1670 to 1780psi
Condition
[B1220]
• Engine speed
• Oil temperature
45 to 55 °C (113 to 131 °F)
[B1620 and B1820]
• Engine speed
• Oil temperature
45 to 55 °C (113 to 131 °F)
(1) Check Port (Plug) (4) Poppet
(2) Adjusting Plug (5) Valve Body
(3) Spring
9Y1210272HYS0007US0
8-S7 (EU)
(3) Lift Arm

Lift Arm Free Play
1. Set the 3-point hitch to the lowest position.
2. Start the engine, and set at the idling speed.
3. Move the hydraulic control lever to lift position until the lift arm
moves to the uppermost position and relief valve opens.
4. Move the lift arm (1) to the upper end by hand and measure the
free play.
adjust the free play by changing the set position of feedback rod
(2) with bolt (3) and lock nut (4).
5.0 to 15 mm
Lift arm free play Factory specification
0.20 to 0.59 in.
(1) Lift Arm (3) Bolt

(2) Feedback Rod (4) Lock Nut
9Y1210272HYS0008US0
8-S8 (EU)
[2] PREPARATION
(1) Hydraulic Pump
IMPORTANT
• The hydraulic pump is precision machined and assembled : If disassemble once, it may be unable to
maintain its original performance. Therefore, when the hydraulic pump fails, replacement should be
carried out with the hydraulic pump assembled except when emergency repair is unavoidable.
• When repair is required, follow the disassembly and servicing procedures shown below with utmost care.
• Be sure to test the hydraulic pump with a flowmeter before disassembling.
• After reassembly, be sure to perform break-in operation and ensure that there is nothing abnormal with
the hydraulic pump.
9Y1210272STS0011US0
Remove Hydraulic Pump
1. Open the bonnet (1) then remove the front grille (3), side cover
(R.H.) and disconnect the battery negative cable (2).
2. Disconnect the fuel filter assembly (8) and then remove the
lever link assembly (9).
3. Disconnect the power steering delivery pipe (4).
4. Disconnect the 3 point hitch delivery pipe (7) and suction hose
(5).
(When reassembling)
NOTE
the fitting with a wrench, turn the pipe nut another wrench
to avoid damage at fitting installed part.
• When disconnecting battery cords, disconnect the
negative cord first. When connecting, positive cord first.
35 to 45 N·m
pipe nut
26 to 33 lbf·ft
(1) Bonnet (6) Hydraulic Pump

(2) Battery Negative Cable (7) 3 Point Hitch Delivery Pipe
(3) Front Grille (8) Fuel Filter Assembly
(4) Power Steering Delivery Pipe (9) Lever Link Assembly
[Power Steering Model]
(5) Suction Hose
9Y1210272STS0012US0
(2) Hydraulic Cylinder and Control Valve

NOTE
first.
9Y1210272TRS0006US0
8-S9 (EU)
Top Link Bracket L.H. and Lift Rod
1. Remove the top link and disconnect the lift rods (2).
2. Remove the top link bracket (1).
(When reassembling)
78 to 90 N·m
Top link bracket mounting
screw
58 to 66 lbf·ft
(1) Top Link Bracket, L.H. (2) Lift Rod

9Y1210272HYS0009US0
Seat and Seat Under Cover

1. Remove the seat under cover (2).
2. Remove the seat (1).
(1) Seat (2) Seat Under Cover
9Y1210272HYS0010US0
PTO Shift Lever, Range Gear Shift Lever and Lever Guide, L.H.
1. Remove the PTO shift rod (4).
2. Remove the external snap ring and remove the PTO shift lever
(2) and range gear shift lever (1) with lever guide, L.H. (3).
(1) Range Gear Shift Lever (3) Lever Guide, L.H.
(2) PTO Shift Lever (4) PTO Shift Rod
9Y1210272HYS0011US0
Seat Bracket and Hydraulic Control Lever

1. Remove the seat brackets (2).
2. Disconnect the combination lamp connectors and trailer brake
connector, then wire harness is moved to the front side.
3. Disconnect the hydraulic control lever (1).
(1) Hydraulic Control Lever (2) Seat Bracket
9Y1210272HYS0012US0
3 Point Hitch Delivery Pipe and Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly

1. Disconnect the 3 point hitch delivery pipe (1).
2. Remove the hydraulic cylinder assembly (2).
(When reassembling)
face of the differential case and the hydraulic cylinder.
50 to 60 N·m
3 point hitch delivery pipe
5.1 to 6.1 kgf·m
joint bolt
37 to 44 lbf·ft
Tightening torque
Hydraulic cylinder 40 to 44 N·m
assembly mounting screw 4.0 to 4.5 kgf·m
and nut 29 to 32 lbf·ft
(1) 3 Point Hitch Delivery Pipe (2) Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly

9Y1210272HYS0013US0
8-S10 (EU)

(1) Hydraulic Pump [Manual Steering Model]
Cover, Side Plate and Gear
1. Secure the hydraulic pump with a visa, and remove the cover.
(1).
(When reassembling)
• Install the side plate, noting its location and direction
35 to 39 N·m
Tightening torque Cover mounting screw 3.5 to 4.0 kgf·m
26 to 28 lbf·ft

(2) Drive Gear (4) Driven Gear
9Y1210272HYS0014US0
Oil Seal
1. Remove the internal snap ring (2), and remove the oil seal (1).
(When reassembling)
• If the oil seal is defective, worn or scratched, replace it.
9Y1210272HYS0015US0
8-S11 (EU)
(2) Hydraulic Pump [Power Steering Model]

Hydraulic Pump Cover, Side Plate and Gear
1. Secure the hydraulic pump with a vise, and remove the
hydraulic pump cover (6) with casing (5).
(1).
(When reassembling)
• Install the side plate, noting its location and direction.
35 to 39 N·m
Hydraulic pump cover
mounting screw
26 to 29 lbf·ft

(2) Driven Gear (5) Casing
(3) Drive Gear (6) Hydraulic Pump Cover
9Y1210272HYS0016US0
Oil Seal
1. Remove the internal snap ring (2), and remove the oil seal (1).
(When reassembling)
• If the oil seal is defective, worn or scratched, replace it.
9Y1210272HYS0017US0
8-S12 (EU)
(3) Hydraulic Cylinder

Control Valve
1. Remove the control valve mounting screws, and remove the
control valve (1).
(When reassembling)
• Take care not to damage the O-rings.
24 to 27 N·m
Control valve mounting
screw
18 to 20 lbf·ft
(1) Control Valve

9Y1210272HYS0018US0
Lift Arm, Hydraulic Arm Shaft and Hydraulic Arm
1. Remove the feedback rod lock nuts and spring.
2. Remove the lift arm, L.H. (1).
3. Remove the hydraulic arm shaft and lift arm, R.H. (3) as a unit.
(When reassembling)
• Align the alignment marks (4) of the hydraulic arm and hydraulic
arm shaft.
• Align the alignment marks (4) of the lift arm, L.H. and hydraulic
arm shaft.
• Apply grease to the right and left bushings and O-rings.
(1) Lift Arm, L.H. (3) Lift Arm, R.H.
(2) Feedback Rod (4) Alignment Mark
9Y1210272HYS0019US0
Hydraulic Piston
1. Inject the compressed air into the hydraulic cylinder, and take
out the hydraulic piston (1).
(When reassembling)
• Take care not to damage the O-ring (3) and backup ring (2).
• Apply transmission fluid to the O-ring.
• Replace the O-ring if it is defective, worn or scratched, and it
cause the oil leakage.
(1) Hydraulic Piston (3) O-ring
(2) Backup Ring
9Y1210272HYS0020US0
8-S13 (EU)
Lowering Speed Adjusting Valve
1. Remove the lowering speed adjusting valve body (2) with the
lowering speed adjusting shaft (1).
2. Draw out the poppet (3) and the spring (4).
(When reassembling)
(1) Lowering Speed Adjusting Shaft (3) Poppet
(2) Lowering Speed Adjusting Valve (4) Spring
Body
9Y1210272HYS0021US0

Spool
1. Remove the spool (1).
(1) Spool (2) Valve Body
9Y1210272HYS0022US0
Relief Valve
1. Remove the adjusting plug (1), spring (2) and poppet (3).
(When reassembling)
• Recutting the threads of adjusting plug and control valve inner
thread.
• After adjusting the pressure, be sure to stake the adjusting plug
and control valve body.
(1) Adjusting Plug (3) Poppet
(2) Spring (4) Valve Body
9Y1210272HYS0023US0
8-S14 (EU)
[4] SERVICING
(1) Hydraulic Pump
Clearance between Tip of Gear Tooth and Casing
1. Measure the clearance between gear and casing at several
points with feeler gauge.
assembly.
Clearance between tip of 0.15 mm
Allowable limit
gear tooth and casing 0.059 in.
9Y1210272HYS0024US0
Clearance between Bushing and Gear Shaft

1. Measure the gear shaft O.D. with an outside micrometer.
2. Measure the bushing I.D. with a cylinder gauge.
[B1220]
0.0050 to 0.088 mm
Allowable limit
0.0047 in.
12.000 to 12.068 mm
Bushing I.D. Factory specification
0.47244 to 0.47511 in.
[B1620 and B1820]
0.020 to 0.091 mm
Allowable limit
0.0047 in.
15.000 to 15.061 mm
Bushing I.D. Factory specification
0.59056 to 0.59295 in.
9Y1210272HYS0025US0
1. Measure the side plate thickness with an outside micrometer.
[B1220]
1.98 to 2.00 mm
0.0780 to 0.0787 in.
Side plate thickness
1.9 mm
Allowable limit
0.075 in.
[B1620 and B1820]

2.48 to 2.50 mm
0.0977 to 0.0984 in.
Side plate thickness
2.40 mm
Allowable limit
0.0945 in.
9Y1210272HYS0026US0
8-S15 (EU)
(2) Hydraulic Cylinder

Hydraulic Cylinder Bore
1. Check the cylinder internal surface for spring or damage.
2. Measure the cylinder I.D. with a cylinder gauge.
hydraulic cylinder block.
65.05 to 65.10 mm
2.561 to 2.562 in.
Cylinder I.D.
65.15 mm
Allowable limit
2.565 in.
9Y1210272HYS0027US0
Clearance between Hydraulic Arm Shaft and Bushing
1. Measure the hydraulic arm shaft O.D. with an outside
micrometer.
2. Measure the bushing I.D. with a cylinder gauge, and calculate
the clearance.
bushing.
31.925 to 31.950 mm
Factory Right
1.2569 to 1.2578 in.
Hydraulic arm shaft O.D. specifica-
tion 29.925 to 29.950 mm
Left
1.1782 to 1.1791 in.
31.970 to 32.035 mm
Factory Right
Bushing I.D. 1.2587 to 1.2612 in.
specifica-
(after press fitted) 29.975 to 30.035 mm
tion Left
1.1802 to 1.1824 in.
9Y1210272HYS0028US0
8-S16 (EU)
9 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

MECHANISM
CONTENTS
1. WIRING DIAGRAM..................................................................................................................... 9-M1

[1] B1220 (WITHOUT OPC TYPE) ............................................................................................ 9-M1
[2] B1220 (WITH OPC TYPE) ................................................................................................... 9-M2
[3] B1620 AND B1820 (WITHOUT OPC TYPE) ........................................................................ 9-M3
[4] B1620 AND B1820 (WITH OPC TYPE) ............................................................................... 9-M4
[5] B1620 AND B1820 (WITH OPC AND PTO GEAR SHIFT LEVER SWITCH TYPE) ............ 9-M5
2. STARTING SYSTEM.................................................................................................................. 9-M6
[1] B1220 ................................................................................................................................... 9-M6
(1) Without OPC Type.......................................................................................................... 9-M6
(2) With OPC Type............................................................................................................... 9-M7
[2] B1620 AND B1820 ............................................................................................................... 9-M8
(1) Without OPC Type.......................................................................................................... 9-M8
(2) With OPC Type............................................................................................................... 9-M9
(3) With OPC and PTO Gear Shift Lever Switch Type ...................................................... 9-M10
[3] SAFETY SWITCH AND ENGINE CONDITION .................................................................. 9-M11
(1) Related Switches.......................................................................................................... 9-M11
(2) Engine Starting Conditions ........................................................................................... 9-M11
(3) Related Switches.......................................................................................................... 9-M12
(4) Engine Starting Conditions and Automatic Engine Stop .............................................. 9-M15
3. CHARGING SYSTEM............................................................................................................... 9-M16
[1] B1220 ................................................................................................................................. 9-M16
[2] B1620 AND B1820 ............................................................................................................. 9-M17
4. LIGHTING SYSTEM ................................................................................................................. 9-M18
[1] B1220 ................................................................................................................................. 9-M18
(1) Head Light .................................................................................................................... 9-M18
[2] B1620 AND B1820 ............................................................................................................. 9-M19
(1) Head Light .................................................................................................................... 9-M19
(2) Turn Signal Light .......................................................................................................... 9-M19
[3] HAZARD LAMP .................................................................................................................. 9-M20
5. EASY CHECKER™ .................................................................................................................. 9-M21
[1] INDICATION ITEMS ........................................................................................................... 9-M21
[2] ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LAMP ....................................................................................... 9-M21

B1220, B1620, B1820, WSM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1. WIRING DIAGRAM
[1] B1220 (WITHOUT OPC TYPE)
9-M1 (EU)
[2] B1220 (WITH OPC TYPE)
9-M2 (EU)
[3] B1620 AND B1820 (WITHOUT OPC TYPE)
9-M3 (EU)
[4] B1620 AND B1820 (WITH OPC TYPE)
9-M4 (EU)
[5] B1620 AND B1820 (WITH OPC AND PTO GEAR SHIFT LEVER SWITCH TYPE)
9-M5 (EU)
2. STARTING SYSTEM
[1] B1220
(1) Without OPC Type
(1) Joint Connector (4) Frame Earth (7) Battery (10) Safety Switch 2
(2) Glow Plug Indication (5) Glow Plug (8) Starter (11) Safety Switch 1
(3) Main Switch (6) Slow Blow Fuse (9) Relay (12) Starter Relay
When the main switch is turned to the PREHEAT position, the terminal B is connected to the terminals 19 and
AC. The glow plugs become red-hot, and at the same time, the glow plug indicator also lights on.
When the main switch is then turned to the START position with the safety switches on, the terminal B is
connected to the terminal 50 and AC. Consequently, battery current flows to the starter motor and start the engine.
The main switch automatically returns to the ON position, the terminal B is connected only to the terminal AC,
thereby causing the starting circuit to be opened, stopping the starter motor.
9Y1210272ELM0003US0
9-M6 (EU)
(2) With OPC Type

B1220 tractor equipped Operator Presence Control (OPC) system. This system will automatically stop the engine
when operator stands up from the seat while shifting the PTO gear shift lever, the main gear shift lever and the parking
brake lever.
This system is controlled by 4 switches (the rear PTO switch, the seat switch, the main gear shift switch and the
parking brake switch).
Engine starting is operated by starter motor after current flowing from the starter relay to the start motor.
Engine stopping is operated by the key stop solenoid after current flowing from the timer relay (the key stop
solenoid relay) to the key stop solenoid.
(1) Timer Relay 2 (6) Main Switch (11) Slow Blow Fuse (50 A) (15) Timer Relay
(2) Fuse Box (7) Parking Brake Switch (12) Battery (16) Main Gear Shift Switch
(3) Joint Connector (8) Seat Switch (13) Starter (17) PTO Switch
(4) Relay (9) Frame Earth (14) Key Stop Solenoid (18) Starter Relay
(5) Relay (10) Glow Plug
9Y1210272ELM0024US0
9-M7 (EU)
[2] B1620 AND B1820

(1) Without OPC Type
(1) Joint Connector (5) Main Switch (8) Battery (11) Timer Relay
(2) Glow Plug Indication (6) Frame Earth (9) Starter (12) Safety Relay
(3) Safety Switch 1 (7) Slow Blow Fuse (10) Glow Plug (13) Key Stop Solenoid
(4) Safety Switch 2
When the main switch turned from the ON position to the OFF position, the fuel cut-off solenoid moves the fuel
injection pump control rack to the "No Fuel Injection" position and stop the engine.
9Y1210272ELM0004US0
9-M8 (EU)
(2) With OPC Type

B1620 and B1820 tractor equipped Operator Presence Control (OPC) system. This system will automatically stop
the engine when operator stands up from the seat while shifting the PTO gear shift lever, the main gear shift lever
and the parking brake lever.
This system is controlled by 4 switches (the rear PTO switch, the seat switch, the main gear shift switch and the
parking brake switch).
Engine starting is operated by starter motor after current flowing from the starter relay to the start motor.
Engine stopping is operated by the key stop solenoid after current flowing from the timer relay (the key stop
solenoid relay) to the key stop solenoid.
(1) Timer Relay 2 (6) Seat Switch (11) Frame Earth (16) Glow Plug
(2) Relay (7) PTO Switch (Rear) (12) Fuse Box (17) Timer Relay
(3) Relay (8) Main Gear Shift Switch (13) Slow Blow Fuse (50 A) (18) Starter Relay
(4) Joint Connector (9) Starter Switch (14) Battery (19) Key Stop Solenoid
(5) Combination Switch (10) Parking Brake Switch (15) Starter
9Y1210272ELM0025US0
9-M9 (EU)
(3) With OPC and PTO Gear Shift Lever Switch Type
(1) Timer Relay 2 (7) PTO Gear Shift Lever Switch (11) Parking Brake Switch (16) Starter
(2) Relay (Mid) (12) Frame Earth (17) Glow Plug
(3) Relay (8) PTO Switch (Rear) (13) Fuse Box (18) Timer Relay
(4) Joint Connector (9) Main Gear Shift Switch (14) Slow Blow Fuse (50 A) (19) Starter Relay
(5) Combination Switch (10) Starter Switch (15) Battery (20) Key Stop Solenoid
(6) Seat Switch
9Y1210272ELM0026US0
9-M10 (EU)
[3] SAFETY SWITCH AND ENGINE CONDITION

(1) Related Switches
[A] Without OPC Type
Main Gear Shift Switch
This switch is located on the main gear shift cover.
When the main gear shift lever is not in neutral position,
this switch is pushed in and electric circuit is opened.
(1) Main Gear Shift Switch
9Y1210272ELM0005US0
PTO Switch
This switch is located near the PTO gear shift lever.
When the PTO gear shift lever is in neutral position, the
PTO switch is pushed in and electric circuit is closed.
(1) PTO Switch
9Y1210272ELM0006US0
(2) Engine Starting Conditions

When the following conditions become complete, electric current (12V) reaches starter S terminal through starter
relay from main switch 50 terminal, and the engine can be started.
Rear PTO Switch Main Shift Switch
(Neutral : ON) (Neutral : ON)
(Engaged : OFF) (Engaged : OFF)
Condition ON ON
9Y1210272ELM0007US0
9-M11 (EU)
(3) Related Switches

[A] B1220 (With OPC Type)
• See page 9-M11
9Y1210272ELM0027US0
Rear PTO Switch
• See page 9-M11
9Y1210272ELM0028US0
Parking Brake Switch
This switch is located near the axle case L.H. When
the parking brake switch is not in neutral position, the
parking brake switch is pushed in and electric circuit is
opened.
(1) Parking Brake Switch
9Y1210272ELM0029US0
Seat Switch
This switch is located under the seat. When the seat
switch is not in neutral position, the seat switch is turned
on and electric circuit is opened.
(1) Seat Switch
9Y1210272ELM0030US0
9-M12 (EU)
[B] B1620 and B1820 (With OPC Type)

• See page 9-M11
9Y1210272ELM0031US0
Rear PTO Switch
• See page 9-M11
9Y1210272ELM0032US0
Parking Brake Switch
This switch is located on the axle case L.H. When
the parking brake switch is not in neutral position, the
parking brake switch is pushed in and electric circuit is
opened.
(Adjusting)
• The parking switch is pushed against the arm when
the parking brake is in the released position.
• The parking switch is not in contact with the arm
when the parking brake is in the second notch
position.
NOTE
• In case the seat is vacant (or the operator gets up
from the seat).
a) When the parking brake is in the released
position, engine must stop immediately after
shifting the PTO gear shift lever.
b) When the parking brake is in the second
notch position, engine does not stop and the
rear PTO rotates after shifting the PTO gear
shift lever.
(1) Parking Brake Switch [A] Switch ON
[B] Switch OFF
9Y1210272ELM0033US0
Seat Switch (with OPC)

This switch is located in the seat. When the seat
switch is not in neutral position, the seat switch is turned
on and electric circuit is opened.
(1) Seat Switch
9Y1210272ELM0034US0
9-M13 (EU)
[C] B1620 and B1820 (With OPC and Mid PTO Gear Shift Lever Switch Type)
PTO Gear Shift Lever Switch (with Mid PTO)
This switch is located under the left lever guide.
When the PTO gear shift lever switch is not in neutral
position, the PTO gear shift lever switch is turned on and
electric circuit is opened.
(1) PTO Gear Shift Lever Switch
9Y1210272ELM0035US0
9-M14 (EU)
(4) Engine Starting Conditions and Automatic Engine Stop

When the following conditions become complete, electric current (12 V) reaches starter S terminal through the
starter relay and relay (2M) from main switch 50 terminal, and the engine can be started.
Engine can be shut off under following conditions since these conditions cause key stop relay to operate and it
controls fuel cut solenoid.
B1220, B1620, B1820 (Without Mid PTO)
Main Shift Lever PTO Switch Parking Brake
Seat Switch Engine Start Key Stop Output
Switch (REAR) Switch
Neutral Neutral Lock Sit
Cannot Start ON : Engine Stop
(Switch ON) (Switch ON) (Switch ON) (Switch ON)
Engaged Engaged Unlock Stand OFF : Engine
Start
(Switch OFF) (Switch OFF) (Switch OFF) (Switch OFF) does not Stop
1 Neutral (ON) Neutral (ON) Lock (ON) ON Start OFF
2 Neutral (ON) Neutral (ON) Lock (ON) OFF Start OFF
3 Neutral (ON) Neutral (ON) Unlock (OFF) ON Start OFF
4 Neutral (ON) Neutral (ON) Unlock (OFF) OFF Start OFF
5 Neutral (ON) Engaged (OFF) Unlock (OFF) OFF Cannot Start ON
6 Engaged (OFF) Neutral (ON) Lock (ON) OFF Cannot Start ON
7 Engaged (OFF) Neutral (ON) Unlock (OFF) OFF Cannot Start ON
8 Engaged (OFF) Engaged (OFF) Lock (ON) OFF Cannot Start ON
9 Engaged (OFF) Engaged (OFF) Unlock (OFF) OFF Cannot Start ON
10 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Cannot Start ON
B1620, B1820 (With Mid PTO)

Main Shift PTO Gear Shift PTO Switch Parking Brake Key Stop
Seat Switch Engine Start
Lever Switch Lever Switch (REAR) Switch Output
Neutral Neutral Lock Sit ON : Engine
Switch ON Cannot Start
(Switch ON) (Switch ON) (Switch ON) (Switch ON) Stop
Engaged Engaged Unlock Stand OFF : Engine
Switch OFF Start
(Switch OFF) (Switch OFF) (Switch OFF) (Switch OFF) does not Stop
1 Neutral (ON) ON Neutral (ON) Lock (ON) ON Start OFF
2 Neutral (ON) OFF Neutral (ON) Lock (ON) ON Start OFF
3 Neutral (ON) ON Neutral (ON) Lock (ON) OFF Start OFF
4 Neutral (ON) OFF Neutral (ON) Lock (ON) OFF Start OFF
5 Neutral (ON) ON Neutral (ON) Unlock (OFF) ON Start OFF
6 Neutral (ON) OFF Neutral (ON) Unlock (OFF) ON Start OFF
7 Neutral (ON) ON Neutral (ON) Unlock (OFF) OFF Start OFF
8 Neutral (ON) OFF Neutral (ON) Unlock (OFF) OFF Start OFF
9 Neutral (ON) OFF Engaged (OFF) Lock (ON) OFF Cannot Start ON
10 Neutral (ON) ON Engaged (OFF) Unlock (OFF) OFF Cannot Start ON
11 Neutral (ON) OFF Engaged (OFF) Unlock (OFF) OFF Cannot Start ON
12 Engaged (OFF) ON Neutral (ON) Lock (ON) OFF Cannot Start ON
13 Engaged (OFF) OFF Neutral (ON) Lock (ON) OFF Cannot Start ON
14 Engaged (OFF) ON Neutral (ON) Unlock (OFF) OFF Cannot Start ON
15 Engaged (OFF) OFF Neutral (ON) Unlock (OFF) OFF Cannot Start ON
16 Engaged (OFF) ON Engaged (OFF) Lock (ON) OFF Cannot Start ON
17 Engaged (OFF) OFF Engaged (OFF) Lock (ON) OFF Cannot Start ON
18 Engaged (OFF) ON Engaged (OFF) Unlock (OFF) OFF Cannot Start ON
19 Engaged (OFF) OFF Engaged (OFF) Unlock (OFF) OFF Cannot Start ON
20 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Cannot Start ON
9Y1210272ELM0036US0
9-M15 (EU)
3. CHARGING SYSTEM
[1] B1220
(1) Fuse (4) Main Switch (7) Battery (9) AC Dynamo

(2) Joint Connector (5) Frame Earth (8) Starter (10) IC Regulator
(3) Charging Lamp (6) Slow Blow Fuse
The charge system supplies electric power for various electrical devices and also charges the battery while the
engine runs. It consists of a AC dynamo and a regulator.
9Y1210272ELM0008US0
9-M16 (EU)
[2] B1620 AND B1820
(1) Charging Lamp (3) Fuse (5) Battery (7) Alternator

(2) Main Switch (4) Slow Blow Fuse (6) Starter
The charging system supplies electric power for various electrical devices and also charges the battery while the
engine runs. This alternator has IC regulator.
9Y1210272ELM0009US0
9-M17 (EU)
4. LIGHTING SYSTEM
[1] B1220
The lighting system consists of light switch, head lights etc..
9Y1210272ELM0010US0
(1) Head Light
The light switch has two position OFF and ON.

Current passes through the light circuit as shown in the figure above.
9Y1210272ELM0011US0
Head Light Switch
(1) Head Light Switch

9Y1210272ELM0012US0
9-M18 (EU)
[2] B1620 AND B1820

The lighting system consists of combination switch (light switch and hazard switch), head lights, tail lights, hazard
lights, etc..
9Y1210272ELM0013US0
(1) Head Light
The light switch, which forms a combination switch with the turn signal light switch, has two position OFF and ON.
Current passes through the light circuit as shown in the figure above.
9Y1210272ELM0014US0
(2) Turn Signal Light
The turn signal light switch, which forms a combination switch with the light switch, has three position; OFF, 1.,
2.. When using turn signal light switch, blinks only one side light. The operation of the turn signal light switch is given
to priority when the hazard switch and the turn signal light switch are turned on at the same time.
9Y1210272ELM0015US0
9-M19 (EU)
Combination Switch
Combination switch consist of head light switch, turn
signal light switch and horn switch.
(1) Head Light Switch (3) Turn Signal Light Switch

(2) Horn Switch
9Y1210272ELM0016US0
[3] HAZARD LAMP
Hazard switch has two positions; ON and OFF. Blinking the hazard lamp and indicator lamps as shown in the
figure above. The hazard lamp is operative when the key switch is in either the ON or OFF positions.
9Y1210272ELM0017US0
9-M20 (EU)
5. EASY CHECKER™
To check the conditions of tractor easily before and during operation, Easy Checker™ combination of lamps on
the Easy Checker™ board is provided.
9Y1210272ELM0018US0
[1] INDICATION ITEMS

(1) Oil Pressure Lamp
When the engine oil pressure is low, this lamp
illuminates.
(2) Charge Lamp
When the charging system is not functioning
properly, this lamp illuminates.
(3) Pre-heat Indicator Lamp
When the key switch is in the "Pre-heat" position,
the pre-heat indicator lamp illuminates.
9Y1210272ELM0019US0
[2] ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LAMP

When the engine oil pressure has dropped, the
engine oil pressure switch is activated to let the current
flow from the main switch and to light up the lamp.
(1) Oil Pressure Switch
9Y1210272ELM0020US0
9-M21 (EU)
SERVICING
CONTENTS
[1] B1220 ....................................................................................................................................9-S1
[2] B1620 AND B1820 ................................................................................................................9-S4
(1) Battery .............................................................................................................................9-S9
(2) Main Switch ...................................................................................................................9-S11
(3) Key Stop Solenoid .........................................................................................................9-S12
(4) Key Stop Solenoid Relay...............................................................................................9-S13
(5) Timer Relay 2 (With OPC Type)....................................................................................9-S14
(6) Relay (2M) (With OPC Type).........................................................................................9-S15
(7) Starter Relay..................................................................................................................9-S15
(8) Glow Plug ......................................................................................................................9-S16
(9) Safety Switches .............................................................................................................9-S17
(10)Starter ...........................................................................................................................9-S26
(11)AC Dynamo [B1220] .....................................................................................................9-S26
(12)Regulator [B1220] (Without OPC Type) ........................................................................9-S27
(13)Regulator [B1220] (With OPC Type) .............................................................................9-S28
(14)Alternator [B1620 and B1820] .......................................................................................9-S29
(15)Head Light Switch [B1220] ............................................................................................9-S30
(16)Combination Switch [B1620 and B1820].......................................................................9-S31
(17)Hazard Switch [B1620 and B1820] ...............................................................................9-S33
(18)Brake Switch [B1620 and B1820] .................................................................................9-S34
(19)Flasher Unit [B1620 and B1820] ...................................................................................9-S35
(20)Easy Checker™ ............................................................................................................9-S36
(21)Gauge ...........................................................................................................................9-S38
(1) Starter............................................................................................................................9-S39
(2) AC Dynamo [B1220]......................................................................................................9-S40
(3) Alternator [B1620 and B1820] .......................................................................................9-S40
[3] SERVICING .........................................................................................................................9-S43
(1) Starter............................................................................................................................9-S43
(2) Alternator .......................................................................................................................9-S44

1. TROUBLESHOOTING
[1] B1220
Reference
Page
All Electrical Battery discharged or defective Recharge or Replace G-23, 9-S9
Equipments Do Not Battery positive cable disconnected or improperly Repair or Replace 9-S9
Operate connected
Battery negative cable disconnected or Repair or Replace 9-S9
improperly connected
Slow blow fuse blown Replace G-36
Fuse Blown Short-circuited Repair or Replace –
Frequently
BATTERY
Reference
Page
All Electrical Battery defective Recharge or Replace G-23, 9-S9
Equipments Do Not Dynamo defective Repair or Replace 9-S26
Operate
Regulator defective Replace 9-S27
9-S28
Wiring harness disconnected or improperly Repair or Replace –
connected (between battery positive terminal and
regulator B terminal)
Cooling fan belt slipping Adjust tension G-27
STARTING SYSTEM
Reference
Page
Starter Motor Does Battery discharged or defective Recharge or Replace G-23, 9-S9
Not Operate Slow blow fuse blown Replace G-36
Safety switch improperly adjusted or defective Repair or Replace 9-S17
9-S19
connected (between main switch 50 terminal and
starter relay, safety switches, between safety
switches and starter relay, between battery
positive terminal and starter motor)
Starter motor defective Repair or Replace 9-S26
Main switch defective Replace 9-S11
Pre-heat indicator Battery discharged or defective Recharge or Replace G-23, 9-S9
Lamp Does Not Light Slow blow fuse blown Replace G-36
When Main Switch Is
in Pre-heat Position Wiring harness disconnected or improperly Repair or Replace –
pre-heat indicator, between pre-heat indicator
and glow plugs)
Pre-heat indicator defective Replace 9-S37
9-S1 (EU)
CHARGING SYSTEM
Reference
Page
Charging Lamp Does Fuse blown (10A) Replace G-36
Not Light when Main Wiring harness disconnected or improperly Repair or Replace –
Switch Is Turned ON connected (between main switch AC terminal
and panel board, between panel board and
dynamo)
Dynamo defective Repair or Replace 9-S26
9-S28
Charging Lamp Does Wiring harness disconnected or improperly Repair or Replace –
Not Go Off When connected (between main switch 30 terminal and
Engine Is Running regulator, between panel board and dynamo)
Dynamo defective Repair or Replace 9-S26
9-S28
LIGHTING SYSTEM
Reference
Page
Head light Does Not Fuse blown (10A) Replace G-36
Light Bulb blown Replace G-37
connected (between main switch AC terminal
and combination switch B1 terminal, between
combination switch 1 terminal and headlight
Illumination Light Fuse blown (10A) Replace G-36
Does Not Light Bulb blown Replace G-37
combination switch T terminal and panel board)
EASY CHECKER™
Reference
Page
Oil Pressure Lamp Engine oil pressure too low Repair engine –
Lights Up When Engine oil insufficient Replenish G-18
Engine Is Running
Oil pressure switch defective Replace 9-S36
Short circuit between oil pressure switch lead Repair 9-S36
and chassis
Circuit in panel board defective Replace 9-S37
Oil Pressure Lamp Bulb blown Replace G-37
Does Not Light When Oil pressure switch defective Replace 9-S36
Main Switch Is
Turned On and Wiring harness disconnected or improperly Repair or Replace –
Engine Is Not connected (between panel board and oil
Running pressure switch)
9-S2 (EU)
GAUGES
Reference
Page
Fuel Gauge Does Not Fuel gauge defective Repair 9-S38
Function Fuel level sensor defective Replace 9-S38
connected (between panel board and fuel level
sensor)
Coolant Temperature Coolant temperature gauge defective Replace 9-S38
Gauge Does Not Coolant temperature sensor defective Replace 9-S38
Function
connected (between panel board and coolant
temperature sensor)
AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP (WITH OPC TYPE)

Reference
Page
Engine Does Not Seat switch defective Replace 9-S20
Stop Key stop solenoid relay defective Replace 9-S13
Key stop solenoid defective Replace 9-S12
Rear PTO switch defective Adjust and Replace 9-S20
Main gear shift switch defective Adjust and Replace 9-S19
Wiring harness disconnected or improperly Adjust and Replace –
connected (between key stop solenoid relay and
battery positive terminal)
Starter Motor Does Seat switch defective Replace 9-S20
Not Operate Key stop solenoid relay defective Replace 9-S13
Rear PTO switch defective Replace 9-S20
Main gear shift switch defective Replace 9-S19
Starter defective Replace 9-S26
Wiring harness disconnected or improperly Replace –
9Y1210272ELS0001US0
9-S3 (EU)
[2] B1620 AND B1820

Reference
Page
All Electrical Battery discharged or defective Recharge or Replace G-23, 9-S9
Equipments Do Not Battery positive cable disconnected or improperly Repair or Replace 9-S9
Operate connected
Battery negative cable disconnected or Repair or Replace 9-S9
improperly connected
Slow blow fuse blown Replace G-37
Fuse Blown Short-circuited Repair or Replace –
Frequently
BATTERY
Reference
Page
All Electrical Battery defective Recharge or Replace G-23, 9-S9
Equipments Do Not Alternator defective Repair or Replace 9-S29
Operate
connected (between battery positive terminal and
regulator B terminal)
Cooling fan belt slipping Adjust tension G-27
STARTING SYSTEM
Reference
Page
Starter Motor Does Battery discharged or defective Recharge or Replace G-23, 9-S9
Not Operate Slow blow fuse blown Replace G-37
Safety switch improperly adjusted or defective Repair or Replace 9-S17
9-S22
starter relay, safety switches, between safety
switches and starter relay, between battery
positive terminal and starter motor)
Timer relay defective Replace 9-S13
Starter motor defective Repair or Replace 9-S26
Pre-heat indicator Battery discharged or defective Recharge or Replace G-23, 9-S9
Lamp Does Not Light Slow blow fuse blown Replace G-37
When Main Switch Is
in Pre-heat Position Wiring harness disconnected or improperly Repair or Replace –
pre-heat indicator, between pre-heat indicator
and glow plugs)
Pre-heat indicator defective Replace 9-S37
9-S4 (EU)
AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP
Reference
Page
Engine Does Not Solenoid fuse blown Replace G-37
Stop When Main Timer replay defective Replace 9-S13
Switch Is Turned OFF
connected (timer relay, between timer relay and
AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP (WITH OPC TYPE)

Reference
Page
Engine Does Not Seat switch defective Replace 9-S23
Stop Key stop solenoid relay defective Replace 9-S13
Rear PTO switch defective Adjust and Replace 9-S23
Main gear shift switch defective Adjust and Replace 9-S22
Wiring harness disconnected or improperly Adjust and Replace –
Starter Motor Does Seat switch defective Replace 9-S23
Not Operate Key stop solenoid relay defective Replace 9-S13
Rear PTO switch defective Replace 9-S23
Main gear shift switch defective Replace 9-S22
Starter defective Replace 9-S26
Wiring harness disconnected or improperly Replace –
CHARGING SYSTEM
Reference
Page
Charging Lamp Does Fuse blown (10A) Replace G-37
Not Light when Main Wiring harness disconnected or improperly Repair or Replace –
Switch Is Turned ON connected (between main switch AC terminal
and panel board, between panel board and
alternator)
Alternator defective Repair or Replace 9-S29
Charging Lamp Does Wiring harness disconnected or improperly Repair or Replace –
Not Go Off When connected (between main switch B terminal and
Engine Is Running alternator, between panel board and alternator)
Alternator defective Repair or Replace 9-S29
9-S5 (EU)
LIGHTING SYSTEM
Reference
Page
Head light Does Not Fuse blown (10A) Replace G-37
combination switch 1 terminal and headlight
Tail Light Does Not Fuse blown (10A) Replace G-37
combination switch T terminal and tail light)
Illumination Light Fuse blown (10A) Replace G-37
combination switch T terminal and panel board)
Hazard Light Does Fuse blown (10A) Replace G-37
Not Light Bulb blown Replace G-38
connected
Flasher unit defective Replace 9-S35
Hazard switch defective Replace 9-S33
Hazard Indicator Bulb blown Replace 9-S33
Lamp Does Not Light Wiring harness disconnected or improperly Replace –
connected
Hazard Light Does Flasher unit defective Repair or Replace 9-S35
Not Flicker
Turn Signal Light Fuse blown (10 A) Replace G-37
connected
Flasher unit defective Replace 9-S35
Combination switch defective Replace 9-S31
Hazard Light Does Flasher unit defective Replace 9-S35
Not Flicker
Turn Signal Light Flasher unit defective Replace 9-S35
Does Not Flicker Combination switch defective Replace 9-S31
9-S6 (EU)
EASY CHECKER™
Reference
Page
Oil Pressure Lamp Engine oil pressure too low Repair engine –
Lights Up When Engine oil insufficient Replenish G-18
Engine Is Running
Oil pressure switch defective Replace 9-S36
Short circuit between oil pressure switch lead Repair 9-S36
and chassis
Oil Pressure Lamp Bulb blown Replace 9-S37
Does Not Light When Oil pressure switch defective Replace 9-S36
Main Switch Is
Turned On and Wiring harness disconnected or improperly Repair or Replace –
Engine Is Not connected (between panel board and oil
Running pressure switch)
GAUGES
Reference
Page
Fuel Gauge Does Not Fuel gauge defective Repair 9-S38
Function Fuel level sensor defective Replace 9-S38
connected (between panel board and fuel level
sensor)
Coolant Temperature Coolant temperature gauge defective Replace 9-S38
Gauge Does Not Coolant temperature sensor defective Replace 9-S38
Function
connected (between panel board and coolant
temperature sensor)
9Y1210272ELS0002US0
9-S7 (EU)
STARTER
Commutator O.D. 28.0 mm 27.0 mm
1.10 in. 1.06 in.
Difference of Less than 0.05 mm

O.D.'s 0.02 mm 0.002 in.
0.0008 in.
Mica Undercut 0.60 mm 0.20 mm
0.024 in. 0.0079 in.
Brush Length 14.0 mm 9.0 mm
0.551 in. 0.35 in.
GLOW PLUG
Glow Plug Resistance Approx. 0.9 Ω –
9Y1210272ELS0003US0
9-S8 (EU)

CAUTION
• To avoid accidental short circuit, be sure to attach the positive cable to the positive terminal before the
negative cable is attached to the negative terminal.
• Never remove the battery cap while the engine is running.
• Keep electrolyte away from eyes, hands and clothes. If you are spattered with it, wash it away completely
with water immediately.
• Keep open sparks and flames away from the battery at all times. Hydrogen gas mixed with oxygen
becomes very explosive.
IMPORTANT
• If the machine is to be operated for a short time without battery (using a slave battery for starting), use
additional current (lights) while engine is running and insulate terminal of battery. If this advice is
disregarded, damage to regulator may result.
9Y1210272ELS0004US0

(1) Battery
Battery Voltage
1. Stop the engine and turn the main switch off.
2. Connect the COM (−) lead of the voltmeter to the battery's
negative terminal post and the (+) lead to the positive terminal
post, and measure the battery voltage.
3. If the battery voltage is less than the factory specification, check
the battery specific gravity and recharge the battery.
Battery voltage Factory specification More than 12 V
9Y1210272ELS0005US0
Battery Terminal Connection

1. Turn the main switch on, and turn on the head light.
2. Measure the voltage across the battery's positive terminal post
and the cable terminal, the voltage across the battery's negative
terminal post and the chassis.
3. If the measurement exceeds the factory specification, clean the
battery terminal posts and cable clamps, and tighten them
firmly.
Potential difference Reference value Less than 0.1 V
WSM000001ELS0001US0
9-S9 (EU)
Battery Specific Gravity
1. Check the specific gravity of the electrolyte in each cell with a
hydrometer.
2. When the electrolyte temperature differs from that at which the
hydrometer was calibrated, correct the specific gravity reading
following the formula mentioned in (Reference).
3. If the specific gravity is less than 1.215 (after it is corrected for
temperature), charge or replace the battery.
4. If the specific gravity differs between any two cells by more than
0.05, replace the battery.
NOTE
• Hold the hydrometer tube vertical without removing it from
the electrolyte.
• Do not suck too much electrolyte into the tube.
• Allow the float to move freely and hold the hydrometer at
eye level.
• The hydrometer reading must be taken at the highest
electrolyte level.
(Reference)
• Specific gravity slightly varies with temperature. To be exact,
the specific gravity decreases by 0.0007 with an increase of
1 °C (0.0004 with an increase of 1 °F) in temperature, and
increases by 0.0007 with a decreases of 1 °C (0.0004 with a
decrease of 1 °F).
Therefore, using 20 °C (68 °F) as a reference, the specific
gravity reading must be corrected by the following formula :
– Specific gravity at 20 °C = Measured value + 0.0007 ×
(electrolyte temperature −20 °C)
– Specific gravity at 68 °F = Measured value + 0.0004 ×
(electrolyte temperature −68 °F)
Specific Gravity State of Charge
1.260 Sp. Gr. 100 % Charged
1.140 Sp. Gr. Very Little Useful Capacity
1.110 Sp. Gr. Discharged
At an electrolyte temperature of 20 °C (68 °F)
(a) Good (c) Bad

(b) Bad
WSM000001ELS0002US0
9-S10 (EU)
(2) Main Switch

Main Switch
1. Remove the steering wheel and the meter panel.
2. Disconnect the 4P connector (1) and remove the main switch
(2).
3. Perform the following checks.
(1) 4P Connector (2) Main Switch
9Y1210272ELS0008US0
Connector Voltage
1. Measure the voltage with a voltmeter across the connector B
terminal and chassis.
2. If the voltage differs from the battery voltage (11 to 14 V), the
wiring harness is faulty.
Connector B terminal –
Voltage Approx. battery voltage
Chassis
9Y1210272ELS0009US0
Main Switch Continuity

1) Main Switch Key at OFF Position
1. Set the main switch OFF position.
2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the B terminal
and the AC terminal, B terminal and 50 terminal, B terminal and
19 terminal.
3. If infinity is not indicated, the contacts of the main switch are
faulty.
B terminal – AC terminal
Resistance B terminal – 50 terminal Infinity
B terminal – 19 terminal
9Y1210272ELS0010US0
2) Main Switch Key at ON Position
1. Set the main switch ON position.
and the AC terminal.
3. If 0 Ω is not indicated, the B - AC contact of the main switch are
faulty.
Resistance B terminal – AC terminal 0Ω
9Y1210272ELS0011US0
9-S11 (EU)
3) Main Switch Key at PREHEAT Position
1. Set and hold the main switch key at the PREHEAT position.
and the 19 terminal, and measure the resistance across the B
terminal and the AC terminal.
3. If 0 Ω is not indicated, these contacts of the main switch are
faulty.
B terminal – 19 terminal
Resistance 0Ω
B terminal – AC terminal
9Y1210272ELS0012US0
(3) Key Stop Solenoid

Key Stop Solenoid Test
1. Disconnect the 1P connector from the key stop solenoid.
2. Remove the key stop solenoid from the engine.
3. Connect the jumper leads from the battery positive terminal to
the 1P connector, and from the battery negative terminal to the
key stop solenoid body.
4. If the solenoid plunger is not attracted, the key stop solenoid is
faulty.
(1) Battery (12 V)
9Y1210272ELS0076US0
9-S12 (EU)
(4) Key Stop Solenoid Relay

Connector Voltage
1. Disconnect the connector from the key stop solenoid relay after
turning the main switch off.
2. Measure the voltage with a voltmeter across the connector 4
4. If these voltage differ from the battery voltage, the wiring
harness or main switch is faulty.
Connector 4 terminal –
Chassis
Chassis
NOTE
• The key stop solenoid relay shall be installed with a part of
connector dawn ward.
If the key stop solenoid relay is mounted up-side-down or
inclined side ways, water may intrude timer solenoid
failure.
(1) Timer Relay (2) Connector
9Y1210272ELS0074US0
Key Stop Solenoid Relay Actuator Test
1. Connect a jumper lead from the terminal 3 and terminal 4 to the
battery positive terminal.
2. Connect a jumper lead from the terminal 2 to battery negative
terminal.
3. Connect a jumper lead from the terminal 1 to a lamp.
4. The lamp lights when disconnect the jumper lead from the
terminal. Confirm the lamp goes out at approx. 7 to 13 seconds
later after the lamp lights.
5. If the lamp does not go out at approx. 7 to 13 seconds, key stop
solenoid relay is faulty.
(1) Jumper Lead (2) Key Stop Solenoid Relay
9Y1210272ELS0075US0
9-S13 (EU)
(5) Timer Relay 2 (With OPC Type)

Connector Voltage
1. Disconnect the connector from the timer relay 2 after turning the
main switch off.
4. If these voltage differ from the battery voltage, the wiring
harness or main switch is faulty.
Chassis
Chassis
NOTE
• The timer relay 2 shall be installed with a part of connector
dawn ward.
If the timer relay 2 is mounted up-side-down or inclined
side ways, water may intrude timer solenoid failure.
(1) Timer Relay 2
9Y1210272ELS0077US0
Timer Relay 2 Actuator Test

1. Connect a jumper lead from the terminal 1 and terminal 2 to the
battery positive terminal.
2. Connect a jumper lead from the terminal 3 to battery negative
terminal.
3. Connect a jumper lead from the terminal 4 to a lamp.
4. The lamp lights when disconnect the jumper lead from the
terminal. Confirm the lamp goes out at approx. 1 seconds later
after the lamp lights.
5. If the lamp does not go out at approx. 1 seconds, timer relay is
faulty.
(1) Jumper Lead (2) Timer Relay 2
9Y1210272ELS0078US0
9-S14 (EU)
(6) Relay (2M) (With OPC Type)

Connector Voltage
1. Disconnect the connector from the relay (2M) after turning the
main switch off.
2. Apply the battery voltage between terminal 1 and 2.
3. Check for continuity between terminal 3 and 5.
4. Check for continuity between terminal 6 and 7.
5. If ohm is not indicated, renew the relay (2M).
(1) Relay (2M)
9Y1210272ELS0079US0
(7) Starter Relay

Starter Relay
1. Remove the panel board and starter relay (1).
2. Apply battery voltage across 2 terminal and 4 terminal, and
check for continuity across 1 terminal and 3 terminal.
3. If 0 Ω is not indicated, renew the starter relay (1).
Battery
voltage is
applied
1 terminal –
Resistance across 2 0Ω
3 terminal
terminal
and 4
terminal
(1) Starter Relay 1 to 4 : Terminals

9Y1210272ELS0015US0
9-S15 (EU)
(8) Glow Plug

Glow Plug Lead Terminal Voltage
1. Disconnect the wiring lead (1) from the glow plug (2) after
2. Turn the main switch key to the "PREHEAT" position, and
measure the voltage between the lead terminal and the chassis.
3. Turn the main switch key to the "START" position, and measure
the voltage between the lead terminal and the chassis.
4. If the voltage at either position differs from the battery voltage,
the wiring harness or main switch is faulty.
Main switch key at
"PREHEAT"
(Lead terminal –
Chassis Main switch key at
Approx. battery voltage
"START"
(1) Wiring Lead (Positive) (2) Glow Plug

9Y1210272ELS0067US0
Glow Plug Continuity
1. Disconnect the lead from the glow plugs.
2. Measure the resistance between the glow plug terminal and the
chassis.
3. If 0 ohm is indicated, the screw at the tip of the glow plug and
the housing are short-circuited.
4. If the factory specification is not indicated, the glow plug is
faulty.
Glow plug resistance Factory specification Approx. 0.9 Ω
WSM000001ELS0012US0
9-S16 (EU)
(9) Safety Switches

[A] Without OPC Type
Safety Switch Continuity
1. Disconnect the safety switch connectors.
2. Connect the circuit tester to the safety switch connectors.
3. Measure the resistance between connectors.
4. If the safety switch is defective, replace it.
Safety Switch State Resistance
Main gear shift lever in
0Ω
neutral
Main gear shift switch
Infinity
engage
PTO gear shift lever in
0Ω
neutral position
Rear PTO switch
Infinity
engage
(1) Main Gear Shift Switch (2) Rear PTO Switch

9Y1210272ELS0019US0
Main Gear Shift Switch Check

1. Disconnect the main gear shift switch connectors.
2. Connect the circuit tester leads to the main gear shift switch 2P
connector.
(When the main gear shift lever is in "NEUTRAL" position)
1. Measure the resistance between terminals.
2. If the continuity is not 0 Ω, the switch is faulty, replace it.
(When the main gear shift lever is in "1st or REVERSE"
position)
2. If the continuity is not infinity, the switch is faulty, replace it.
(When the main gear shift lever is in "2nd or 3rd" position)
When the main gear shift
lever is in "NEUTRAL" 0Ω
position
Resistance lever is in "1st or
REVERSE" position
Infinity
lever is in "2nd or 3rd"
position
(1) Main Gear Shift Lever [A] Main Gear Shift Lever
(2) Main Gear Shift Switch Connector "NEUTRAL" position
[B] Main Gear Shift Lever "1st or
REVERSE" position
[C] Main Gear Shift Lever "2nd or
3rd" position
9Y1210272ELS0018US0
9-S17 (EU)
Rear PTO Switch Check
1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the rear PTO switch (2).
2. Connect the circuit tester leads to the rear PTO switch 2P
connector.
(When the PTO gear shift lever is in "NEUTRAL" position)
(When the PTO gear shift lever is in "540 rpm rear PTO speed
and 2500 rpm mid PTO Speed (If equipped the mid PTO)"
position)
(When the PTO gear shift lever is in "540 rpm PTO speed"
position)
When the PTO gear shift
position
lever is in "rpm rear PTO
Resistance speed and 2500 rpm mid
PTO Speed (If equipped
the mid PTO)" position Infinity

lever is in "540 rpm PTO
speed" position
(1) PTO Gear Shift Lever [A] PTO Gear Shift Lever "NEUTRAL"
(2) PTO Switch Connector position
[B] PTO Gear Shift Lever "rpm rear
PTO speed and 2500 rpm mid
PTO Speed (If equipped the mid
PTO)" position
[C] PTO Gear Shift Lever "540 rpm
PTO Speed" position
9Y1210272ELS0020US0
9-S18 (EU)
[B] B1220 (With OPC Type)

0Ω
neutral
Infinity
engage
0Ω
neutral position
Rear PTO switch
Infinity
engage

9Y1210272ELS0071US0
connector.
position)
position
REVERSE" position
Infinity
position
REVERSE" position
3rd" position
9Y1210272ELS0073US0
9-S19 (EU)
connector.
" position)
position)
position
Resistance lever is in "1000 rpm rear
PTO speed" position
Infinity
speed" position
[B] PTO Gear Shift Lever "1000 rpm
rear PTO speed" position
PTO Speed" position
9Y1210272ELS0070US0
Seat Switch Continuity Check

1. Disconnect the safety switch leads.
2. Connect the circuit tester leads to the seat switch terminals.
(When switch is not pushed)
(When switch is pushed)
When seat switch is
Infinity
not pushed
Resistance
When seat switch is
0Ω
pushed
(1) Seat Switch

9Y1210272ELS0072US0
9-S20 (EU)
Parking Brake Switch Check
1. Disconnect the parking brake switch.
2. Connect the circuit tester leads to the parking brake switch
terminals.
When parking brake
Infinity
switch is not pushed
Resistance
When parking brake
0Ω
switch is pushed

9Y1210272ELS0080US0
9-S21 (EU)
[C] B1620 and B1820 (With OPC Type)

0Ω
neutral
Infinity
engage
0Ω
neutral position
Rear PTO switch
Infinity
engage

9Y1210272ELS0019US0

connector.
position)
position
REVERSE" position
Infinity
position
REVERSE" position
3rd" position
9Y1210272ELS0018US0
9-S22 (EU)
connector.
and 2500 rpm mid PTO Speed (If equipped the mid PTO)"
position)
position)
position
lever is in "rpm rear PTO
Resistance speed and 2500 rpm mid
PTO Speed (If equipped
the mid PTO)" position Infinity

speed" position
[B] PTO Gear Shift Lever "rpm rear
PTO speed and 2500 rpm mid
PTO Speed (If equipped the mid
PTO)" position
PTO Speed" position
9Y1210272ELS0020US0
1. Disconnect the safety switch leads.
2. Connect the circuit tester leads to the seat switch terminals.
When seat switch is
Infinity
not pushed
Resistance
When seat switch is
0Ω
pushed
(1) Seat Switch

9Y1210272ELS0069US0
9-S23 (EU)
1. Disconnect the parking brake switch.
2. Connect the circuit tester leads to the parking brake switch
terminals.
When parking brake
Infinity
switch is not pushed
Resistance
When parking brake
0Ω
switch is pushed

9Y1210272ELS0068US0
9-S24 (EU)
[D] B1620 and B1820 (With OPC and PTO Gear Shift Lever Switch Type)
See page 9-S22
9Y1210272ELS0081US0
See page 9-S22
9Y1210272ELS0082US0
See page 9-S23
9Y1210272ELS0083US0
See page 9-S23
9Y1210272ELS0084US0
See page 9-S24
9Y1210272ELS0085US0
PTO Gear Shift Lever Switch Check
1. Disconnect the PTO gear shift lever switch.
2. Connect the circuit tester leads to the PTO gear shift lever
switch terminals.
When PTO gear shift
lever switch is turned ON
on
Resistance
When PTO gear shift
lever switch is turned OFF
off
(1) PTO Gear Shift Lever Switch (2) Terminal

9Y1210272ELS0086US0
9-S25 (EU)
(10) Starter
Motor Test
CAUTION
• Secure the starter to prevent it from jumping up and down
while testing the motor.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery.
2. Disconnect the battery positive cable and the leads form the
starter M terminal.
3. Remove the starter from the engine.
4. Disconnect the connecting lead (2) from the starter C terminal
(1).
5. Connect a jumper lead from the connecting lead (2) to the
battery positive terminal post.
6. Connect a jumper lead momentarily between the starter motor
housing and the battery negative terminal post.
7. If the motor does not run, check the motor.
(1) C Terminal (2) Connecting Lead
9Y1210272ELS0021US0
Magnet Switch Test
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery.
2. Disconnect the battery positive cable and the leads from the
starter M terminal.
3. Remove the starter from the engine.
4. Disconnect the connecting lead (3) from the starter C terminal
(2).
5. Connect a jumper lead from the starter S terminal (1) to the
battery positive terminal post.
6. Connect a jumper lead momentarily between the starter C
terminal (2) and the battery negative terminal post.
7. If the pinion gear does not pop out, check the magnetic switch.
NOTE
• This test should be carried out for a short time, about 3 to
5 seconds.
(1) S Terminal (3) Connecting Lead
(2) C Terminal
9Y1210272ELS0022US0
(11) AC Dynamo [B1220]

Dynamo No-load Voltage
1. Disconnect the lead wires from the dynamo.
2. Start the engine, and check the generating voltage of the
dynamo.
14 to 15 V (at engine idling
speed)
Voltage Factory specification
36 to 39 V (at engine high
speed)
9Y1210272ELS0023US0
9-S26 (EU)
(12) Regulator [B1220] (Without OPC Type)

Continuity Across Regulator's Terminals
1. Remove the regulator.
2. Check with a tester whether the regulator is in optimum
condition or not.
3. If the continuity is not measured as show in the table below, the
contacts of the regulator are faulty.
Q Check Table
NOTE
• Use a high-resistance tester as far as possible.
(1) Regulator 1: Sky Blue

2: Black
3: Sky Blue
4: Green
5: Yellow
6: Red
9Y1210272ELS0024US0
9-S27 (EU)
(13) Regulator [B1220] (With OPC Type)

Continuity Across Regulator's Terminals
1. Remove the regulator.
2. Check with a tester whether the regulator is in optimum
condition or not.
3. If the continuity is not measured as show in the table below, the
contacts of the regulator are faulty.
Q Check Table
NOTE
• Use a high-resistance tester as far as possible.
(1) Regulator 1: Sky Blue

2: Black
3: Sky Blue
4: Green
5: Yellow
6: Red
9Y1210272ELS0087US0
9-S28 (EU)
(14) Alternator [B1620 and B1820]

Alternator
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (3) from alternator after turning the
main switch OFF.
2. Perform the following checkings.
(1) B Terminal (3) 2P Connector
(2) Alternator
9Y1210272ELS0025US0
Connector Voltage
1. Turn the main switch OFF. Measure the voltage between the B
terminal (1) and the chassis.
2. Turn the main switch ON. Measure the voltage between the IG
terminal (3) and the chassis.
Voltage (Main
B terminal – Chassis Approx. battery voltage
switch at OFF)
Voltage (Main
IG terminal – Chassis Approx. battery voltage
switch at ON)
(1) B Terminal (3) IG Terminal

(2) Alternator (4) L Terminal
9Y1210272ELS0026US0
No-Load Test
1. Connect the 2P connector (6) to previous positions of the
alternator after turning the main switch OFF.
2. Connect the jumper lead (3) between IG terminal (4) and B
terminal (2).
3. Start the engine and then set at idling speed.
4. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
5. Measure the voltage between the B terminal (2) and the
chassis.
6. If the measurement is less than the factory specifications,
disassemble the alternator and check the IC regulator.
Voltage Factory specification More than 14 V
(Reference)
• Once the engine has started, the alternator temperature rises
quickly up to an ambient temperature of 70 to 90 °C (158 to
194 °F). As the temperature goes higher than 50 °C (122 °F),
the alternator voltage slowly drops ; at higher than 100 °C
(212 °F), it drops by about 1 V.
(1) Voltmeter (4) IG Terminal
(2) B Terminal (5) L Terminal
(3) Jumper Lead (6) 2P Connector
WSM000001ELS0014US0
9-S29 (EU)
(15) Head Light Switch [B1220]

Head Light Switch
1. Remove the steering wheel and steering boot.
2. Disconnect the head light switch connector.
3. Remove the head light switch (1) and perform the following 1) to
3).
(1) Head Light Switch
1) Connector Voltage
1. Measure the voltage with a voltmeter across the connector B1
terminal and chassis when the main switch is "ON" position.
2. If the voltage differs from the battery voltage, the wiring harness
and main switch is faulty.
Main switch
B1 terminal
Voltage at "ON" Battery voltage
– Chassis
position
2) Head Light Switch Continuity When Setting Switch at OFF

Position
1. Set the light switch to the OFF position.
2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the B1
terminal to the terminal 1.
3. If infinity is not indicated, the head light switch is faulty.
Resistance (Switch
B1 terminal – 1 terminal Infinity
at OFF position)
3) Head Light Switch Continuity When Setting Switch at On

Position
1. Set the light switch to the ON position.
terminal to the terminal 1.
3. If 0 Ω is not indicated, the head light switch is faulty.
Resistance (Switch
B1 terminal – 1 terminal 0Ω
at ON position)
9Y1210272ELS0028US0
9-S30 (EU)
(16) Combination Switch [B1620 and B1820]

Combination Switch
2. Disconnect the combination switch connector.
3. Remove the combination switch (1) and perform the following
checks 1) to 8).
(1) Combination Switch
1) Connector Voltage
1. Measure the voltage with a voltmeter across the connector B1
terminal and chassis when the main switch is "ON" position.
and main switch is faulty.
Main switch
B1 terminal
Voltage at "ON" Battery voltage
– Chassis
position
2) Head Light Switch Continuity When Setting Switch at OFF

Position
1. Set the light switch to the OFF position.
terminal to the T terminal, the B1 terminal to the terminal 1.
3. If infinity is not indicated, the head light switch is faulty.
Resistance B1 terminal – T terminal
(Switch at OFF Infinity
position) B1 terminal – 1 terminal
3) Head Light Switch Continuity When Setting Switch at On

Position
1. Set the light switch to the ON position.
terminal to the T terminal and the B1 terminal to the terminal 1.
3. If 0 Ω is not indicated, the head light switch is faulty.
(Switch at ON 0Ω
4) Turn Signal Light Switch Continuity When Setting Switch

Knob OFF Position
1. Set the turn signal light switch to the OFF position.
terminal and L terminal, the B2 terminal and R terminal.
3. If infinity is not indicated, the combination switch is faulty.
(Switch at ON Infinity
9-S31 (EU)
Knob at L Position
1. Set the turn signal light switch to the L position.
terminal and L terminal.
3. If 0 Ω is not indicated, the combination switch is faulty.
Resistance B2 terminal – L terminal 0Ω
(Switch knob at 1
position) B2 terminal – R terminal Infinity

Knob at R Position
1. Set the turn signal light switch to the R position.
terminal and R terminal.
3. If 0 Ω is not indicated, the combination switch is faulty.
Resistance B2 terminal – R terminal 0Ω
(Switch knob at 2
position) B2 terminal – L terminal Infinity
7) Horn Button Continuity when Not Pushing Button

1. Set the horn button to the OFF position.
terminal and the H terminal.
Resistance
(Horn button at OFF B3 terminal – H terminal Infinity
position)
8) Horn Button at "ON" Position

1. Set the horn button to the ON position.
terminal and the H terminal.
Resistance
(Horn button at ON B3 terminal – H terminal 0Ω
position)
9Y1210272ELS0029US0
9-S32 (EU)
(17) Hazard Switch [B1620 and B1820]

Hazard Switch
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from hazard switch after
disconnect the battery negative cable.
3. Remove the hazard switch.
4. Perform the following checks.
(1) Hazard Switch
9Y1210272ELS0030US0
Connector Voltage
1. Connect the battery negative cable, then measure the voltage
with a voltmeter across the a terminal and chassis.
2. If the voltage differ from the battery voltage, the wiring harness
is faulty.
Voltage a terminal – Chassis Approx. battery voltage
(1) 4P Connector
9Y1210272ELS0031US0
Hazard Switch continuity

1. Measure the resistance with ohmmeter across the a terminal (3)
and c terminal (5), and across the d terminal (6) and e terminal.
2. If the measurement is not following below, the hazard switch (1)
or the bulb (2) are faulty.
Resistance
a terminal – c terminal Infinity
(Switch at OFF)
Resistance
a terminal – c terminal 0Ω
(Switch at ON)
Resistance
d terminal – e terminal Approx. 13 Ω
(Bulb)
(1) Hazard Switch (4) b Terminal

(2) Bulb (5) c Terminal
(3) a Terminal (6) d Terminal
9Y1210272ELS0032US0
9-S33 (EU)
(18) Brake Switch [B1620 and B1820]

Brake Switch
1. Disconnect the leads, and measure the resistance with an
ohmmeter across the brake switch leads.
2. If the measurement differs from the table below, the brake
switch is faulty or need to adjust the brake switch position.
When brake pedal is
0Ω
depressed
Resistance
When brake pedal is
Infinity
released
(1) Brake Switch

9Y1210272ELS0033US0
Brake Switch Distance

1. Depress the brake pedal (2), and set the distance B.
2. Check the brake light by operating brake pedal (2). The brake
light should come ON when the brake pedal (2) is depressed. If
not, adjust the brake switch (1) distance A.
(Reference)
• Distance B : 15 to 25 mm (0.59 to 0.98 in.)
(1) Brake Switch A : Distance
(2) Brake Pedal B : Distance
9Y1210272ELS0034US0
9-S34 (EU)
(19) Flasher Unit [B1620 and B1820]

Flasher Unit
1. Disconnect the connector from the flasher unit.
2. Turn the main switch at ON position.
3. Measure the voltage between the terminal 12, 13 and chassis.
4. If the voltage differ from the battery voltage, the wiring harness
is faulty.
Terminal 12 – Chassis Approx. battery voltage
Voltage
Terminal 13 – Chassis Approx. battery voltage
(Reference)
1 0.85Y Lighting switch
2 0.85Y/R Position light
3 0.5W/B Position light switch
4 0.85R/Y Main switch (AC)
5 0.85R/W Turn signal light (R)
6 0.5G/R Turn signal light switch (R)
7 0.5B/W Ground
8 0.85G/W Turn signal light (L)
9 0.5W/G Turn signal light switch (L)
10 0.5G/B Hazard indicator lamp
11 0.5W/L Hazard switch
12 1.25R/B Battery voltage
13 0.85R/L Battery voltage (lighting)
Q Flasher Unit Actuation Test

1. Set the hazard switch to the ON position, and make sure the
hazard light gives 60 to 120 flashers for a minute.
2. Set the main switch to the ON position and move the turn signal
switch to the left. Make sure the left-hand light gives flashes.
Then move the turn signal switch to the right and make sure the
right-hand light gives flashes. Make sure the same actions as
above result.
3. If both the hazard switch and the turn signal switch and the turn
signal switch function but the above actions do not take place,
replace the flasher unit with new one.
(1) Flasher Unit
9Y1210272ELS0035US0
9-S35 (EU)
(20) Easy Checker™

Easy Checker™
1. Remove the panel board and disconnect the meter panel
connector (1) from it.
2. Turn the main switch on.
3. Measure the voltage with a voltmeter across the terminal (Red /
Yellow) and the earth terminal (Black).
fuses and main switch should be checked.
(1) Meter Panel Connector
9Y1210272ELS0036US0
Engine Oil Pressure Switch
1. Disconnect the lead from the engine oil pressure switch (1) after
turning the main switch OFF.
2. Turn the main switch ON and connect a jumper lead (2) from the
lead to the chassis.
3. If the engine oil pressure indicator lamp does not light, the panel
board circuit or the wiring harness is faulty.
(1) Engine Oil Pressure Switch (a) From Oil Pressure Lamp
(2) Jumper Lead
9Y1210272ELS0038US0
Engine Oil Pressure Switch Continuity

1. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the switch
terminal and the chassis.
2. If 0 Ω is not indicated in the normal state, the switch is faulty.
3. If infinity is not indicated at pressure over 4.9 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2,
7 psi), the switch is faulty.
In normal state 0Ω
Resistance (Switch
terminal – Chassis) At pressure over approx.
Infinity
4.9 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2, 7 psi)
9Y1210272ELS0039US0
Glow Plug
1. Disconnect the lead from the glow plug (1).
2. Connect the tester positive cable to the glow plug lead and
negative one to the chassis.
3. Measure its voltage with a voltmeter, after turning the main
switch to the preheating or starting position.
4. If its voltage is not approximately the battery one, check the
main switch or wiring harness.
(1) Glow Plug (a) From Main Switch 19 and
Pre-heat Indicator Lamp
9Y1210272ELS0040US0
9-S36 (EU)
Monitor Lamp (for Charge, Engine Oil Pressure, Pre-heat,
Illumination) [B1220]
1. Removing the meter panel from the tractor.
2. Remove the each lamp.
3. Measure the lamp resistance.
4. If it is infinity, replace the lamp with new.
Lamp spec. All lamp 12 V, 1.7 W
(1) Illumination (4) Charge

(2) Pre-heat (5) Engine Oil Pressure
(3) Turn Signal
9Y1210272ELS0041US0
Monitor Lamp (for Charge, Engine Oil Pressure, Pre-heat,
Illumination, Position and Trailer Indicator) [B1620 and B1820]]
1. Remove the meter panel from the tractor.
2. Remove the each lamp.
3. Measure the lamp resistance.
4. If it is infinity, replace the lamp with new.
Lamp spec. All lamp 12 V, 1.7 W
(1) Illumination (5) Engine Oil Pressure

(2) Pre-heat (6) Trailer Indicator
(3) Turn Signal (7) Position
(4) Charge
9Y1210272ELS0042US0
9-S37 (EU)
(21) Gauge
Fuel Level Sensor
1) Sensor Continuity
1. Remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank.
2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the sensor
terminal and its body.
3. If the reference values are not indicated, the sensor is faulty.
Float at
upper-most 1 to 5 Ω
Resistance (Sensor Reference position A
terminal – its body) value Float at
lower-most 103 to 117 Ω
position B
A : Float at upper most position B : Float at lower most position

9Y1210272ELS0043US0
Coolant Temperature Sensor
1) Lead Terminal Voltage
1. Disconnect the lead from the coolant temperature sensor after
2. Turn the main switch on and measure the voltage with a
voltmeter across the lead terminal and the chassis. If the
voltage differs from the battery voltage, the wiring harness fuse
or coolant temperature gauge is faulty.
Voltage Lead terminal – Chassis Approx. battery voltage
2) Sensor Continuity
1. Measure the resistances with an ohmmeter across the sensor
terminal and the chassis.
2. If the reference value is not indicated, the sensor is faulty.
Approx. 161 Ω at 120 °C (248 °F)
Resistance (Sensor Reference Approx. 27.4 Ω at 100 °C (212 °F)
terminal – Chassis) value Approx. 51.9 Ω at 80 °C (176 °F)
Approx. 153.9 Ω at 50 °C (122 °F)
(1) Coolant Temperature Sensor (a) From Temperature Gauge

9Y1210272ELS0044US0
Fuel Gauge and Coolant Temperature Gauge Continuity

1. Remove the meter panel from the tractor.
2. Check the continuity with an ohmmeter across the U terminal (1)
and IGN terminal (3) and across the U terminal (1) and GND
terminal (2).
3. If infinity is indicated, the coolant temperature sensor is faulty.
4. Check the continuity with an ohmmeter across the U terminal (4)
and IGN terminal (6) and across the U terminal (4) and GND
terminal (5).
5. If infinity is indicated, the fuel gauge is faulty.
(1) U Terminal (4) U Terminal (Temperature)
(2) GND Terminal (5) GND Terminal (Temperature)
(3) IGN Terminal (6) IGN Terminal (Temperature)
9Y1210272ELS0045US0
9-S38 (EU)

(1) Starter
(1) Screw
(2) Front Bracket
(3) Magnetic Switch
(4) Overrunning Clutch
(5) Drive Lever
(6) Internal Gear
(7) Shaft
(8) Planetary Gear
(9) Shaft Assembly
(10) Ball
(11) Gasket
(12) Yoke
(13) Armature
(14) Brush Holder
(15) Rear End Frame
(16) Screw
(17) Through Bolt
(18) Plate
(19) Gasket
1. Disconnect the connecting lead from the magnetic switch (3).

2. Remove the screw (1) and remove the magnet switch (3).
3. Remove the screw (16) and through bolt (17), and separate the rear end frame (15).
4. Remove the brush holder (14).
5. Draw out the armature (13) and yoke (12).
6. Remove the gasket (11), gasket (19) and plate (18).
7. Draw out the shaft assembly (9) with the drive lever (5).
NOTE
• Do not damage the brush and commutator.
• Do not miss the ball (10).
9Y1210272ELS0046US0
9-S39 (EU)
(2) AC Dynamo [B1220]

Stator
1. Remove the nut (3) and separate the stator comp. (4).
2. Unscrew the screws (1) and remove the stator (2).
(1) Screw (3) Nut
(2) Stator (4) Stator Comp.
9Y1210272ELS0047US0
Rotor
1. Tap out the shaft (1) from the rotor (3).
(When reassembling)
• Take care the direction of the collar (4), the flat side should face
to the pulley (2) side.
(1) Shaft (4) Collar
(2) Pulley (5) Bearings
(3) Rotor (6) Collar
9Y1210272ELS0048US0
(3) Alternator [B1620 and B1820]

Pulley
1. Secure the hexagonal end of the pulley shaft with a
double-ended ratchet wrench as shown in the figure, loosen the
pulley nut with a socket wrench and remove it.
(When reassembling)
58.4 to 78.9 N·m
Tightening torque Pulley nut 5.95 to 8.05 kgf·m
43.1 to 58.2 lbf·ft
WSM000001ELS0023US0
Rear End Cover

1. Unscrew the three rear end cover screws and the B terminal
nut, and remove the rear end cover.
WSM000001ELS0024US0
Brush Holder
1. Unscrew the two screws holding the brush holder, and remove
the brush holder (1).
(1) Brush Holder
WSM000001ELS0025US0
9-S40 (EU)
IC Regulator
1. Unscrew the three screws holding the IC regulator, and remove
the IC regulator (1).
(1) IC Regulator
WSM000001ELS0026US0
Rectifier
1. Remove the four screws holding the rectifier and the stator lead
wires.
2. Remove the rectifier (1).
(1) Rectifier
WSM000001ELS0027US0
Rear End Frame

1. Unscrew the two nuts and two screws holding the drive end
frame and the rear end frame.
2. Remove the rear end frame (1).
(1) Rear End Frame
WSM000001ELS0028US0
Rotor
1. Press out the rotor (1) from drive end frame (3).
IMPORTANT
• Take special care not to drop the rotor and damage the slip
ring or fan, etc..
(1) Rotor (3) Drive End Frame
(2) Block
WSM000001ELS0029US0
Retainer Plate
1. Unscrew the four screws holding the retainer plate, and remove
the retainer plate (1).
(1) Retainer Plate
WSM000001ELS0030US0
9-S41 (EU)
Bearing on Drive End Side
1. Press out the bearing from drive end frame (3) with a press and
jig (1).
(1) Jig (3) Drive End Frame
(2) Block
WSM000001ELS0031US0
Bearing at Slip Ring Side

1. Lightly secure the rotor (1) with a vise to prevent damage, and
remove the bearing (2) with a puller (3).
(1) Rotor (3) Puller
(2) Bearing
WSM000001ELS0032US0
9-S42 (EU)
[3] SERVICING
(1) Starter
Commutator and Mica
1. Check the contact face of the commutator for wear, and grind
the commutator with emery paper if it is slightly worn.
2. Measure the commutator O.D. with an outside micrometer at
several points.
3. If the minimum O.D. is less than the allowable limit, correct the
commutator on a lathe to the factory specification.
4. If the difference of the O.D.'s exceeds the allowable limit, correct
the commutator on a lathe to the factory specification.
5. Measure the mica undercut.
6. If the undercut is less than the allowable limit, correct it with a
saw blade and chamfer the segment edges.
28.0 mm
1.10 in.
Commutator O.D.
27.0 mm
Allowable limit
1.06 in.
Less than
Factory specification 0.02 mm
Difference of O.D.'s 0.0008 in.
0.05 mm
Allowable limit
0.0020 in.
0.60 mm
0.024 in.
Mica undercut
0.20 mm
Allowable limit
0.0079 in.
(1) Segment (a) Correct

(2) Undercut (b) Incorrect
(3) Mica
9Y1210272ELS0059US0
Brush Wear
1. If the contact face of the brush is dirty or dusty, clean it with
emery paper.
2. Measure the brush length (A) with vernier calipers.
3. If the length is less than the allowable limit, replace the yoke
assembly and brush holder.
14.0 mm
0.551 in.
Brush length (A)
9.0 mm
Allowable limit
0.35 in.
9Y1210272ELS0060US0
Brush Holder
1. Check the continuity across the brush holder and the holder
support with an ohmmeter.
2. If it conducts, replace the brush holder.
Brush holder –
Resistance Infinity
Holder support
WSM000001ELS0036US0
9-S43 (EU)
Armature Coil
1. Check the continuity between the commutator and armature coil
core with an ohmmeter.
2. If it conducts, replace the armature.
3. Check the continuity between the segments of the commutator
with an ohmmeter.
4. If it does not conduct, replace the armature.
9Y1210272ELS0062US0
(2) Alternator
Bearing
1. Check the bearing for smooth rotation.
2. If it does not rotate smoothly, replace it.
WSM000001ELS0039US0
Stator
1. Measure the resistance across each lead of the stator coil with
an ohmmeter.
2. If the measurement is not within factory specification, replace it.
3. Check the continuity across each stator coil lead and core with
an ohmmeter.
replace it.
Resistance Factory specification Less than 1.0 Ω
WSM000001ELS0040US0
Rotor
1. Measure the resistance across the slip rings with an ohmmeter.
2. If the resistance is not the factory specification, replace it.
3. Check the continuity across the slip ring and core with an
ohmmeter.
replace it.
Resistance Factory specification 2.9 Ω
WSM000001ELS0041US0
9-S44 (EU)
Slip Ring
1. Check the slip ring for score.
2. If scored, correct with an emery paper or on a lathe.
3. Measure the O.D. of slip ring with vernier calipers.
4. If the measurement is less than the allowable limit, replace it.
14.4 mm
0.567 in.
Slip ring O.D.
12.8 mm
Allowable limit
0.504 in.
9Y1210272ELS0066US0
Brush Wear
1. Measure the brush length with vernier calipers.
2. If the measurement is less than allowable limit, replace it.
3. Make sure that the brush moves smoothly.
4. If the brush is defective, replace it.
10.5 mm
0.413 in.
Brush length
8.4 mm
Allowable limit
0.331 in.
WSM000001ELS0043US0
Rectifier
1. Check the continuity across each diode of rectifier with an
analog ohmmeter. Conduct the test in the (R x 1) setting.
2. The rectifier is normal if the diode in the rectifier conducts in one
direction and does not conduct in the reverse direction.
IMPORTANT
• Do not use a 500 V megger for measuring because it will
destroy the rectifier.
NOTE
• Do not use an auto digital multimeter. Because it's very
hard to check the continuity of rectifier by using it.
WSM000001ELS0044US0
IC Regulator
1. Check the continuity across the B terminal and the F terminal of
IC regulator with an analog ohmmeter. Conduct the test in the
(R x 1) setting.
2. The IC regulator is normal if the IC regulator conducts in one
direction and does not conduct in the reverse direction.
IMPORTANT
• Do not use a 500 V megger for measuring because it will
destroy the IC regulator.
NOTE
• Do not use an auto digital multimeter. Because it is very
hard to check the continuity of IC regulator by using it.
WSM000001ELS0045US0
9-S45 (EU)
EDITOR:
KUBOTA FARM & INDUSTRIAL MACHINERY SERVICE, LTD.
64, ISHIZU-KITAMACHI, SAKAI-KU, SAKAI-CITY, OSAKA, 590-0823, JAPAN
PHONE : (81)72-241-1129
FAX : (81)72-245-2484
E-mail : ksos-pub@kubota.co.jp
Printed in Japan 2011. 07, S, EI, EI, e Code No.9Y111-02723

KUBOTA Corporation 2009. 02, S, EI, EI, e

Kubota WSM B1220 B1620 B1820

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Kubota WSM B1220 B1620 B1820

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kubota WSM B1220 B1620 B1820

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WORKSHOP MANUAL

KiSC issued 07, 2011 A

KiSC issued 07, 2011 A

KiSC issued 07, 2011 A

1. SAFETY FIRST .............................................................................................................................. I-1

KiSC issued 07, 2011 A

DISCARD FLUIDS CORRECTLY

PREVENT ACID BURNS

PREPARE FOR EMERGENCIES

B1620 and B1820

KiSC issued 07, 2011 A

1. TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION....................................................................................................... G-1

KiSC issued 07, 2011 A

[2] CYLINDER NUMBER

3. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRICAL

• Do not let wiring contact dangerous part.

• Repair or change torn or aged wiring immediately.

• Securely clamp, being careful not to damage wiring.

• Clamp wiring so that there is no twist, unnecessary sag, or

• In installing a part, take care not to get wiring caught by it.

• After installing wiring, check protection of terminals and

• In separating connectors, do not pull wire harnesses.

• Make certain that there is no female connector being too open.

• Make certain plastic cover is large enough to cover whole

[5] HANDLING OF CIRCUIT TESTER

[6] COLOR OF WIRING

(1) Wire Color (2) Stripe

4. LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT

Parking brake lever – 1 Moderate

Indication on top of bolt No-grade or 4T 7T 9T

Indication on top of nut No-grade or 4T

[2] STUD BOLTS

[3] METRIC SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS

[4] AMERICAN STANDARD SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS WITH

G1/2 49 to 88 5.0 to 9.0 37 to 65 – – –

6. MAINTENANCE CHECK LIST

Indication on hour meter Refer-

7. CHECK AND MAINTENANCE

[1] DAILY CHECK

• While sitting in the operator's seat

• Turning the key switch.

• Starting the engine.

[2] CHECK POINTS OF INITIAL 50 HOURS

(1) Drain Plug (A) Proper Oil Level

(1) Clutch Pedal (3) Turnbuckle

[3] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 50 HOURS

(1) Front Wheel Mounting Nut A : Front

[4] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 100 HOURS

(1) Adjusting Bolt [A] B1220

Adjusting Brake Pedal

(1) Parking Brake Pedal A : PULL

Checking Fuel Line

[5] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 200 HOURS

Checking Radiator Hose and Hose Clamp

[6] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 400 HOURS

(1) Drain Plug [A] Without Mid-PTO Model

[7] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 800 HOURS

[8] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 1500 HOURS